Case IH Tractor MAXXUM 110-140 Operator Manual

CASE
MAXXUM 110 Multi-controller


TRACTORS
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)
This tractor complies strictly with the European Regulations on electro-magnetic emissions.
However, interference may arise following the installation of any additional equipment, as this may
not necessarily meet the required standards.
Because electromagnetic interference can seriously affect the function of the vehicle and/or give
rise to dangerous situations, you MUST observe the following:
● Ensure that all equipment from third-party manufacturers fitted on the tractor carries the CE
mark.
● The maximum output level of equipment that emits radiation (radios, telephones etc.) must not
exceed the legal limits prescribed in the country in which you are operating the tractor.
● The electromagnetic field created by auxiliary equipment must never exceed 24V/m, particularly
in proximity to electronic components.
Failure to comply with these requirements will render the Case IH warranty null and void.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY 1
END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS ......................................................................................... 1-2
ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................................................1-6
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 1-7
ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE ............................................................................................ 1-13
SAFETY LABELS ................................................................................................................................... 1-14
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS ................................................................................................................. 1-19
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION .............................................................................................................. 1-20
SECTION 2 1
CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION 1
BEFORE STARTING UP .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
CAB CONTROLS ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS ......................................................................................................... 2-54
GEARBOX OPERATION ........................................................................................................................ 2-60
SECTION 3 1
FIELD OPERATION 1
BEFORE STARTING UP .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
TOWING THE TRACTOR ......................................................................................................................... 3-3
TRANSPORTING THE TRACTOR ........................................................................................................... 3-4
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
STOPPING THE ENGINE ...................................................................................................................... 3-10
CONSTANT ENGINE SPEED CONTROL .............................................................................................. 3-13
HEADLAND MANAGEMENT CONTROL (HMC) ................................................................................... 3-15
TURN ASSIST STEERING ASSISTANCE (if fitted) ............................................................................... 3-25
REAR PTO ..............................................................................................................................................3-27
FRONT PTO AND HYDRAULIC FRONT POWER LIFT
(where fitted) .......................................................................................................................................3-42
ELECTRONIC FRONT POWER LIFT CONTROL EFH (where fitted) .................................................... 3-47
ELECTRONIC POWER LIFT CONTROL (EDC) .................................................................................... 3-52
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES ....................................................................... 3-66
3-POINT POWER LIFT LINKAGE .......................................................................................................... 3-81
LIFT RODS, LOWER AND TOP LINKS ..................................................................................................3-83
DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS ....................................................................................... 3-91
REAR TOW HITCH .................................................................................................................................3-96
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES ......................................................................................................... 3-110
PNEUMATIC TRAILER BRAKES ......................................................................................................... 3-112
FRONT WHEEL TRACK SETTING ......................................................................................................3-118
REAR WHEEL TRACK SETTING ........................................................................................................ 3-123
TRACTOR WEIGHT ............................................................................................................................. 3-130
TYRE AIR PRESSURE LEVELS AND PERMISSIBLE LOAD BEARING CAPACITIES ...................... 3-137
SECTION 4 1
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 1
GENERAL NOTES ................................................................................................................................... 4-1
LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS .............................................................................................................. 4-8
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE TABLE ....................................................................................... 4-10
WHEN WARNING LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED ................................................................................... 4-12
EVERY 10 OPERATING HOURS OR DAILY ......................................................................................... 4-16
EVERY 50 OPERATING HOURS .......................................................................................................... 4-19
EVERY 100 OPERATING HOURS ........................................................................................................ 4-26
EVERY 1200 OPERATING HOURS OR 12 MONTHS .......................................................................... 4-38
EVERY 1200 OPERATING HOURS OR 2 YEARS ............................................................................... 4-43
EVERY 3 YEARS ................................................................................................................................... 4-50
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................... 4-51
FUSES AND RELAYS ........................................................................................................................... 4-59
PROTECTION FOR ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WHEN CHARGING THE BATTERY OR
DURING WELDING WORK ............................................................................................................... 4-64
SECTION 5 1
TROUBLESHOOTING 1
ENGINE .................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
GEARBOX ................................................................................................................................................ 5-5
HYDRAULICS ........................................................................................................................................... 5-6
3-POINT POWER LIFT LINKAGE ............................................................................................................ 5-7
BRAKES ................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
CAB ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 5-10
SECTION 6 1
VEHICLE STORAGE 1
TRACTOR STORAGE .............................................................................................................................. 6-1
SECTION 7 1
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT 1
SECTION 8 1
TRACTOR SPECIFICATION 1
VEHICLE WEIGHTS ................................................................................................................................ 8-6
ENGINE .................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
FUEL SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................... 8-7
COOLING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................. 8-7
GEARBOX ................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
BRAKES ................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
REAR PTO ............................................................................................................................................... 8-8
FRONT PTO ............................................................................................................................................. 8-9
STEERING ................................................................................................................................................8-9
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE ............................................................................................................ 8-9
HYDRAULICS SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................... 8-9
3-POINT POWER LIFT ............................................................................................................................. 8-9
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES .............................................................................................................. 8-11
HYDRAULIC FRONT POWER LIFT (HPL) ............................................................................................ 8-11
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................... 8-12
MINIMUM TIGHTENING TORQUE OF SCREW CONNECTIONS ........................................................ 8-13
MINIMUM TIGHTENING TORQUES OF SCREW CONNECTIONS ...................................................... 8-14
SECTION 9 1
CHECKLIST FOR 50-HOUR INITIAL INSPECTION 1
SECTION 10 1
INDEX 1
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
TO THE OWNER
GENERAL NOTES SAFETY
These operating instructions have been produced to Page 1 - 7. to Page 1 - 12. cover the precautions
provide you with instructions for correctly running in, which must be taken to ensure your own safety and
driving and operating as well as for maintaining your that of others. Read the safety precautions and
new tractor. Please therefore read through these observe the advice given before operating the tractor.
operating instructions carefully. The tractor is intended
for all standard agricultural work. FIRST 50 HOURS MAINTENANCE
Do not hesitate to contact your authorised dealer if The 50-hour maintenance reports can be found in
you ever have any questions relating to your tractor. section 9 at the back of this manual.
The dealer has trained specialist staff, genuine spare After 50 operating hours the tractor, together with this
parts and the technical equipment required to satisfy manual, should be taken to your dealer. The dealer
all your servicing requirements. will carry out the recommended 50-hour maintenance
In terms of concept and design, this tractor has been and fill in the maintenance reports (Page 9 - 1. and
designed for maximum performance, economic Page 9 - 3.). The first sheet (Page 9 - 1.) is the
viability and user-friendliness in a wide range of dealer's copy and should be removed by the dealer
applications. It has been carefully inspected in the after the maintenance has been carried out. The
factory and by your authorised dealer before being second sheet (Page 9 - 3.) is your copy of the
delivered to ensure that the machine is in optimum maintenance which has been carried out. Ensure
technical condition. To make sure it stays in this that you and the dealer sign both copies.
condition and always operates in a faultfree manner, it
SPARE PARTS
is important that you carry out the maintenance work
described in Section 4 of this operating manual at the Your attention is drawn to the fact that only genuine
specified intervals. spare parts have been tested by the manufacturer
and have corresponding certification. Installing and/or
STORING THE OPERATING MANUAL using non-genuine spare parts can impair the function
of the tractor and put its operational safety at risk. The
There is a storage pocket for the operating manual
manufacturer accepts no liability for damage caused
behind the seat. The manual should always be stored
by the use of non-genuine spare parts or additional
there when not in use.
equipment. Only use genuine spare parts from CNH
CLEANING THE TRACTOR Case IH. In some cases, the use of non-genuine
spare parts will render certain authorisations for the
Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with tractor void.
sophisticated electronic controls. This should be
borne in mind when cleaning the tractor, particularly if Modifications may only be made to the tractor with the
using a high pressure cleaner. Even though every written approval of the manufacturer's customer
precaution has been taken to protect electronic service department.
components and connections, the pressure
WARRANTY
generated by some of these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress cannot be The warranty for your tractor is based upon the
guaranteed. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do warranty legislation of your country and the
not stand too close to the tractor and avoid directing contractual relationship with the dealer. However, the
the jet at electronic components, electrical warranty shall expire if the tractor is not used, set up
connections, seals, filler caps, etc. Never direct a cold or maintained according to the instructions in the
water jet at a hot engine or exhaust. operating manual.
1-1
SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS

● You have acquired a device ("DEVICE") that includes software licensed by CHN America LLC from
Microsoft Licensing, GP or its affiliates ("MS"). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well
as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
● IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA"), YOU MUST NOT
USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT CNH AMERICA
LLC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANYANY
USE OF SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE Of THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT.)
● GRANTING OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license: - You may use the
SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
- NO FAULT TOLERANCE. THE SOFTWARE HAS NO FAULT TOLERANCE. CNH AMERICA LLC
HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND
MSHAS RELIED UPON CNH AMERICA LLC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO
DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
- NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided "AS IS" and with all
possible faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
ACCURACY AND COMPLEXITY (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) LIES WITH YOU. ALSO,
THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENTS. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING
THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND
ARE NOT BINDING ON MS.
- No liability for certain damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE.
THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS IN ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF US DOLLARS TWO
HUNDRED AND FIFTY (250.00).
- Limitations on reverse engineering, decompilation, and disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by law notwithstanding this limitation.
- SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or a permanent transfer of the DEVICE, and
only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also
include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
- EXPORT LIMITATIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to US export jurisdiction.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the
SOFTWARE, including the US Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by the USA and other governments. For additional information see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
1-2
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
The tractor and its major components are identified
using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.
These serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes
are needed by the dealer for ordering spare parts
and for service interventions. They also allow the
tractor to be identified in the event of theft.
The following description provides the locations of
the identification data.
1
Vehicle identification plate
The tractor's type plate (1) is located on the left-
hand radiator support. Please enter the information
on the type plate reproduced below.
2
Identification of the tractor
The serial number and model identification details
are stamped on to the top of the front support (1).
These numbers also appear on the tractor's type
plate.
1-3
Engine number
The serial number and date code are stamped on to
the engine plate.
The plate is fitted above the engine on the cylinder
head cover. The plate also provides information on
engine settings and compliance with emission
regulations where required
Enter the details in the following boxes so that you
can refer to them at any time.
Engine serial no.
4
Identification of the gearbox
The factory plate and serial number (1) can be
found at the top on the gearbox housing. Access to
the number can be gained by removing the plate in
the floor of the cab as shown in the illustration. This
number is repeated on the vehicle identification
plate. Enter the details in the following boxes so that
you can refer to them at any time
Gearbox number.....................................
1-4
Identification of the cab

The serial number and other details can be seen on
the OECD authorisation plate. This plate is located
on the right-hand side of the cab trim panel below
the rear windscreen. Enter the cab serial number
below for easy reference.
Cab serial no...........................................
6
Details on vehicle weight
The vehicle weight plate contains important details
on the permissible total weight of the tractor and
trailers and/or attached equipment. This plate can be
found on the right-hand side of the cab trim panel,
below the rear window.
It gives the permissible maximum weights which
must not be exceeded to avoid impairing the tractor's
operating safety. ECOLOGY AND THE
ENVIRONMENT
1-5
ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Soil, air and water are all vital elements for agriculture circuit because the parts could explode.
and for life in general. In cases where legislation
9. When welding, protect hoses, since these could
governing the handling of particular substances
be damaged by splashes, which could in turn
required by sophisticated technology has not been lead to leaks developing (oil, coolant).
prescribed, common sense should be exercised when
using and disposing of chemical and petrochemical
products.
The following recommendations may be helpful:
● Familiarise yourself with the legislation
applying in your country and make sure you
understand it.
● In cases where no legislation yet exists, make
sure you obtain the supplier's information for
the oil, filters, batteries, fuel, antifreeze,
cleaning agent etc. with regard to their effects
on people and the environment and how
these products should be safely stored, used
and disposed of. Agricultural consultants will
also be able to help you in many cases.
USEFUL HINTS
1. Avoid filling tanks using unsuitable containers
or fuel delivery systems which are pressurised
and therefore cause spillage.
2. Generally speaking, you should not allow oils,
fuels, acids, solvents etc. to come into contact
with skin. . Most of these substances contain
elements which are hazardous to health.
3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn
contaminated fuels and/or used oil in
conventional heating systems.
4. Avoid spillage of engine coolant, engine/
gearbox/hydraulic oil, brake fluids etc. Do not
mix discharged brake fluids or fuels with
lubricants. Store these in a safe place until such
time as they can be disposed of in accordance
with local regulations.
5. Modern coolant additives, i.e. antifreeze and
other additives, should be replaced every two
years. They must not be allowed to enter the
ground but must be collected and disposed of
safely.
6. Do not open up the air conditioning system. It
contains gases which must not be allowed to
escape into the atmosphere. Your dealer or air
conditioning specialist will have a special
extractor for this purpose and must always
recharge the system.
7. Repair leaks or defects in the engine cooling
system or hydraulics immediately.
8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised
1-6
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The best operator is a careful operator. Most
accidents can be avoided by observing certain
precautions. To avoid accidents, read and observe the
following precautions before driving, operating or
servicing the tractor. Equipment should only be
operated by those persons who are responsible for it
and who have received appropriate instruction.
SAFETY INFORMATION
In this manual you will find text preceded by the
words NOTE, ATTENTION, IMPORTANT,
CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. The meaning 6. Do not allow anyone other than the operator to
of these texts is as follows: drive the tractor. This is only permitted for driver
training or instruction. For these situations, the
MACHINE SAFETY
cab can be fitted with an extra seat. Never carry
NOTE: THIS TEXT INDICATES THE passengers in the tractor.
CORRECT OPERATING TECHNIQUE OR 7. Always keep children away from the tractor and
PROCEDURE. other agricultural equipment.
8. Do not attempt to undertake modifications to
WARNING: THIS TEXT WARNS THE the tractor or any of its components or functions
OPERATOR OF POSSIBLE MACHINE (or allow anyone else to do so) without first
DAMAGE WHICH MAY OCCUR IF A CERTAIN consulting your dealer.
PROCEDURE IS NOT FOLLOWED.
9. Fit all protective fixtures before starting the
IMPORTANT: THIS TEXT TELLS THE engine or operating the tractor.
READER ABOUT SOMETHING THEY NEED
DRIVING THE TRACTOR
TO KNOW IN ORDER TO AVOID MINOR
DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE WHICH MAY 1. Always start and drive the tractor from the
OCCUR IF A CERTAIN PROCEDURE IS NOT driver's seat.
FOLLOWED. 2. Be aware of other road users when driving on
public roads. Pull up from time to time to allow
THE TRACTOR
vehicles behind you to pass. Observe the
1. Before using the tractor, read the operating speed limit for agricultural tractors in your
manual carefully. Insufficient understanding of country.
operations may result in accidents. 3. When driving on public roads, use an all-round
2. Only appropriately qualified and trained light and/or warning plate for slow-moving
persons should be allowed to operate the vehicles to indicate to other road users that the
tractor. vehicle is moving slowly and poses a potential
hazard.
3. To avoid falls, use the handrails and footboards
to climb in and out of the tractor. Keep the IMPORTANT: Local regulations should be
footboards and platform free of mud and earth observed regarding the use of all-round lights.
debris.
4. Dip your headlights whenever you encounter
4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety another vehicle at night. Ensure that the lights
labels. are set so that oncoming drivers are not
5 Keep safety labels clean. dazzled.
5. Reduce speed before braking or making a turn.
For an emergency stop, brake with both wheels
at the same time. When travelling at road
speeds or on journeys on public roads, ensure
that both brake pedals are interlocked to ensure
the function of the trailer brakes and that the
1-7
tractor brakes and all-wheel braking systems 11. Always check your overhead clearance,
(only for tractors with all-wheel drive) function especially when transporting the tractor. Pay
evenly. due attention to where you are driving,
particularly at the ends of rows, on roads, round
trees and below low overhanging obstacles.
12. To prevent the tractor from overturning, always
drive with due care and at an appropriate
speed, particularly on uneven ground, over
ditches and round bends.
6. For tractors with all-wheel drive, the drive to the

front axle is engaged automatically, transferring
the braking effect to all four wheels whenever
both brake pedals are applied. Owners should
note that the effect of all-wheel braking
significantly increases braking power. Exercise
appropriate caution when braking forcefully.
7. When towing heavy loads at road speeds,
perform forceful braking as carefully as
possible.
13. Exercise particular caution when driving on
steep slopes.
14. Should the tractor become stuck or the tyres be
frozen to the ground, reverse the tractor out of
difficulty to prevent it from overturning.
8. When travelling downhill, keep the tractor in the

same gear as you would use for driving uphill.
Do not allow the tractor to coast.
9. To ensure safe operation, a towed vehicle with
a total weight greater than that of the tractor
must be fitted with a braking system in
accordance with national regulations.
10. Never use the differential lock when turning. If
the differential lock is engaged, the tractor
cannot turn.
1-8
OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Before starting the tractor: Apply the parking
brake, put the PTO control into the OFF
position, move the power lift control lever down
and move the levers for the remote control
valves and the gear stick into Neutral.
2. Do not start the engine or operate any controls
(except the external hydraulic power lift or the
PTO control, where fitted) if standing beside the
tractor. Only start the engine and operate the
controls from the driver's seat.
3. Do not bypass the Neutral starter switch for the
gearbox and PTO. If the neutral starting
8. Do not park the tractor on a steep gradient.
controls malfunction, contact your dealer. Only
use jump leads in the recommended manner. 9. The cab is designed such that the noise level
Improper use may mean that you lose control for the operator is minimised and fulfils or
over the tractor. exceeds the applicable standards in this
respect. The noise level (acoustic pressure
level) in the working area may, however, still
exceed 85 dB(A) when working between
buildings or in confined spaces with the cab
windows open. It is therefore recommended
that the operator wear suitable ear protectors
when working under high noise level conditions.
4. Avoid unintentional contact with the gearshift

levers when the engine is running. This can
cause the tractor to move suddenly.
5. Do not get out of the tractor while it is in motion.
6. Should the power steering or engine fail, stop 10. Do not allow the engine to run in confined
the tractor immediately since it will be difficult to spaces without adequate ventilation. Exhaust
control and steer. gases are toxic and can cause death.
7. Before getting out, park the tractor on level 11. Only tow with the pick-up hitch with the hook,
ground, apply the parking brake, lower any drawbar or lower link drawbar in the lowest
attached equipment to the ground, disengage position. Use only a drawbar pin which locks
the PTO and switch off the engine. into place. Towing with the tractor's rear axle or
at any point above the axle can cause the
tractor to tip over.
12. Always select position control whenever
equipment is to be attached or transported.
Ensure that hydraulic couplers are correctly
attached and can be detached safely if the
equipment accidentally comes loose.
1-9
OPERATING THE PTO

1. When operating equipment driven by the PTO,
switch off the engine, disengage the PTO and
wait until the PTO has stopped before climbing
out and disconnecting the equipment.
13. If the tractor rises at the front when heavy

equipment is attached to the 3-point power lift,
fit front or front wheel weights. Do not operate
the tractor if the front is too light.
14. When travelling uphill, e.g. out of a ditch or up a
steep bank, allow the clutch to engage slowly.
Disengage the clutch promptly if the front 2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the
wheels rise off the ground. PTO and particularly when working near
rotating equipment.
15. Ensure that attached equipment or accessory
parts are correctly mounted and suitable for use 3. When carrying out stationary operation of
with the tractor, that they do not overload the equipment driven by the PTO, apply the parking
tractor and are operated and maintained in brake and block the rear wheels at the front and
accordance with the manufacturer's back.
instructions.
16. Be aware that improper use of your tractor may
represent a hazard to the operator and to
bystanders. Do not overload the tractor and do
not operate with attached equipment which are
unsafe, not designed for the task in hand or are
poorly maintained.
17. Do not leave attached equipment in a raised
position if the vehicle is stationary or
unattended.
18. Do not operate attached equipment near naked
flames. 4. To avoid accidents, equipment driven by the
19. When working with toxic chemical sprays, PTO should not be cleaned, adjusted, released
always wear protection for the face. Follow the or serviced while the engine is running. Ensure
instructions given on chemical containers. that the PTO is disengaged.
5. Ensure that the PTO guard is always in position
and always fit the PTO cap whenever the PTO
is not being used.
1 - 10
TRACTOR MAINTENANCE Unqualified persons must not be allowed to remove or

attempt to repair pumps, injectors, nozzles or other
parts of the fuel injection or hydraulic systems. Failure
to comply with these instructions may lead to serious
injury.
● Do not try to feel for leaks with your hand.

Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search
for leaks.
● Shut off the engine and discharge the system

before connecting or disconnecting any lines.
1. The cooling system works under pressure

controlled by the compensation tank cap.
Removing the cap while the system is still hot is
a dangerous process. Always turn the cap
slowly to the first stop position to release the
pressure and only then remove it completely.
Never remove the cover from the top of the
radiator before removing the compensation
tank cap.
2. Do not smoke while refuelling. Keep a safe
distance from naked flames. ● Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurising any lines.
3. Keep the tractor and other equipment,
particularly steering system and brakes, in
good, sound condition to ensure your own ● Should fuel or oil penetrate the skin, seek
safety and to meet legal requirements. medical advice immediately. Otherwise,
gangrene may develop.
4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep naked flames
away from the battery and cold-weather starting 8. Do not attempt to undertake modifications to
aids. Use the jumper cable in accordance with the tractor or any of its components or functions
the instructions provided to prevent the (or allow anyone else to do so) without first
formation of sparks (risk of explosion). consulting your dealer.
5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning 9. Constant contact with engine oil over an
system. Escaping refrigerant can cause extended period can cause skin cancer. Avoid
frostbite or other injuries. Special equipment extended contact with used engine oil. Wash
and tools are required to service the air the skin as soon as possible with soap and
conditioning system. Contact your dealer for water.
maintenance. 10. Keep equipment clean and well-maintained.
6. Switch off the engine before carrying out any 11. Properly dispose of all drained fuel/oils and
maintenance work on the tractor. removed filters.
7. The hydraulic oil and fuel in the injection system 12. Tractor wheels are extremely heavy. Exercise
are highly pressurised. Pressurised hydraulic caution when working with the wheels. When
oil or fuel, if discharged, can penetrate the skin storing, ensure that they cannot fall down and
and cause serious injury. cause injuries.
1 - 11
DIESEL FUEL 9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.

1. Never mix petrol, alcohol or blended fuels into 10. Plan fuel deliveries so that summer fuels do not
diesel fuel. Such combinations can increase the have to be used in the winter.
risk of fire and explosion. These mixtures are
even more explosive than pure petrol when SAFETY CAB
stored in closed containers, such as a fuel tank. The cab structural frame (CSF) is a special safety
Do not use these mixtures.
feature of your machine.
2. Never remove the tank cap or refuel the tractor
Never fix attachments to the cab for towing purposes.
while the engine is running or the engine is hot.
The cab structural frame is a certified component and
any damage, fire, corrosion or modification will
weaken the structure and reduce the protection it
offers to the operator. Should this occur, the cab
structural frame MUST be replaced so as to provide
the same level of protection as a new one.
After an accident, fire or if the tractor tips over, the
following procedure MUST be followed before using
the machine again:
● The cab structural frame MUST be replaced.
● The cab structural frame or suspension,

3. Do not smoke while refuelling. The same
driver's seat, seat suspension, seatbelts,
applies when near fuel. Keep a safe distance
from naked flames. assembly components and assembly wiring
inside the cab MUST be carefully examined
4. Do not leave the fuel filler nozzle unattended for damage.
when refuelling.
5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Only fill up to ● Any damaged parts MUST be replaced.
the lower area of the filler neck to allow room for DO NOT WELD AND NEVER ATTEMPT TO
expansion. REALIGN OR REPAIR DAMAGED PARTS OF THE
6. Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately. DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT FRAME OR
SUPPORTS.
7. Always close the tank cap securely.
8. If the original tank cap is lost, replace with
another approved cap. A non-approved cap
may not be sound.
WHENEVER YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL IT MEANS:

ATTENTION!
BE ALERT! THIS AFFECTS YOUR SAFETY!
1 - 12
ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE

WARNING
Your tractor is equipped with a Roll Over
Protective Structure (ROPS) such as a roll bar or
a cab with a roll bar. The roll over protective
structure may take the form of a cab frame or a
two-bar or four-bar cage used for the protection
of the operator to minimise the possibility of
serious injury.
The Roll Over Protective Structure is a special
safety component of your tractor.
Do not attach any devices to the roll over protective
structure for towing purposes. DO NOT drill holes to
the roll over protective structure.
The roll over protective structure and
components fitted to it are a certified system.
Any damage, fire, corrosion or modification will
weaken the structure to such an extent that
optimum driver safety is no longer guaranteed. If
this occurs, the Protective Structure MUST be
replaced so that the driver again has optimum
protection. Contact your authorised dealer to
have the roll over protective structure inspected
and replaced.
After an accident, fire or if the tractor tips over, the
following procedure MUST be followed before using
the machine again:
● The cab structural frame MUST be replaced.
● The cab structural frame or suspension,

driver's seat, seat suspension, seatbelts,
assembly components and assembly wiring
inside the cab MUST be carefully examined
for damage.
● Any damaged parts MUST be replaced.

DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, FIT
REINFORCEMENTS OR REPAIR THE
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN
ANY WAY CAN REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL
INTEGRITY OF THE STRUCTURE WHICH
COULD CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
IN THE EVENT OF FIRE, ROLLING OVER,
COLLISION OR ACCIDENT.
1 - 13
SAFETY LABELS
The labels shown on the following pages are affixed to the tractor in the positions indicated in the drawings below.
They are there for your own safety and that of the individuals with whom you are working. Please take this manual,
walk around the tractor and note the position and meaning of the labels. Go over the labels and operating
instructions detailed in this manual with the operators. Keep labels clean and legible. If they become damaged or
illegible, replacements can be obtained from your dealer.
1 - 14
1. Position:
Left and right sides of the fan
protective grille
Always keep hands and clothing at a safe
distance from the rotating fan and V-belt.
Part number 81871830
8
2. Position:
Right side of radiator
Warning! Pressurised cooling system. Allow to
cool before carefully removing cap. Using a cloth,
turn cap to the first stop position and allow
pressure to subside before removing cap
completely.
Part number 5194556
9
3. Position:
Left-hand A-bar in cab
General warning. Read and observe all warnings
contained in this manual.
10
4. Position:
At rear on both fenders
(tractors with rear operations only)
To avoid accidents when operating the power lift
or PTO from the rear, do not stand on the
equipment or between the equipment and tractor.
11
1 - 15
5. Position:
Left-hand -A-pillar in cab
If the tractor should overturn, keep hold of the
steering wheel. Do not try to jump out.
12
6. Position:
Top of tool box
Do not stand on toolbox.
13
1 - 16
7. Position
Top of starter battery
Do not stand on toolbox.
Danger! Corrosive acid. Potentially explosive gas.
Wear protective glasses. Avoid creating sparks.
See operating manual.
14
8. Position
Radar sensor bracket
To avoid possible eye damage from microwave
signals emitted by the radar sensor, do not look
directly into the sensor face.
15
9. Position:
Hydraulic pressure accumulator(s)
Caution! Pressure accumulator is highly
pressurised. When removing or repairing, note
the instructions in the maintenance manual.
16
10. Position:
Right-hand A-bar in cab
Caution! Read operating manual before
attempting to tow.
17
1 - 17
11. Position:
A/C compressor
Warning! Pressurised liquid. Do not disconnect
piping.
18
12. Position:
Right control console
Caution! Always use grab handles when entering
or leaving platform.
19
13.Position:
Left side of radiator
Warning! Cold starting aid for heating flange. Do not
use ether, otherwise there is a risk of explosion.
20
14.Position:
Right interior A-pillar
Warning! Whenever driving on roads, deactivate the
Fast Steer system. Read the operating manual.
21
1 - 18
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
As a guide when operating your tractor, various universal symbols have been used to represent the
instruments, controls, switches and fuse boxes. The symbols and their meanings are shown below.
Heater flange Warning!

Radio Position control
starting aid Corrosive substance
Battery charging Continuous

PTO Draft control
process current
Fuel level Turn signal Gearbox in neutral Socket
Automatic
Turn signal Standard signal
fuel Creeper gears
1 trailer socket
cut-off
Engine rpm Turn signal Slow or
Wheel slip as a %
(rpm x 100) 2 trailers low setting
Windscreen Raise power lift

Operating hours Fast or high setting
Wiper/wash (rear)
Engine oil Rear window Lower power lift

Direction of travel
pressure Wiper/wash (rear)
Heating
Engine coolant Lifting height
temperature Differential lock
temperature restriction (rear)
controller
Rear axle Lifting height
Coolant level Heating fan
Oil temperature restriction (front)
Air conditioner Gearbox oil

Tractor lamps Power lift locked
system pressure
Headlight Air filter All-wheel drive Hydraulic and

on main beam blocked activated gearbox filter
Headlight All-wheel drive

Parking brake Extend cylinder
on dipped beam not activated
Work Brake fluid

Warning! Retract cylinder
lamp level
Cylinder
Brake lights Trailer brake Hazard warning unit
float function
Malfunction!
Horn Roof beacon Controller See operating
manual
Pressurised system! Malfunction!
Open carefully (alternative symbol)
1 - 19
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION

In accordance with EEC directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this manual are as follows:
Tractor with cab and fixed windscreen with ejector exhaust system
Noise level for operator Noise level for bystanders
Closed (1) Open (2)
Model Gearbox Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**
MAXXUM 110 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

* Test results are in accordance with EU directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.
Maximum noise level at operator’s ear

1) all windows and doors in cab closed, tractor unladen
2) rear window and roof flap open, tractor unladen
** Test results in accordance with EU Directive 74/151/EEC, Annex IV.

In accordance with EEC directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this manual are as follows:
Tractor with cab and fixed windscreen
without ejector exhaust system
Noise level for operator Noise level for bystanders
Closed (1) Open (2)
Model Gearbox Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**

* Test results are in accordance with EU directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.
Maximum noise level at operator’s ear

1) all windows and doors in cab closed, tractor unladen
2) rear window and roof flap open, tractor unladen
** Test results in accordance with EU Directive 74/151/EEC, Annex IV.
1 - 20
SECTION 2
CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
BEFORE STARTING UP
IMPORTANT: Before driving or starting up the If the starter switch is switched off and then on again
tractor, please read the safety precautions too quickly during this transfer of data, some of the
provided in section 1 of this manual. data may be damaged or lost.
Read this section carefully. It describes the layout and When changes have been made to the settings saved
operation of various instruments, switches and control during tractor operations, wait five seconds between
elements on your tractor. Even if you already work switching the ignition switch off and then on again to
with other tractors, you should read this section of the ensure that data is transferred correctly from the
manual carefully to ensure that you are familiar with operating memory to the main memory. Once data
the layout and function of all the tractor's equipment. transfer is complete, the new settings remain
unchanged until they are reprogrammed.
Do not start the engine or try to drive or start up the
tractor before you are fully familiar with all the controls.
Once the tractor is already in motion, it is too late to
learn. If you have any doubt about how to operate the
tractor, please contact your dealer.
Note in particular the recommendations for running in
so that your tractor can reach the long and reliable
service life for which it was designed.
This section covers the following 10 points. If settings
and setting adjustments are required when on the
field, you can find detailed instructions on this in
section 3, Field operation. You will find instructions on
how to operate the various additional equipment in
section 7.
You will find details on lubrication and maintenance in
section 4. The tractor's technical data is listed in
section 8.
A comprehensive index can be found at the end of
this manual.
PROGRAMMING THE TRACTOR FUNCTIONS

The tractor has two pieces of memory equipment for
controlling and saving the settings for numerous
electronic functions. The settings undertaken when
operating the tractor are temporarily saved in the
operating memory. These settings are transferred into
the main memory when the starter switch is turned off
(engine off).
2-1
SECTION 2 – CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
CAB CONTROLS
22
2-2
General overview of tractor controls

Name Page
1. Free
2. Operation of electronic front power lift control (where fitted) ................................................ Page 3 - 47.
3. Range selector lever ............................................................................................................. Page 2 - 62.
4. Armrest for gearbox
Hand throttle ............................................................................................................... Page 2 - 29.
EDC operation ............................................................................................................ Page 3 - 52.
Operation of remote control valves............................................................................. Page 3 - 72.
Gearbox operation ...................................................................................................... Page 2 - 62.
5. Knob for position control ....................................................................................................... Page 3 - 55.
6. EDC operation ...................................................................................................................... Page 3 - 52.
7. PTO controls
Front PTO ................................................................................................................... Page 3 - 42.
Rear PTO.................................................................................................................... Page 3 - 27.
PTO speed.................................................................................................................. Page 3 - 31.
PTO drive shaft (where fitted) ................................................................Page 3 - 37., Page 3 - 27.
8. Electrical connections ........................................................................................................... Page 2 - 22.
9. External controls (where fitted)
3-point power lift linkage ............................................................................................ Page 3 - 64.
Rear PTO.................................................................................................................... Page 3 - 40.
10. Unlocking lever
Auto pick-up hitch with hook ..................................................................................... Page 3 - 103.
Towing hitch ................................................................................................................ Page 3 - 96.
11 Locking handle for rear windscreen ........................................................................................ Page 2 - 5.
12. Cab air filters......................................................................................................................... Page 2 - 10.
13. Air conditioning system controller ('C' pillar) ......................................................................... Page 2 - 13.
14. Parking brake........................................................................................................................ Page 2 - 28.
15. Passenger seat ..................................................................................................................... Page 2 - 21.
16. Seat settings ......................................................................................................................... Page 2 - 25.
17. Clutch pedal, ........................................................................................................................ Page 2 - 28.
18. Steering column setting......................................................................................................... Page 2 - 30.
19. Multifunction switch............................................................................................................... Page 2 - 31.
20. Shuttle lever ......................................................................................................................... Page 2 - 63.
21 Locking handle for front windscreen (where fitted) ................................................................. Page 2 - 6.
22. Dashboard ............................................................................................................................ Page 2 - 33.
23. Enhanced keypad ................................................................................................................. Page 2 - 50.
24. Starter switch .......................................................................................................................... Page 3 - 8.
25. Wiper/washer system controller............................................................................................ Page 2 - 32.
26. Brake pedals ......................................................................................................................... Page 2 - 29.
27. Accelerator pedal .................................................................................................................. Page 2 - 28.
2-3
CAB
Introduction
The cab has been designed to protect the driver and
make the tractor comfortable to operate. The cab
panels, roof and cab floor are insulated on the inside
to reduce the noise level to a minimum.
To enter the cab, use the two wide openings on either
side, which are equipped with comfort-grip handles
and steps with a non-slip covering. The doors and
rear window are equipped with gas springs to hold
them fully open. You can also lock the rear window in
a partially open position to ensure better ventilation
during operations.
Standard cab
The standard equipment provided in the cab includes
a fresh air heating system/defroster, 360 degree
viewing roof, sun visor, shaded windscreens, interior
lights, cigar lighter, ashtray, storage containers,
interior/rear view mirror and a selection of comfortable 23
seats.
The special equipment available includes air
conditioning, radio, rear wipe/wash system, adjustable
rear windscreen and pull-out external mirror.
Cab with low roof
On tractors fitted with a low roof, the height of the cab
is approx. 14 cm (5.5") lower, making work in areas
where height is restricted possible. The standard
equipment provided in the low-roof cab includes a
see-through hatch, air conditioning and a pre-wired
fitting which can be used to install a radio/cassette
recorder/CD player if desired.
24
Cab door handle
Each door has an outside handle and pushbutton (1).
The door can be locked from outside using the key
provided.
25
2-4
Inside door handle

To open the cab door from inside, push up the lever
(2) on the underside of the handle (1). Use the handle
to push the door open.
26
Entering and exiting the cab
Wherever possible, the cab should always be entered
from the left-hand side.
WARNING: When entering the cab from the

right-hand side, do not knock the shift levers.
! Only use the handles provided on the frame
and door.
To enter the cab, step up to the door and open it.

Place one foot on the lowest step, grab the handles on
the 'A' bar and inside of the door, climb up the steps
and enter the cab.
27
Sit down in the driver's seat, grip the door by the knob
(1) if fitted, and pull it towards you to close. Fasten the
seat belt, if fitted.
To leave the cab, take off the seatbelt, open the door,
hold on to the handles and climb backwards out of the
cab, using the handles to climb down.
28
Rear window
The rear window can be locked in its closed position
or in a partially or fully opened position.
To open the window, move the central latch (1) into a
vertical position. Open the window slightly, then press
down the handle so that the locking latch snaps into
the slot (2) on the frame. Alternatively, you can also
swing the window all the way open using two gas-
operated compression springs.
IMPORTANT: Hold on to the window while

opening it. Do not allow it to swing open
unaided. 29
2-5
Pull the window closed (using the handle) and press

down the handle to lock.
Opening windscreen (where fitted)
The windscreen can also be locked in its closed
position or placed in a partially or fully opened
position.
IMPORTANT: Hold on to the window while

opening it. Do not allow it to swing open
unaided.
To close the window, pull closed using both handles at
the same time. Press down the latches until they click
into place.
30
360-degree viewing roof with hatch
The 360-degree viewing roof with hatch allows the
driver to observe the bucket or gripper when the front
loader is raised. The roof-mounted sun visor (1) can
be set as a visor or, if necessary, can be fully closed.
31
2-6
Hatch - Standard cab

The roof hatch gives the driver a clear view when the
front loader is at its highest point.
For additional ventilation, the roof hatch can be folded
into one of three positions. Push up the handles (1) on
the front or rear end to open the hatch. The handles
can also be pushed up in the middle to open the hatch
fully.
To close the hatch, grasp both handles and then pull
the hatch down; the spring mechanism holds the
hatch closed.
NOTE: Before transporting the tractor on a truck or 32
trailer at a speed of more than 50 km/h, ensure that
the roof hatch is locked correctly and cannot open
of its own accord.
The sun visor can be pulled to in order to reduce the

amount of incoming light or fully closed if preferred.
33
Hatch – low roof
In cabs with a low roof, the hatch is in a fixed position
and cannot be tilted.
34
2-7
Sun visor
Pull down the sun visor (1) so that the driver is not
dazzled by the sun. The sun visor will then remain in
the selected position. Slide the sun visor up to draw it
in.
35
Sun visor – in cab with low roof
The sun visor (1) provides shade for the inside of the
cab and protects the driver from glare and dazzle.
To protect against dazzle, pull the sun visor down, or
to provide shade, pull it up.
36
Interior lighting
The interior light (2) has three operating positions. For
continuous lighting, press the rear end. When the
switch is in its central position, the light comes on as
soon as one of the doors is opened.
The doorway lights (1) are switched on in conjunction
with the interior light. This light illuminates the
doorway area when the door is open.
Press at the front end to switch the light off, regardless
of whether the doors are open or closed.
37
Console light
This light (1) provides a soft glow to the gear levers
and hydraulic console. The light comes on when the
tractor lights are turned on. With standard cabs, a
second light is fitted to the left-hand side of the cab to
illuminate the drinks holder and the storage
compartment.
38
2-8
Heater temperature controller

Turn the control knob (2) clockwise to increase the
temperature of the heated air. Turn the knob
anticlockwise until it reaches the stop so that
unheated air flows out of the heating fans.
Blower controller
The heating system (and air conditioning system,
where fitted) is equipped with a four-stage blower.
For the lowest stage, turn the switch (1) clockwise
to the first position. Each time the switch is turned
one step further (clockwise), the blower speed
increases.
39
When the windows are closed, the blower can be
used to create positive pressure in the cab, for
example to prevent dust from penetrating. Provided
that the cab air filters are maintained correctly,
maximum positive pressure and optimum seal
integrity can be achieved with the highest blower
speed.
2-9
Air recirculation
The cab ventilation system is fitted with three filters:
two external filters through which fresh air is drawn
into the cab and one internal recirculating air filter (2).
For maximum recirculation, move the sliding controller
(1) all the way to the right.
WARNING: The cab air filter is designed to

filter dust out of air and does not remove
! chemical vapours. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions to protect yourself against
chemicals which may harm your health.
40
Cab’s air filter
When using crop protection agents, the cab's internal
air filter (recirculating air filter) and external air filters
(3) can be replaced by active carbon filters. Contact
your contractual dealer for more details.
When working with pesticides, both the internal
recirculating air filter and the external filters (3) must
be replaced with the special chemical protection filters
supplied with the tractor.
WARNING: Only use genuine filters from

CNH Case IH when replacing cab air filters. 41
! When replacing used filters, observe the
local regulations for the disposal of
contaminated filter elements.
Safety precautions
Even if chemical vapours are being prevented from
entering the cab as a result of positive pressure,
compliance should be maintained at all times with the
safety precautions specified by the manufacturer.
The protective clothing worn when filling the spraying
system or during any external adjustment work should
be taken off before entering the cab and stored
carefully.
To prevent chemical residues from building up inside
the cab, you should regularly clean the inner trims and
the floor of the cab with a damp cloth.
42
2 - 10
Cab pressure monitoring (where fitted)

To prevent chemical vapours from entering the cab
during the spraying process, you can use the blower
with chemical protection filters to keep the air
pressure in the cab above the ambient air pressure. A
pneumatic display is fitted in the cab for monitoring
the internal pressure.
Cab pressure display
To produce positive pressure in the cab, close all the
windows and set the blower to maximum. Watch the
pressure display and when the lower edge (1) of the
yellow indicator is in the centre of the green area , the
blower speed should be set so that this display
remains unchanged. If the yellow indicator moves into
the red area, increase the blower speed to
compensate for this.
WARNING: If the bottom edge of the yellow

indicator enters the red area of the display
during a spraying process, undertake the
! tests listed below and follow the 43
manufacturer's instructions for safe
operation.
When the blower switch is in the “OFF” position, the

yellow indicator should move into the red area. If the
instrument is not displaying correct readings, the
pressure display should be replaced before operating
the spraying system.
2 - 11
If the blower cannot maintain the correct pressure

level in the cab, you should undertake the following
tests to identify the cause.
1. Check whether the blower is running at
maximum speed.
2. Ensure that all doors and windows are fully
closed.
3. Check whether the external filters are blocked
or their function is being restricted in any way.
4. Examine all door and window seals for
damage.
5. Check the seals on the linkage and levers at
the points where they run through the cab trim
panel.
If the cab pressure is still not maintained once all
these tests have been completed, please contact your
authorised dealer.
Adjustable outlet nozzles
Adjustable outlet nozzles ensure an even distribution
of hot and fresh air through the entire cab. The
nozzles are located on both sides of the driver's seat
and on the instrument console. Each nozzle can be
set individually so that the air flow (when the blower
controller is switched on) reaches the side window or
driver directly. The two nozzles on the upper part of
the instrument console can be set to demist the
windscreen.
To open the round outlet vents (1) on both sides of the
instrument panel, press the flaps and direct the flow of
air as required by turning the ring.
Pull the tab on the rectangular outlet vent (1) upwards
to open it and then set the strength of air flow and
direction of air as required.
44
2 - 12
A/C switch (where fitted)

Depress the switch (3), to activate the air conditioner 1
compressor and lower the temperature of the air
within the cab. The A/C system will only operate with
the blower (1) switched on.
IMPORTANT: The A/C system uses R134A as a
refrigerant. Do not mix it with other
refrigerants. 3
To lower the temperature in the cab quickly, turn the
blower to maximum speed and the heating
temperature controller to OFF. When the air has
cooled sufficiently, adjust the blower speed to
maintain the desired temperature. The windows and 45
doors should remain closed.
In some cases it may be appropriate to have the air
conditioning and the heating on at the same time, e.g.
on a chilly morning, to remove condensation from the
windscreen and the inside of the door window. (The
air conditioner, as well as cooling, also removes
humidity from the cab air). Allow the engine to run
until it has reached operating temperature and then
turn the heating temperature controller (2) and the
blower switch (1) to maximum (all the way to the right).
Turn on the A/C system (3) and adjust the air vents to
direct the air flow, as required.
As soon as the windscreens are clear, switch off the
air conditioning and set the heating system so that the
required cab temperature is maintained.
NOTE: When the weather begins to get
warmer and the heating is no longer needed,
we recommend that you close the heating
shut-off valve (1) on the rear of the inlet
manifold on the right-hand side of the engine.
IMPORTANT: If the air conditioning has not

been used for more than 30 days, allow the
engine to idle for at least 3 minutes from the
time when it was switched on.
46
2 - 13
IMPORTANT: Always switch the air

conditioning system off as soon as no more
cooled or dehumidified air is needed. Ensure
that the air filter is maintained regularly for
perfect air conditioning system functions.
Refer to section 4.
WARNING: The refrigerant used in the

! air conditioning system has a boiling
point of -12 °C.
● Due to the risk of fire and explosion, never

allow parts of the air conditioning system to
come into contact with naked flames or high
levels of heat.
● Never unfasten or remove parts of the air
conditioning system. Escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to
escape into the atmosphere is illegal in many
countries.
● Should your skin come into contact with
refrigerant, apply the same methods of
treatment as for frostbite. Heat up the area to
32 - 38 °C with your hand or lukewarm water.
To prevent infection, cover the affected area
with a lightweight bandage. Seek medical aid
immediately.
● If refrigerant comes into contact with the eyes,
rinse the eyes immediately in cold water for
at least 5 minutes. Seek medical aid
immediately.
NOTE: The air conditioning system takes
moisture out of the air. Drainage hoses
therefore run from the air conditioning unit to
a point under the cab. Do not be unduly
alarmed if a puddle of water forms under the
drainage hose when the engine is switched
off.
2 - 14
Automatic temperature control (ATC) (where fitted)

Automatic control
The ATC can be used to set the cab temperature to a

comfortable working climate. By automatically setting
the heater and air conditioning, the ATC ensures a
constant cab temperature of between 16° C and 32°
C
The blower switch (1) has 5 settings: Off, ATC and
three blower stages. When the ATC is switched on,
the fan speed is controlled automatically.
To set the cab temperature, turn the mark on the
controller head (2) to the desired position.
On request, the climate control can also be set for
additional temperature ranges between the positions
given. 47
If the cab temperature remains within 1.1° C of the

temperature set using the controller, the blower
automatically retains a low speed. If the difference
between controller setting and cab temperature is
greater than this, the blower speed automatically
increases and adjusts the temperature accordingly.
If the operator manually selects ‘HI’ or ‘LO’ on the
controller button, the ATC is bypassed to allow for a
maximum heating or cooling effect.
Manual control
To manually set the cab temperature, move the
blower speed controller to position I, II or III or
select the setting you want from the temperature
controller. This deactivates the ATC.
When undertaking this kind of adjustment, the cab
temperature does remain within the values requested
but the process is not as efficient as using the ATC. If
manually set to ‘LO’, the maximum power output of
the air conditioning system is only produced via
blower control by means of a temperature adjustment.
2 - 15
Economy / defroster switch

The economy/defroster switch has three positions.
1. Left-hand side of switch pressed: Economy
mode (ECON).
2. Middle position: ECON (Economy) and MAX
DEF (maximum defroster stage) deactivated.
3. Right-hand side of switch pressed: Maximum
defroster stage (MAX DEF) activated.
At low outside temperatures, the air conditioning
does not need to be operated for a constant cab
temperature. To switch off the air conditioning
system, press the ECON side of the switch. 48
NOTE: The A/C compressor is driven by the

engine. If the air conditioning is not needed, it
should be switched off to save fuel.
The cab temperature is kept constant and within the
specified ranges until the outside temperature is
above the value set using the controller. In this case,
select the switch's middle position to switch on the air
conditioning.
If the outside temperatures are very low and the cab
windows are frozen on the outside, press the MAX
DEF side of the switch. The maximum heating output
is then set automatically, the air conditioning is
switched on (if this has not already been done), and
maximum blower speed is selected.
This function (MAX DEF) can also be used to vent
the windows from inside if they are heavily fogged
over.
2 - 16
Radio/cassette/CD player (where fitted)

With standard cab
The cab is fully wired up and equipped with two
loudspeakers fitted in the roof (four loudspeakers can
be installed by your dealer as accessories). Your
dealer can also fit a range of AM/FM stereo radios/
cassette recorders and radio/CD-players (1) with
automatic tuning as accessories. Separate operating
instructions are supplied along with the radio.
NOTE: The radio only functions when the
starter switch is in the ON or ACC position.
WARNING: Ensure that the antenna

! cannot touch any power lines.
49
Cab with low roof
The radio/cassette recorder or radio/CD-player (1)
fitted by the dealer is located to the driver's right in the
cab roof. Separate operating instructions are supplied
along with the radio.
50
Cigar lighter
To activate, press the button (1) all the way in. As soon
as the glow element has reached the correct
temperature, it jumps out.
51
2 - 17
Electrically adjustable rear view mirror (where

fitted).
With the optional power adjust mirrors the
position of the mirror head may be adjusted
electrically.
Select the mirror to be adjusted by moving the
switch to the l e ft or right. Then, using the 4-
way control move it sideways to adjust the lateral
view or up and down to adjust the vertical position.
With the selector switch (1) in the mid position the
power adjustment function will be de-activated.
52
.Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the
best rearward view. When the knob (1) is
loosened, the telescopic arm may be extended
or retracted.
To make initial adjustment to the vertical
position of the mirror, loosen the clamp screws
(2), re-position the mirror head and re-tighten
the screws.
53
Rear view mirror with electric heating (where
fitted).
The power adjust mirrors are also electrically
heated. Momentarily depress the switch (1) to
turn o n the heating element. The mirror heater
will automatically switch off a f t e r 5 minutes.
1
54
2 - 18
Control unit for work lamps and rotating

beacons 1
NOTE: The work lamps only function when the

6 2
tractor lights are switched on.
The switches are on the instrument panel in the roof 5
console. 4 3
1. Rotating beacon
2. Rear work lamps
3. Work lamps on fender
4. Work lamps on front reticle
5. Work lamps at front on
ramp bracket SC04A100
6. Work lamps at front in the roof 55
Press the switch to turn on the lights; press it again to

turn the lights off again.
Once the starter switch has been turned, the switches
are illuminated from inside. The lighting intensity
increases as soon as the relevant switch is pressed.
NOTE: Never adjust a work lamp mounted on the
fender so that the beam points straight down. The
heat generated by the lamp may damage the
plastic casing of the rear headlight.
2 - 19
Cab with low roof

The switches for the work lamps and rotating beacon
are located on the right of the cab on the C-pillar.
Press the switch to turn on the lights.
1. Work lamps on grab rail
2. Rotating beacon
3. Rear work lamps
4. Front work lamps (engine hood)
NOTE: Never adjust a work lamp mounted on the
fender so that the beam points straight down. The
heat generated by the lamp may damage the
plastic casing of the rear headlight.
56
Power socket for Rotating beacon
Two sockets (1) are fitted in the rear area of the cab,
one on each side.
57
2 - 20
Storage containers in of cab

A storage container with a fold-up lid (1) can be found
on the left-hand side of the cab. There is also a can
holder fitted in the lid.
There is a tray (2) for storing and laying down small
tools etc. in the back of the container.
58
Passenger seat (where fitted)
If permitted by local laws, a fold-up passenger seat
may be installed. To raise the backrest of the seat, pull
this up and into an upright position. The seat is held in
the upright position by the gas-operated compression
springs (1). Fold down the top part of the seat when it
is not in use so you can see the can holder.
IMPORTANT: Always wear the seatbelt

! when the safety cab is being used.
59
2 - 21
Additional power connections

Depending on the tractor version, there are a number
of additional power connections for various
applications. These are as follows:
1. 8A screw-type terminals. The red terminal is
positive; the black terminal is negative.
2. 30 A power socket, 3-pole. Supplies DC power
to consumers inside the cab, e.g. the monitor.
3. 7-pole DIN/ISO additional socket (with radar
equipment only) provides the following
information:
60
7-pole DIN/ISO Signal socket
Pole 1. Actual road speed. (radar
measurement)
Pole 2. Theoretical road speed. (wheel
measurement)
Pole 3. Rear PTO speed.
Pole 4.3-point power lift linkage at rear,
operating/not operating.
Pole 5. Not assigned
Pole 6. 5 A power supply.
Pole 7. Shared earth connection. 61
4. Cigar lighter/additional socket for mobile phone
or coolbox (where fitted).
5. One-pole 8 A additional socket. Carries voltage
once the starter switch is in the “ON” position.
IMPORTANT: To avoid overheating and

damage, make sure connections are tight and
secure if connection terminals and cables are
loaded to close to their maximum power
rating. Only connect up equipment with
connection cables of a sufficient cross-section
and insulation rating and use suitable
connectors.
62
2 - 22
Diagnosis plug
IMPORTANT: A multi-pole socket (1) is located

on the cab's C-pillar. An authorised dealer can
connect their service tool to this socket. Do
not attempt to plug other electronic equipment
into this socket. This could damage the
tractor's electronic system or control units.
63
Seven-pole Socket
There is a seven-pole standard socket (1) for the
trailer lights fitted on the rear of the tractor. As can be
seen in the above figure, the connections are
assigned as follows (socket viewed from the front):
Bush no. Colour Circuit

1. Amber Left indicator
2. - Not used
3. Black Earthing (ground)
4. Green Right indicator
5. Blue Right-hand parking light 64
6. Red Brake lights
7. Brown Left-hand parking lamp
Three-pole Additional socket

A three-pole, 40 A socket (1) is standard on all
tractors with a cab. (For extension cable, refer to
section 7).
NOTE: The three-pole socket is designed for a
power rating of up to 40 A. The driver should
ensure that the connection terminals are protected
by a fuse with the same 40 A rating. The total
current load of the three-pole socket and
connection terminals is therefore limited to 40 A.
65
2 - 23
Installation of the additional monitor

Two attachment points are provided for fitting an
additional monitor:
In accordance with the SAE standard, there are self-
locking stud bolts (1) with plastic caps on the right-
hand 'C' pillar of the cab.
We would recommend screwing a bracket on to the
'C' pillar to secure the monitor. You can obtain a
suitable bracket from your authorised dealer.
66
Alternatively, you can use the retaining point (1) on
the inside of the right-hand 'A' pillar.
67
Cable and cable harness routing
There is a small recess in the blind cover on both
sides of the lower rear window frame to allow the
monitor's operating cable to be easily routed. The
cable and lines can then be conveniently routed
through the blind cover through a small incision in the
rubber cover at position (1).
68
Using a mobile phone
The left-hand 'C' pillar in the cab features a bracket (1)
for mobile phones. The mobile phone can also be
powered by the cigar lighter.
69
2 - 24
DRIVER’S SEAT
The driver's seat fitted in the tractor has a number of
adjustment options. Before using the tractor for the
first time, adjust the seat to the most comfortable
position. You can identify the driver's seat fitted in your
tractor using the text provided below and the relevant
figures.
Deluxe seat with air suspension
The deluxe seat with air suspension has electrically
controlled suspension. To carry out the initial setting,
sit in the driver's seat and hold down the lever (2) until
the seat is in the lowest position available.
Other suspension and seat height settings are
undertaken once the starter switch is switched on. Sit
in the driver's seat, pull up the lever (2) and then
release it. A servo motor then raises the seat, adjusts
it automatically to body weight and stops as soon as
the suspension is at the optimum setting. To further
adjust the seat height, move the lever up or down to
raise or lower the seat. As soon as the lever is
released, the seat will remain at the selected height. 70
This setting will be undertaken automatically each
time the starter switch is switched on or until the
setting is changed.
The backrest can be tilted individually. Pull up the

lever (1) on the left-hand side of the seat frame and
then adjust the tilt of the backrest. As soon as the
lever is released, the backrest remains in the position
selected.
The suspension damping has five variable settings.
Seesaw the seat up and down while at the same time
moving the lever between its rearmost (hard) and
forward most (soft) positions. Correctly setting the
suspension, seat height and damping will ensure the
maximum level of driving comfort.
When the limitation lever (4) is pushed all the way
back, the driver's seat has a limited, spring-controlled
longitudinal movement (float). If the lever is slid all the
way forwards, this longitudinal movement is stopped.
The driver's seat can be swivelled to the left or right to
monitor attached equipment fitted on the rear or front
part of the tractor. Pull up the lever (5) and pivot the
seat as required. From the straight-ahead position,
there are limit positions on both the left- and right-
hand sides. Release the lock to snap the driver's seat
into place.
2 - 25
Pull up the lever (6) and slide the seat forwards or

backwards as required. As soon as the lever is
released, the seat snaps into place.
For optimum seat comfort, the height and longitudinal
position of the seat cushion can also be adjusted.
To slide the seat cushion forwards or backwards, pull
up the lock (8), then grip the cushion and slide it into
the required position. Release the lock to secure the
seat cushion in place.
To adjust the height, hold the lock (7) in its raised
position and then pull up or push down the front part
of the cushion. Release the lock to snap the seat
cushion into place. The easiest way of adjusting the
seat cushion is to wait until the driver leaves his seat. 71
Use the adjustment screws (9) on the underside of

the armrests to adjust the setting angle of the
armrests. If turned clockwise, the front part of the
armrest is raised and if turned anticlockwise, it is
lowered. If necessary, both armrests can be adjusted
upwards.
The driver's seat is equipped with built-in lumbar
support which is set using a hand wheel (10) on the
left-hand side of the backrest. To extend the lumbar
support, turn the wheel clockwise and to retract it, turn
the wheel anticlockwise.
To adjust the height of the upper back support on the
top section of the backrest, grasp the cushion and pull 72
or push it into the position required. The cushion can
be snapped into several positions. Continue sliding
the cushion until you hear a quiet 'click'; the cushion
will now stay in this position.
There is a pocket on the rear of the driver's seat for
storage.
2 - 26
SEAT BELT AND DRIVER PRESENCE SWITCH

(where fitted)
IMPORTANT: Always wear the seat belt.

!
To put on the seat belt, pull the belt out of the reel and
slide the tongue (1) into the lock (2) until a click
indicates that it is fully engaged. Press the red release
button (3) on the lock and pull out the tongue.
The driver presence switch under the seat is linked to
an acoustic alarm signal which sounds if the driver
leaves his seat while the PTO is engaged.
73
2 - 27
PARKING BRAKE, THROTTLE LEVER AND FOOT PEDALS

Parking brake
The lever for the parking brake is fitted to the left of the
driver's seat.
To apply the parking brake, raise the lever. When the
parking brake is applied, a warning light lights up on
the instrument panel. To release the brake, pull the
lever up further, press the button (1) on the end and
fully lower the lever.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the parking brake is
fully released before starting a journey.
74
Clutch pedal
When the clutch pedal (1) is pressed, the drive
between the engine and gearbox is interrupted. Use
the pedal to gently apply drive force to the drive
wheels when setting off. You will find more details on
this later in this section under 'GEARBOX'.
NOTE: To avoid premature wear, do not use
the clutch pedal as a footrest.
75
Accelerator pedal
The accelerator pedal (1) can be used to control the
tractor's speed regardless of the manual throttle. We
would recommend using the accelerator pedal when
travelling on public roads.
NOTE: As soon as the accelerator pedal is
released, the engine speed falls to the speed
specified by the manual throttle. When you use
the accelerator pedal, set the manual throttle to
minimum speed.
76
2 - 28
Manual throttle
The manual throttle (1) can be used to control the
tractor speed independently of the accelerator pedal.
Slide the manual throttle forwards to increase the
engine speed.
IMPORTANT: Always slide the manual throttle
into the idle position when the accelerator 1
pedal is being used for transport on public
roads.
77
Foot brakes
The brakes are actuated using the two foot pedals (1)
and (2). During field operations, both pedals can be
released from one another and actuated separately to
make it easier to turn in narrow areas. Once one-
sided braking is no longer required, ensure that both
pedals are locked and normal braking is therefore
available again.
WARNING: At a speed of more than 8.5

km/h, the all-wheel drive is activated
! automatically when the foot brake is
78
pressed.
IMPORTANT: The hydraulic trailer brakes only

function if both brakes are pressed.
WARNING: For safety reasons, always

lock both brake pedals when travelling
at transport speed or when the tractor is
towing a trailer with a hydraulic brake
! system. To lock both pedals to one
another, insert the connecting pin in the
right-hand pedal lever and place the
bracket (1) above the left-hand pedal
lever as shown.
79
2 - 29
INSTRUMENT CONSOLE
The following text describes the function of the
various switches and controls on the instrument
console and steering column.
Steering columns adjustment
The tractor's steering column can be tilted and
extended. Pull up the end of the clamp lever (2)
(towards you). Pull the steering column/steering
wheel into the most comfortable position and then
press the clamp lever all the way down to lock the
steering column unit
To change the steering column height, release the
central lock (1) on the steering wheel by turning
anticlockwise. Set the steering wheel to the most
comfortable position and tighten up the central lock
again.
80
IMPORTANT: Your tractor is fitted with
hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the
steering wheel all the way to the left or all the
way to the right (i.e. with wheels against
steering lock) for more than 10 seconds or for
a total of 10 seconds per minute. Non-
observance of this safety precaution may
result in damage to the components of the
steering system.
Starter switch
The starter switch activates the auxiliary start system,
additional equipment and the starter. Please read
'Starting the engine' in section 3.
81
2 - 30
Multi-function lever
The switch lever is fitted on the left-hand side of the
steering column. This switch is used to activate the
tractor lights, signal horn and indicators.
The central section of the switch lever can be rotated.
To switch on the instrument lights and side marker
lights, turn to position 1. Turn the switch to position 2
to switch on the headlights.
When the headlights are switched on, push the switch
lever away from yourself to position 3 to change from
dipped beam to main beam lights. Pull the switch
lever towards you to change back to dipped beam
lights. When the main beam is activated, a blue
telltale lights up on the instrument board.
82
When the main beam is not activated, pull the switch
lever towards you against the spring pressure (to
position 5) to turn on the main beam. When released,
the switch lever jumps back to its central position.
To activate the right turn indicators, turn the switch to
position 6. When in position 7, the left turn indicators
are activated. When the indicators are activated, the
indicator telltales on the instrument panel light up.
NOTE: The turn indicators only function when
the starter switch is on.
Press the end of the switch lever (position 8) to
activate the horn.
83
Hazard warning switch
Press the left side of the switch (1) to activate all
flashing lights at the same time. The switch then
flashes the lights in cycles.
84
2 - 31
Windscreen wiper/washer system

The front and rear windscreen wiper/washer system
is operated using the switch lever on the right of the
steering column.
With starter key switch on, move the switch lever
back into position 1. The front windscreen wiper
operates at the lower of the two speeds available.
Position 2 activates the upper speed. Press the end of
the switch lever (position 3) to activate the windscreen
washing system.
To activate intermittent mode for the front windscreen
wiper, press the switch lever out of its central 'OFF'
position and down into position 5; pull the lever up and
against the spring pressure into position 4 and the
single sweep washing process is started. When
released, the switch lever moves back into the “OFF”
position.
85
To activate intermittent mode for the rear windscreen
wiper, turn the central ring anticlockwise into position
6; the rear windscreen washing system is activated in
position 7. When released, the switch automatically
returns to intermittent mode.
NOTE: The nozzles for the windscreen are
located in the cab frame under the roof. Set
the spray angle using a needle in the nozzle
aperture.
86
2 - 32
ANALOGUE/DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS
The instrument panel consists of three analogue
display units, three liquid crystal displays (LCDs) and
a dot matrix display (DMD).
In addition to the display units and LCDs, there are
also 25 coloured telltales for other operating
information or warning messages issued during
system malfunctions.
The background lighting for the LCDs and the dot
matrix display is set by pressing the pushbutton on
the bottom left of the instrument panel; the two
buttons on the right set the digital clock.
87
2 - 33
ANALOGUE DISPLAY UNITS

Enginespeed gauge
This unit (1) displays the number of engine
revolutions per minute. Each part of the scale
represents 100 rpm; so when the engine is running at
2000 rpm, the indicator shows '20'.
88
Engine coolantTemperature display
The temperature display (2) indicates the temperature
of the engine coolant. When the indicator reaches the
upper (red) display area with the engine running, shut
down the engine and establish the cause.
Fuel gauge
This unit (3) indicates the level in the fuel tank and
only functions when the starter switch is on. Read
section 8, 'Capacity of the fuel tank'.
89
2 - 34
TELLTALES AND WARNING LIGHTS

The 25 coloured lights provide operating information
or warning messages when system malfunctions
arise. Illumination of a warning display may be
combined with an audible alarm signal. Depending on
the severity of the malfunction, the alarm may also
sound as follows.
Critical alarm
The alarm sounds continuously in combination with
the red warning light. The tractor must be shut down
immediately. The alarm will continue to sound until the
error is rectified or the engine is shut down.
Non-critical alarm
A 5-second alarm sounds in combination with the
orange warning light. A failure or error has occurred,
but the driver may continue to operate the tractor. The
error should be rectified as quickly as possible.
Actions required
Two short warning tones sound in turn for 1 second to
inform the driver that a certain action is required. The
alarm continues to sound until the driver undertakes
the corresponding action or the engine is shut down.
General alarm
A general alarm sounds if the driver attempts to
perform a forbidden action, such as driving the tractor
with the parking brake applied.
2 - 35
Telltales and warning lights
90
NOTE: As soon as the starter switch has been 11. Orange warning light activated – When this
switched on, all telltales and warning lights display lights up, a warning symbol is shown at
light up briefly while the electrical system the same time on the dot matrix display. Switch
performs a self-diagnosis test. off the tractor and determine the cause.
1. Not assigned 12 Not assigned
2. Turn Assist - When the inner ring is pressed, 13. Parking brake – Display lights up when the
the telltale comes on to show when Turn Assist starter switch is pressed and the parking brake
is activated. is applied. If the starter switch is switched off
3. Differential lock – Display lights up when the and the parking brake is not applied or if the
differential lock is activated. driver leaves his seat without applying the
parking brake, a warning buzzer sounds for
4. All-wheel drive – Display lights up when the
drive to the front wheels is activated. around 10 seconds until the parking brake is
applied.
5. Trailer indicator light – Display flashes when the
tractor/trailer indicators are on, if a second 14. Trailer brake pressure – When this light flashes
trailer is attached. together with a warning buzzer, it means that
the brake fluid pressure in the trailer brake
6. Trailer indicator light – Display flashes when the circuit is too low. The stop light also lights up.
tractor/trailer indicators are on, if a trailer is Switch off the tractor and determine the cause.
attached.
15. Not assigned
7. Parking light – Display lights up when the
tractor lights are switched on. 16. Engine oil pressure – When this display is
8. Main beam – Display lights up when the tractor continuously lit up in conjunction with the red
lights are switched to main beam. STOP symbol, it means that the engine oil
pressure is too low. Switch off the engine and
9. Red STOP symbol – As soon as this light
determine the cause.
comes on, stop the tractor and identify the
cause. A warning symbol appears on the dot 17. Creeper gears - Display lights up when the
matrix display to confirm the location of the creeper gears are activated.
error.
10. Power Boost activated – When this display
lights up, the symbol is shown at the same time
on the dot matrix display.
2 - 36
91
18. Auto PTO function – Display lights up when the 22. Left turn telltale – The telltale flashes along with
auto PTO function is engaged. The light flashes the tractor's left-hand turn indicator. An
as soon as the attached equipment is raised intermittent warning tone sounds if the indicator
with the automatic PTO activated. When the is not deactivated after 5 minutes (when the
attached equipment is lowered to working tractor is stationary).
position, the display stops flashing and lights up
23. Engine back pressure brake – Display lights up
continuously.
when the engine back pressure brake is
19. Fuel level - Display lights up when the tractor activated.
needs more fuel. Read section 8, 'Capacity of
24. Cold start equipment – Display lights up when
the fuel tank'.
the auxiliary start system is switched on using
20. Right turn telltale – The telltale flashes along the starter switch.
with the tractor's right-hand turn indicator. An
25. Alternator – If this telltale lights up permanently
intermittent warning tone sounds if the indicator
when the engine is running, this indicates that
is not deactivated after 5 minutes (when the
the alternator is not charging the battery.
tractor is stationary).
21. Constant speed - This telltale comes on when
constant speed is activated.
2 - 37
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS (LCD)

Clock
A digital clock (1) is installed on the right-hand side
of the instrument panel.
To set the time display, turn the starter switch and
hold down the hours or minutes button until the
display flashes. To advance the hours, press the 'H'
button (2). Each time the button is pressed, the time
displayed is advanced by one hour. Alternatively,
the button can also be held down and the time
displayed is brought forward automatically. Release
the button once the correct time is set.
92
Repeat this process with the 'M' button to set the

minutes display. To save the time set, do not press
any buttons for 10 seconds.
Changing the display using the 'H' and 'M'
buttons
The clock is set to a 12-hour display in the factory.
To change over to the 24-hour display, keep the 'H'
and 'M' buttons depressed with the starter switch
turned off. Turn on the starter switch, hold down
both buttons for three seconds and the clock will
change to the 24-hour -display. Repeat the process
to change back to the 12-hour display. To save the
setting, move the starter switch to OFF.
93
Changing the display using the enhanced
keypad
Move the starter switch into the ON position and
hold down the menu/enter key (1) for 3 seconds.
SETUP MENU appears on the dot matrix display
(DMD); this changes to CAL after 2 seconds. Scroll
through the menu using the scroll up key (2) until
the clock symbol appears in the display together
with the 12 / 24 symbol (figure 93).
94
Press the menu/enter key again and an arrow

appears on the display that points to 12 or 24. Use the
scroll up/down key in the menu to move the arrow to
the required setting. Then press the menu/enter key
to save and to return to the main menu.
2 - 38
Brightness control
The brightness of the liquid crystal display (LCD)
and the dot matrix display (DMD) can be adjusted
using the button (1). Briefly pressing the button
gradually changes the background lighting. When
the button is pressed, the display runs through the
entire brightness range for the background lighting
range (from bright to dark). Release the button as
soon as the setting required has been reached.
Central LCD
95
The information shown on the central LCD varies

according to the tractor version. Use the enhanced
keypad to switch between displays.
The following information may be displayed on the
central LCD:
1. Rear wheel slip (with radar equipment only)
2. PTO speed (front or rear)
3. Power lift position (front or rear)
96
Rear wheel slip
If your tractor is fitted with an optional distance
radar, the rear wheel slip can be displayed as a
percentage (%). The slip figure is calculated from
the information provided by the gearbox speed
sensor (theoretical road speed) and by the radar
(actual road speed).
97
2 - 39
PTO speed
When operating the PTO, this display can be used
to monitor speed at the PTO output. You can use
the enhanced keypad to change between the speed
of the rear and front PTO (where fitted).
98
Power lift position
If your tractor is fitted with electronic draft control
(EDC), you can read the position of the power lift
(and attached equipment) off the display. The
positions are recorded as between'0' (lowest
position) and '100' (maximum lifting height).
If the tractor is fitted with a front power lift, the
lifting height of the lifting arms can be read off the
display. In such cases, '0' represents the lowest
position and '100' the maximum lifting height.
99
DOT MATRIX DISPLAY
Information about tractor operations and a number
of settings can be read off the dot matrix display
(DMD). Use the enhanced keypad to select a
function. A symbol appears to confirm the function
selected.
NOTE: Read Page 2 - 42. for an explanation
of the warning and information symbols.
If an error occurs in the instrument panel or in the
tractor's system circuits, a warning symbol and error
code appear on the display. Consult you authorised
dealer.
100
2 - 40
Using the enhanced keypad
● Move the starter switch into the ON position

and hold down the menu/enter key (1) for 3
seconds. SETUP MENU appears on the dot
matrix display (DMD); this changes to CAL
after 2 seconds. Use the scroll up key (2) to
scroll through the menu until the inactive
warning symbol (3) is displayed.
101
● If you now briefly touch the menu/enter key
again, the symbol of the inactive warning
will be replaced by the relevant symbol of
the fault recorded. 3
● If more than one warning symbol is saved,

the individual symbols are displayed one
after another on the display. After the fault
symbols have been displayed, the screen
will default back to the active warning
symbol.
Exit the display and return to the original display by
pressing the exit/cancel key.
102
2 - 41
ALARM FUNCTIONS
Illumination of a warning light may be accompanied
by an audible alarm. Depending on the severity of the
malfunction, an alarm will sound as follows.
Critical alarm
Alarm will sound continuously accompanied by the
red warning light. The tractor must be stopped
immediately. The alarm will sound until the fault is
corrected or the engine is switched off.
Non-critical fault
A 5-second continuous alarm will be accompanied by
the amber warning light. A failure or error has
occurred but the operator may continue work. The
fault should be rectified as soon as possible.
Driver intervention required
A two pulse alarm will sound for 1 second to advise
the operator that a certain action is required. The
alarm continues to sound until the driver undertakes
the corresponding action or the engine is shut down.
General alarm
A general alarm will sound if the operator attempts to
carry out an inappropriate action, i.e. driving the
tractor with the handbrake applied.
EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS
Many different warning/information symbols can
be displayed on the dot matrix display (DMD).
The symbols are sub-divided into four main
groups.
1. Warning. These symbols refer to a critical
error in the tractor's operation. Stop the tractor
as soon as possible, identify the cause and
rectify the fault.
2. Note. Information symbols do not actually
indicate a fault in the operation of the tractor,
but they should not be ignored. Take
appropriate measures where required.
3. Maintenance. These symbols inform the
driver that basic tractor functions are 103
impaired, for example: fuel tank level and
coolant level too low.
4. System errors. These symbols relate to an
electrical or mechanical malfunction in one or
more of the tractor's main components. Under
certain circumstances, a four-digit error code is
displayed. Contact your contractual dealer for
more details.
2 - 42
Dot matrix symbols - warning
SYMBOL/DISPLAY ALARM FAULT ACTION

Symbol Critical Engine coolant temperature too high.
flashes Accompanied by RED warning light.
Symbol Critical Engine oil pressure too low. These symbols advise of a
flashes Accompanied by RED warning light. fault that is critical to the
operation of the tractor.
Symbol Critical Gearbox/power steering oil pressure too Stop the tractor as quickly
flashes low. as possibleestablish the
Accompanied by RED warning light. cause and rectify the fault.
Symbol Critical Hydraulic system charge pressure too
If the fault cannot be easily
flashes low. Accompanied by RED warning
rectified, please consult your
light.
authorised dealer.
Symbol Non-critical High gearbox oil too temperature.
flashes (AMBER). Accompanied by RED* or AMBER*
Critical (RED). warning light.
Symbol Non-critical Pneumatic brake pressure too low.
flashes Accompanied by AMBER warning light.
* RED warning light (tractors with auto engine shut down).

*AMBER warning light (tractors without auto engine shut down).
Dot matrix symbols – Maintenance (see also section 4)

Symbol Non-critical Engine air filter blocked
These symbols advise of a
fault that may be critical to the
Symbol Non-critical Brake fluid level too low. Accompanied
operation of the tractor.
flashes by AMBER warning light.
Stop the tractor as soon as
Symbol Hydraulic oil filter blocked. possible, investigate the
Non-critical
flashes Accompanied by AMBER warning light. cause and rectify the fault.
If the fault cannot be easily
Symbol Non-critical Blocked gearbox oil filter. rectified, please contact your
flashes Accompanied by AMBER warning light. authorised dealer.
Symbol Non-critical Water contamination in fuel.

2 - 43
Dot matrix symbols - system faults
SYMBOL/DISPLAY ERROR CODE AREA of FAULT ACTION

Symbol ON 3--- Tractor engine
Symbol ON N/A Engine cooling system
Symbol ON 2--- Gearbox
Symbol ON 7--- Differential lock
System error symbols relate to

Symbol ON N/A CAN BUS malfunction an electric or mechanical
functional fault to one or more of
the tractor's main components.
Symbol ON 1--- Electronic draft control
Symbol ON 9--- Front 3-point hitch The appearance of an error

symbol may be accompanied by
a four-digit error code.
Symbol ON N/A Brake system
Symbol ON 5--- Rear PTO If this happens, contact your

authorised dealer.
Symbol ON 8--- Front PTO
Symbol ON 10-- Front axle suspension
Symbol ON 6--- Front wheel drive
Symbol ON 14-- Dashboard, electrical fault
Symbol ON 15-- Steering assistance
Symbol ON 4--- Rear control valves
Symbol ON 45-- Front control valves

F
2 - 44
Dot matrix symbols – note

Symbol ON Driver intervention Clutch pedal not depressed. Press the clutch pedal.
required
Symbol ON Driver intervention Shuttle lever in position Move the shuttle lever to the
- required neutral position.
D.
Symbol ON Driver intervention Parking brake applied. Release the parking brake.
required
Symbol ON Non-critical Wheel slip limit exceeded. Accompanied Reduce equipment draft load.
by AMBER warning light.
Symbol ON None DMD backlighting level. Adjust backlighting to required

level.
Symbol ON Critical Pressure in the pneumatic brake See 'Warning symbols' for
system. pneumatic brake system.
Symbol ON Critical Engine oil pressure. See ‘Warning symbols’ for

engine oil pressure.
Symbol ON Critical or non- Rear PTO engaged, operator not If accompanied by critical
critical present. Accompanied by AMBER alarm, apply parking brake.
warning light.
Symbol ON Driver intervention EHR remote valve not functioning, Reduce oil flow to other
required insufficient oil flow available. (If points.
necessary, also R2, R3 or R4 display).
2 - 45
Tractor-roadspeed display
The LCD in the bottom left continuously shows the
tractor's road speed (1) in km/h. The road speed
display unit set in the factory can be changed if
required.
NOTE: If the size of the rear wheels is
changed, it may be necessary for the display
to be recalibrated to adapt to the roll radius
of the new wheels.
NOTE: The picture shows all activated
displays.
104
Using the enhanced keypad
seconds. SETUP MENU appears on the
dot matrix display (DMD); this changes to
CAL after 2 seconds. Scroll through the
menu using the scroll up key (2) until the
km/h MPH display appears.
● Briefly press the menu/enter key (1) and use
the scroll up/down keys to select the speed
display required. Press the menu/enter key
again to save the setting and return to the
main menu. Return to the original display by 105
pressing the exit/cancel key.
Calibrating the road speed display

If rear wheels are fitted with a difference in radius of
more than 13 mm, the electronic control module
should be recalibrated so that the precise road speed
is displayed. To recalibrate, use one of the following
procedures:
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is fitted with the
optional slip control function, the road speed
displayed is the actual speed recorded by the
radar unit; calibration is not therefore needed.
● Ensure that the correct tyre pressure is set for
the load being transported. (Note the tyre
load / tyre pressure tables in section 3 of
this manual.)
● Select a stretch on dry, firm and even piece of
ground (preferably concrete) and measure off
a length of precisely 100 m. Mark the start
and end of this stretch with a thick chalk
cross.
2 - 46
Auto-calibration with enhanced keypad
● With the tractor stationary and the engine

running, hold down the menu/enter key (1)
for 3 seconds. SETUP MENUappears on
the dot matrix display (DMD). After 2
seconds, the display changes to CAL.
Once the enter key is released, CAL man is
displayed. Scroll through the menu using
the scroll up key (2) until CAL auto appears
in the display.
106
● Press the menu/enter key again and CAL
auto ready appears on the dot matrix
display (DMD). Select an appropriate
gearbox ratio to achieve a speed of 3 km/h.
As soon as the centre of the front wheels
passes the start line, press the menu/enter
key and release it. CAL then flashes on the
speed display and a four-digit number
which increases with forward motion of the
tractor appears on the central liquid crystal
display (LCD). The display then changes to
CAL auto ON.
107
● As soon as the centre of the front wheels passes

the end line, press the menu/enter key and
release it. CAL auto OK is displayed in the dot
matrix display. Press the menu/enter key to
save the setting.
Manual calibration with enhanced keypad
seconds. SETUP MENU appears on the dot
matrix display (DMD). After 2 seconds, the
display changes to CAL. Once the enter key
is released, CAL man is displayed. (If
necessary, the scroll up/down keys may have
to be used to page through the menu until
CAL man is displayed).
108
2 - 47
● Press the menu/enter key again to switch the

dot matrix display over to CAL_Man_000.0 .
(Under certain Circumstances, a value other
than 000.0 may be shown if a calibration
constant was previously entered). CAL
flashes on the speed display. Using the scroll
down key, move the cursor to the first
numerical point to be entered and use the
scroll up key to enter the number. CAL will
appear in the speed display and start to flash.
Repeat the process to enter the remaining
calibration values for the tyre sizes of the rear
tyres fitted on your tractor.
IMPORTANT: When entering a new rolling
circumference, use metric values
(centimetres) with km/h as the display on
the speed sensor; also note the table on
Page 2 - 49.
● Press the menu/enter key to save the setting
and return to the main menu. Press the exit/
cancel key to close the setting process and
return to the original display.
109
2 - 48
Road speed – calibration figures Rear wheel -rolling circumference

The rolling circumference of each tyre listed varies
depending on the tyre manufacturer. The details Tyre size Tyre rolling circumference
provided in the table are average values based on the
rolling circumference data provided by several Centimetres
manufacturers. To obtain the correct figure for your 18.4R - 30 461.2
tyre type, contact your authorised dealer or your tyre 12.4 - 32 406.9
dealer. 16.9R - 34 473.1
If the tyre size of your tractor is not specified, you can 18.4R - 34 494.7
use one of the following procedures to calibrate the 13.6R - 38 465.6
road speed.
16.9R - 38 503.4
Undertake automatic calibration as previously 18.4R - 38 525.6
described or measure the rolling circumference of the
rear tyres. 20.8R - 38 549.3
18.4R - 42 552.7
1. To measure the rolling diameter of the rear 14.9R - 46 554.2
wheels, park the tractor on level ground and
use a piece of chalk to mark the side of the tyre 480/70R - 34 474.5
at the point where the tyre tread touches the 520/70R - 34 490.6
ground. Place a second chalk line on the 480/70R - 38 506.5
ground as an extension of the tyre mark.
540/65R - 38 501.5
2. Slowly drive the tractor forwards until the rear 520/70R - 38 525.6
wheel has completed one revolution and the 600/65R - 38 523.7
chalk mark on the tyre is again on the ground.
Again mark the ground and measure the 650/60R - 38 510.8
distance between the two chalk marks. 650/65R - 38 544.5
580/70R - 38 549.7
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is fitted with the 320/90R - 50 560.3
optional slip control function, the road speed
displayed is the actual speed recorded by the
radar unit; calibration is not therefore needed.
WARNING: The radar sensor emits a

weak microwave signal which is not
harmful during normal operations.
! Although the signal strength is low, to
avoid damaging your eyes never look
directly at the sensor head when the
sensor is activated.
2 - 49
ENHANCED KEYPAD and PERFORMANCE MONITOR (where fitted)
110
The enhanced keypad consists of 16 keys that can be 5. Rear wheel slip (C). The rear wheel slip is
used to select, control and program various functions displayed as a single or two-digit percentage
and displays on the central display unit and the dot (%) (only when radar is fitted).
matrix display. You can use keys 1, 14, 15 and 16 to 6. Power lift position (C). If the button is pressed
set and program many of the enhanced keypad once, the power lift position is displayed or if
functions. pressed and held down for 3 seconds, the
Unless otherwise specified, press the keys once to position of the front power lift (if fitted) is
obtain the corresponding display. A symbol appears displayed. The display shows a figure between
in the display to confirm the function selected. ‘0’ (totally lowered) and ‘100’ (maximum lifting
height).
Key:
(D) = dot matrix display (DMD) 7. PTO speed (C). If the button is pressed once,
the rear power lift position is displayed. Press
(C) = central digital display
the button again and hold it down for 3 seconds
1. Menu input (D). Press here to select setting and to display the speed of the front PTO (if fitted).
programming modes.
8. Operating hours display (D). Press this key to
2. Odometer (D). Depending on the selected road display the tractor's total number of operating
speed unit, the odometer records and displays hours. The hours counted should serve as an
the distance travelled in kilometres or miles. indication for the tractor's service intervals.
Two displays, '1' and '2', are available.
9. Engine oil pressure (D). This button is used to
3. Programmed maintenance display (D). The key call up the engine oil pressure bar chart
for the maintenance schedule has two setting (models MXU110, MXU125 and MXU135 only).
levels: 'Heavy' and 'Light'. The hours remaining
10. Trailer's pneumatic brake system (D). Press
until the next service are displayed.
here to display the symbol for the trailer's
4. Area accumulator (D). The total area processed pneumatic brake.
is displayed in hectares or acres, depending on
the road speed unit selected. 11. Remote control valve activation (D). This
display shows the throughflow of each remote
control valve as a percentage (%), the lifting
direction of the cylinder (retracting or extending)
and the number of the selected valve. (See also
'Remote control valve' in section 3.)
2 - 50
12. Battery voltage (D). Press this key with the 14. Menu scroll up key or digit entry (D). Press this
engine running to display the battery symbol key several times to scroll up the menu or to
along with the digital display for battery voltage. change a digit.
13. Area per hour prediction (D). Press this key to 15. Exit/cancel (D). Press here to close or cancel
display the area per hour symbol together with setting and programming modes.
a prediction of the area that will be covered in
16. Menu scroll down key or digit entry (D). Press
one hour if the current work rate is maintained.
this key to scroll down the menu or to select a
NOTE: If no radar sensors are fitted, the area digit from the dot matrix display (DMD).
per hour calculations are based on the axle
revolution and may therefore be inaccurate as
a result of possible wheel slip.
Odometer
Depending on the road speed unit set, the
odometer records and displays the distance
travelled in kilometres.
Two displays, '1' and '2', are available. '1' can be
used to measure individual stretches and '2' to
measure the total distance travelled. Both '1' and '2'
can be reset to zero.
Press the key once for display '1' and press again
for display '2'. If the key is held down for more than 3
seconds, the display is reset to zero.
111
The distance display (3) appears in steps of:

0 to 19.99 km 0.001 km
20 to 199.99 km 0.01 km
200 to 1999.9 km 0.1 km
2000 to 19 999 km 1.0 km
NOTE: If no radar sensors are fitted, the
distance calculations are based on the axle
2 - 51
Area per hour prediction

Press the AREA/HOUR key (1). The 'AREA/HOUR'
symbol is displayed together with a prediction of the
area that will be covered in one hour if the current
work rate is maintained. If the area accumulator is
activated, '0' appears on the display as soon as the
attached equipment is raised, but only if the
operator switches to A (Auto) during the area
calculation.
The area per hour is displayed in steps of 0.01 ha.
NOTE: If no radar sensors are fitted, the area
revolution and may therefore be inaccurate 112
as a result of possible wheel slip.
Area accumulator
NOTE: Before you activate the area
accumulator function, ensure that the correct
working width has been saved in the TPM
memory for the working equipment used.
The total area worked can be displayed by pressing
the AREA key (1).
Press the area accumulator key several times to
alternate between the three displays on the dot
matrix display.
113
2 - 52
1. OFF. The area accumulator is switched off.

2. ON. The area accumulator is switched on.
The area is added as soon as the tractor moves
– regardless of the position of the attached
equipment.
3. A. The area addition function starts as
soon as the tractor starts to move and the
attached equipment is lowered. The addition
stops once the attached equipment is raised.
The area accumulator symbol (2) then appears on
the display together with the area figure.
When equipment is attached, area addition can be
temporarily suspended, e.g. using a switch linked to
the signal socket on the attached equipment when
working a headland. Refer to 'Additional power
connections' on page Page 2 - 22..
The area display (3) appears in stages of:
0 to 199.99 ha 0.01 ha
200 to 1999.9 ha 0.1 ha
2000 to 19999 ha 1.0 ha
114
The area calculation can be reset to zero at any time

by selecting OFF and holding down the AREA key (1)
until the display returns to zero.
NOTE: If no radar sensors are fitted, the area
2 - 53
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS
WARNING: The radar sensor for road

speed, mounted on the front of the right-
hand footrest, emits a weak microwave
signal which is not harmful during
! normal operations. Even though the
signal strength is low, to avoid damaging
your eyes never look directly at the
sensor head when the sensor is
activated.
Programming keys
Four keys are used to select, modify or save the
various functions linked to the performance monitor
and enhanced keypad. All program functions appear
on the dot matrix display (DMD) together with the
symbol for the selected function.
1. Menu scroll down/digit entry key. Use this key in
calibration mode to scroll down the menu or to
select a digit for recalibration. Once this key is
pressed, the flashing cursor, which shows the
selected number, moves one place to the right.
2. Menu/enter key. Press this key for 3 seconds to
access programming mode. SETUP/MENU
then appears on the display. After 2 seconds,
the display changes to CAL. At the same time,
the up/down arrows and the menu/enter symbol
appear on the display.
115
As soon as the appropriate function display
appears, press the menu/enter key again to go
to calibration mode.
3. Menu scroll up/digit entry key. Use this key to
scroll up through the function menu or to
increase the value of a selected digit during a
calibration process. Pressing the key increases
the value by one.
4. Exit/cancel key. Use this key to exit calibration
mode. This key can be pressed at any time
during a setting process to exit or cancel
calibration mode; but the values will be lost.
2 - 54
Setting the working width of attached equipment

The working width of the attached equipment used
must be entered in the memory so that the
microprocessor can calculate the work already done.
To enter a working width of 4.5 m, proceed as follows.
● Move the starter switch to the ON position and

hold down the menu/enter key for 3 seconds.
SETUP_MENU appears on the dot matrix
display (DMD); this changes to CAL after 2
seconds. Scroll through the menu using the
scroll up/down keys until the symbol for
attached equipment working width (1)
appears on the display.
116
● Press the menu/enter key again to select the
configuration display; a flashing cursor
appears at the point where the first digit is
set. Use the digit entry key (3) to enter'0'.
Then use the selection key (1) to move the
cursor one place to the right and then use the
enter key (3) to set '4' . Use the enter key (1)
to move the cursor to the right and then use
the enter key (3) to set the display to '5'. Use
the enter key (1) to move the cursor to the
right and then use the enter key (3) to set the
display to '0' .
117
● 4.5 m should now be up on the display. Press
the menu/enter key to save the setting and
return to the main menu.
NOTE: The microprocessor cannot calculate
the area processed unless the correct working
width of the attached equipment is entered.
118
2 - 55
Calibration of Rear wheel slip

Before setting the slip alarm point, you must establish
the wheel slip factor. This calibration process must be
carried out on a hard, level piece of ground on which
wheel slip is highly improbable.
NOTE: The automatic slip function of the
electronic draft control (refer to "Operating the
electronic draft control") only functions if the
following procedure is carried out.
119
● With the tractor stationary and the engine

running, press the menu/enter key for 3
seconds. SETUP_MENU appears on the dot
matrix display (DMD); this changes to CAL
after 2 seconds. Scroll through the menu
using the scroll up/down keys until the symbol
for wheel slip appears on the display.
● Drive the tractor at a constant speed of more

than 5 km/h. As soon as a constant speed is
reached, press the menu/enter key and
CAL ON will appear on the display. After you
have travelled a short distance, press the
menu/enter key again and the display will
change to CAL OK.

and return to the main menu.
Setting the slip alarm point
NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not
installed, the slip alarm function is removed
from the display.
The slip alarm point can be set as a single or two-digit
number which triggers an audible alarm when
exceeded. To set a wheel slip limit value of 15 %,
proceed as follows.
2 - 56

scroll up/down keys until the symbol for wheel
slip (1) appears on the display.
● Press the menu/enter key again to select the

configuration display; a flashing cursor
appears at the point where the first digit is
set. Use the digit entry key to enter '1'. Then
use the selection key to move the cursor to
the right and use the digit entry key to set the 120
display to '5'. You have now set the slip alarm
point to 15 %.

and return to the main menu.
As soon as the wheel slip exceeds the preset limit
value, the wheel slip symbol will appear in the dot
matrix display (DMD) and an orange warning light will
light up on the instrument panel.
Audible beep– ON/OFF
Each time one of these keys is pressed, an audible
beep is sounded. This noise can be deactivated if
necessary.

scroll up/down keys until BEEP ON/OFF
appears on the display.
● Press the menu/entry key again to select the

configuration display. Use the scroll up/down
keys in the menu to set the arrow (1) to ON or
OFF as required.
121

and return to the main menu. Return to the
original display by pressing the exit/cancel key.
2 - 57
Programming the service interval indicator

The driver can use the service interval function to
program two maintenance interval indicators using
the enhanced keypad. The process described below
is the same for both the LESS IMPORTANT and
VERY IMPORTANT maintenance intervals.

scroll up/down keys until the symbol for the
maintenance interval (1) appears on the
display.
122
Setting a less important service interval
indicator
● Press the menu/enter key again to call up the
maintenance indicator sub-menu. Press the
scroll up/down keys until 'LIGHT' is displayed.
Press the menu/enter key; the flashing cursor
(1) appears at the first digit to be set. Enter the
first digit to be set with the aid of the digit entry
key, use the selection key to move the cursor
one place to the right and use the digit entry key
to enter the second digit. Proceed in the same
way for the third digit. LIGHT --- is now shown
on the display (here the --- stands for the
number of hours selected). 123

and return to the main menu. Return to the
original display by pressing the exit/cancel key.
The maintenance indicator is now set for the selected
interval. As soon as the interval is reached, an audible
alarm signal sounds to inform the driver that this is the
case.
2 - 58
Setting a very important service interval

indicator
Select HEAVY from the main menu and repeat the
procedure for setting the LIGHT maintenance
indicator.
Ten operating hours before maintenance intervention
is due, the symbol for very important maintenance
interventions and the operating hours remaining are
displayed on the dot matrix display once the starter
switch is switched on. The indicator remains active for
up to 4 seconds after the engine is started.
Notification of overdue service intervals
124
If a service intervention is imminent, the relevant

symbol will appear hourly on the display for 20
seconds. The number of operating hours remaining to
the maintenance intervention will also be shown and
this will be accompanied by the amber warning light.
Once the maintenance intervention is overdue, only
the symbol will appear hourly in the display.
If required, the service interval counter may be
stopped by re-setting the service interval indicator to
zero or by changing the period until the next
maintenance intervention is due.
2 - 59
GEARBOX OPERATION
Depending on your country and version, your tractor
may be fitted with one of two gearbox options.
16 x 16 gearbox - 40 km/h
17 x 16 Economic gearbox - 40 km/h
17 x 16 gearbox - 50 km/h
The gearbox comprises 4 powershift gears and 4
gear ranges with 16 forwards and reverse gears.
During travel, you can use the powershift and gear
range button to automatically shift through gears 1 - 8
and 9 - 16 (17).
Road speeds
The road speeds are shown on the LCD on the left of
the instrument panel. As a guide, you will find road
speed tables for the individual tyre sizes at the end of Road speed conversion table
each gearbox description provided in this manual.
km/h MPH MPH km/h
If the rear wheels on your tractor are of a size not
listed in the tables, you may have to recalibrate the 5 3,1 5 8,0
speed gauge as described previously. 10 6,2 10 16,0
15 9,3 15 24,1
20 12,4 20 32,1
25 15,5 20 32,1
30 18,6 30 48,2
35 21,7 35 56,3
40 24,8
45 27,9
50 31,0
Conversion table for road speed

The size of the rear wheels on your tractor may vary
from the sizes listed in the road speed table. If you
have a different tyre size fitted, multiply the road
speed given in the tables by one of the following
conversion factors:
Tyre size Factor Tyre size Factor

18.4R-30 0.879 480/70R-34 0.909
12.4-32 0.788 520/70R-34 0.939
16.9R-34 0.909 480/70R-38 0.970
18.4R-34 0.939 540/65R-38 0.970
13.6R-38 0.909 650/60R-38 1.000
16.9R-38 0.970 650/65R-38 1.061
20.8R-38 1.061 320/90R-50 1.061
18.4R-42 1.061 -- --
14.9R-46 1.079 -- --
2 - 60
GEARBOX
This gearbox has 16 or 17 forwards gears and 16
reverse gears. Another 16 forwards/reverse gears
are available using the optional reduction ratio
gearbox (creeper gears).
The operating data provided in the following text is
based on the 16 x 16 gearbox (30 and 40 km/h). The
17 x 16 gearbox (40 and 50 km/h) works in exactly
the same way.
NOTE: If the tractor is fitted with an Economy
gearbox, the electronically limited maximum
speed is 40 km/h in 17th gear.
2 - 61
4
2
125
The gearbox is operated using a range selector lever the low (field) range. Gears 1 - 4 or 5 - 8 can be
(1), + (4) and - (3) buttons and the auto shift button selected in this range. To select gears 9 - 12 or 13 -
(2) for automatic gearbox functions. You can select 16 in the high range, slide the lever all the way
forwards or reverse drive using the shuttle lever on forwards. To select Neutral, move the lever into its
the left-hand side of the steering wheel or the button central position.
(5) on the multi-controller II.
The gearbox and speed monitors are marked in
orange.
This gearbox has four powershift stages in each of the
four ranges. You can make automatic gear changes
between ranges 1 and 2 (gears 4 and 5) and between
ranges 3 and 4 (gears 12 and 13) by simultaneously
pressing the buttons + (4) or - (3) and the shift key on
the rear of multi-controller II. Other gear changes are
undertaken using the + (4) and - (3) button.
You can only switch between Low and High gear
ranges (8th and 9th gears) when the clutch pedal is
fully depressed.
Range selector lever
The range selector lever (1) is used to select high or
low range. When selecting the high or low range
(lever to front or rear), the clutch pedal must always
be depressed.
With the shuttle lever in Neutral and the clutch pedal
fully depressed, pull the range selector lever back into
2 - 62
NOTE: When the tractor is stationary, the drive

will not be engaged unless the clutch is
depressed before you move the range selector
lever out of Neutral. The error code 'N'
appears on the gearbox display and an
audible alarm sounds. Press the clutch pedal
to delete the display and to re-engage the
drive.
NOTE: To avoid loss of power owing to internal
friction when stationary, move the range
selector lever into Neutral.
NOTE: If you attempt to change gear without
moving the gear selector lever or pressing the
clutch pedal, an audible alarm will sound. 126
If you move the range selector lever forwards out of

Neutral or out of 1st - 8th gear, the tractor will always
shift to 9th gear.
The opposite also applies, i.e. if you pull the lever
backwards out of neutral or out of 9th - 16th gears
while the tractor is moving, the speed matching
function will select the appropriate gear from between
5th and 8th gear. To select a different gear, press the
clutch pedal down further and use the buttons to
engage another gear, then release the clutch pedal.
ShuttleLever
Use the electrically actuated shuttle lever (1) fitted on
the left of the steering wheel to select between
forwards and reverse travel. The lever is spring-
loaded to prevent it from being actuated
unintentionally; to select forwards or reverse drive,
pull the lever towards the steering wheel. When
actuating the shuttle lever, you do not need to press
the clutch pedal.
127
2 - 63
Only if a direction of travel is already active (direction

of travel arrow lit up on the instrument panel) can you
also use the button (1) on the multi-controller II to
change the direction of travel.
1
NOTE: Forwards or reverse drive can only be
selected when the driver is sitting in the
driver's seat. If the vehicle is moved in any
direction with the parking brake applied, an
audible alarm also sounds and 'P' is displayed
on the dot matrix display and the digital gear
display (where fitted).
NOTE: To avoid loss of power owing to
gearbox friction when stationary, move the 128
gear lever and shuttle lever into Neutral.
IMPORTANT: To reduce the amount of clutch
damage caused by moving the shuttle lever in
too high a gear or at too high a speed, before
changing the direction of travel the gearbox
always downshift into the lowest gear in the
interim range selected.
Shuttle mode
The electronic control unit for the gearbox can be
programmed so that certain shuttle gear
combinations within the selected range (1 - 4, 5 - 8,
9 - 12) are available in the memory. To activate this
function, proceed as follows:
● With the starter switch in its "Off" position,
press the Neutral button on the shuttle lever
and hold in the reverse position. Switch on
the starter switch, the gearbox symbol and
H3 will appear on the dot matrix display. Do
not start the engine.
● The central LCD shows 'yes' or 'no'.
● 'no' indicates that the memory function is

deactivated. 'yes' indicates that the memory
function is activated.
● To change between 'no' and 'yes', use the +
buttons or - the buttons on the multi-
controller. Once the corresponding memory
function is displayed, move the starter key
into the "Off" position. The new selection is
saved.
If the shuttle memory is deactivated, the same gear is
used for forwards and reverse operations. However,
9th shuttle gear is used when selecting 12th gear or
higher.
2 - 64
Setting the shuttle gear for forwards/reverse operations

Move the shuttle lever (1) into the forwards position
and use the buttons for upshifting or downshifting to
set the forwards gear. Move the shuttle lever into the
reverse position and repeat the process to set reverse
gear.
Selecting the shuttle gear with the lever shifted into
Neutral means that the same gear is used for both
forwards and reverse operations.
WARNING: To avoid unwanted tractor

motion, before leaving the tractor always
switch off the engine, move the shuttle lever
! into Neutral and firmly apply the parking
brake. The gearbox does not prevent the
tractor from rolling away when the engine is
switched off.
Digital gear shift display

The digital display provides a comprehensive set of
information, including:
Field end management (HMC) symbols (1) (where
available).
Forward and reverse gears (2). The forwards gear
selected and the corresponding reverse or 'shuttle'
gear appear on the display.
Shuttle lever for forwards, Neutral and reverse (3).
Ratio range for each range (4).
Auto shift symbols (5) for road and field operations.
129
Clutch pedal
To operate the powershift or shuttle lever (changing
between forwards and reverse drive), you do not have
to press the clutch pedal (1). We would recommend
using the clutch when manoeuvring the tractor to fit
attached equipment or when working in narrow
spaces, if the low gears are not slow enough, and to
allow for precise steering at low engine speeds.
IMPORTANT: To avoid premature wear to the
clutch, do not use the clutch pedal as a
footrest.
NOTE: Situations may arise in which the 'N' or
'CP' error codes flash on the dot matrix display
and digital gear display. If this happens, move the 130
gearbox into Neutral ('N') or press the clutch
pedal ('CP') to delete the error message.
2 - 65
Driving the tractor

Move the range selector lever and shuttle lever into 1
Neutral, press the clutch pedal and start the engine.
NOTE: A Neutral starter switch prevents the
starter from being activated for as long as the
shuttle lever is not in Neutral and the clutch
pedal is pressed.
To drive forwards with the engine idling, press the
clutch pedal and move the range selector lever (1)
forwards for the high range or backwards for the low
range.
131
Once the tractor is started and the gearshift lever is

set to a gear, the electronic control unit automatically
selects the suitable gear for smooth setting off:
Range selector lever position
Gear selected
Field range (Low), 1 to 8 5th gear
Road range (High), 9 to 16 9th gear
To drive forwards with the engine idling, pull the
shuttle lever against the spring pressure and towards
the steering wheel and push up. The clutch pedal
does not have to be pressed.
IMPORTANT: To select 14th gear or higher, the

tractor must be travelling at a suitable speed
before higher gears can be engaged. 14th
gear or higher cannot be selected when the
tractor is stationary.
132
As soon as the tractor is moving, press the + button
(1) three times and gears 6, 7 and 8 are selected one
after another. Alternatively, you can also hold down
the button and the gearbox will shift through the gears
at intervals of 1.75 seconds until the button is
released or until 8th gear is reached. Use the -button
in the same way to downshift the gears.
IMPORTANT: You cannot downshift by one or
more gears if the tractor engine speed is too
high. To downshift before gear shifting, reduce 1
the speed of the tractor (and therefore the
engine speed).
IMPORTANT: Always press the clutch pedal if
shifting between the 5-8 and 9-12 gear 133
ranges.
NOTE: When operating at temperatures of less
than -18 ° C with cold gear oil, avoid actuating the
shuttle lever too frequently before the oil has
heated up.
2 - 66
To change the direction of travel, pull the shuttle lever

towards the steering wheel and then slide down or
press the button on the multi-controller. The gearbox's
output speed and clutch engagement are monitored
automatically so that the drive is reversed gently.
Control the tractor's speed using the accelerator.
NOTE: For example, when selecting 3rd gear
in forwards travel, the same gear is selected
when changing direction by actuating the
shuttle lever.
If you need to set off on a slope in a low gear with a
heavy attachment, switch to the high range when you
reach 8th gear and the gearbox will switch 134
automatically to the lowest gear (9th) in the high
range.
When setting off in top gear, the gearbox will always
try to switch to 9th gear. If necessary, you can bypass
this function and shift into a higher gear by partially
separating the clutch and power-upshifting into the
gear required before the clutch engages.
IMPORTANT: A tractor with an electronic

gearbox cannot be towed; the tractor may only
towed from the field on a trailer or truck.
Changing the shuttle gear (reverse)
For some work, you may find it beneficial to shift into a
reverse gear other than that usually used, i.e. when
changing the direction of travel, 4th forwards gear
corresponds to 4th reverse gear. If necessary, a
reverse ratio preselection of three gears, from high to
low, can be set, provided that these are within the
same range.
To change the reverse preselection to a standard
gear, i.e. 4th gear, move the shuttle lever into its
reverse position and, while driving the tractor, select 1
2nd gear using the - button (1). The gearbox will now
automatically select 2nd gear as soon as the shuttle 135
lever is moved into reverse position.
You can use this procedure for ranges 1 to 4 and 5 to
8. When changing from one range into another,
upwards or downwards, a shift is always made into
the standard reverse gear until the driver sets another
reverse gear.
When operating in higher gears (13 to 16), the
standard reverse gear is always 9th gear unless the
driver selects a lower gear.
2 - 67
Speed matching
Speed matching normally only permits downshifting
into a lower gear. However, a higher gear is
selected if the engine is being forced to overrev.
When driving on the road in the high range (gears 13
to 16), the gearbox automatically selects a gear which
adapts the engine speed to the road speed if the
following method is applied:
Upshifting: Fully depress the clutch pedal and
reduce the engine speed using the accelerator. As
soon as the clutch pedal is released, the gearbox
automatically selects a higher gear (provided that
gear 16 has not already been engaged) and adapts
the engine speed to the road speed.
Downshifting: Reduce the engine speed, depress
the clutch pedal and simultaneously increase the
engine speed by pressing the accelerator. As soon as
the clutch pedal is released, the gearbox
automatically selects a lower gear (provided that gear
9 has not already been engaged) and adapts the
engine speed to the road speed.
NOTE: When operating in the high auto shift
range, the lowest gear for downshifting is 9th
gear (see section on auto shift).
In the high range, the driver can manually select
another gear without affecting speed matching.
When the range selector lever is in the low position,
speed matching functions up to 5th gear.
NOTE: Speed matching is deactivated if the
operator manually selects a gear in the low
range.
Auto shift function
When auto shift is activated, the tractor's gearbox can
undertake automatic upshifts or downshifts. Shifts are
undertaken in a range of 4 gears depending on the
speed and load. In the high range, this function can
be extended for driving on the road to include
automatic gear changes between 9th and 16th (or
17th) gears.
2 - 68
Auto shift during field operations

In the field range auto shifts can be carried out in gear
ranges 1 - 4 and 5 - 8. With the range selector lever in
the lower range (lever fully back), briefly press the
auto shift button (1). The automatic field symbol (a
plough) appears in the gear display to confirm
changeover.
When setting off in 1st gear, the gearbox
automatically moves through gears 2 and 3 until 4th
gear is engaged. For auto shifts through gears 5 to 8,
press the + button and at the same time press the 1
shift button on the rear of multi-controller II, press the
auto shift button (1) again and the gearbox will
automatically upshift through gears 5 to 8.
136
As soon as the tractor speed falls or the engine load

rises, the gearbox automatically shifts into a lower
gear.
If necessary, the auto shift range of the field range
can also be extended to gears 9 to 12. To activate
this, slide the range selector lever all the way to the
front and select a gear from the 9-12 range, then
press the automatic button (1) again. The field symbol
and the road symbol light up to confirm this shift
process.
In the 1-4, 5-8 and 9-12 ranges, the automatic
function can be combined with power lift actuation.
Raising the power lift with the rapid raising button
shifts the automatic function into standby mode, while
lowering the power lift reactivates the automatic
function.
NOTE: If the power lift was in a raised position
when the automatic function was activated
and has not been moved since, the automatic
function will take place without you having to
lower the power lift.
The automatic function also changes into standby
mode when the clutch pedal is pressed or the shuttle
lever is moved out of its position for forwards
operations.
To cancel the automatic function, press the switch and
then release or press the button for upshifting or
downshifting.
NOTE: When using the engine brake to reduce
the tractor speed, the automatic function is
not deactivated by the buttons for upshifting or
downshifting, provided that the gear selected
is within the automatic shift range.
2 - 69
Changing the automatic range for field operations

During certain field work, it may be beneficial for you
to reduce the automatic range to achieve a more
constant tractor speed or engine speed.
As a rule, the automatic function operates in a range
of four gears, e.g. 1-4, 5-8 or 9-12 during field
operations.
The number of automatic shifts in a selected range
can however be changed from a 4-gear range into a
3- or 2-gear range as required.
NOTE: All changes to the automatic range
must be undertaken when the tractor is in
motion and the automatic range is activated.
NOTE: The range changes will be lost when
the tractor is shut down.
Reducing the highest gear in the automatic range:
Increase the tractor's speed until what is currently the
highest automatic gear is engaged. Then briefly press
the button for downshifting (2). The gearbox is
downshifted by one gear and this becomes the new
highest Auto Shift gear. 1
To further reduce the range, press the button for
downshifting again.
Increasing the lowest gear in the automatic range:
2
Reduce the tractor's speed until what is currently the
lowest automatic gear is engaged. Then briefly press
the button for upshifting (1). The gearbox is upshifted
by one gear and this becomes the new lowest 137
automatic gear.
2 - 70
The automaticrange is shown in the gearbox display.

The diagram shows a 3-gear range with gears 6, 7
and 8. 7th gear is currently selected.
Digital display:
The range is represented by flashing bars and the
selected gear by a square of one colour.
When the automatic function is in standby mode, the
driver can manually change into any gear. This also
applies if the gear is outside the current Auto Shift
range. If the driver selects a gear within the current
Auto Shift range, before he exits from standby mode
(i.e. by lowering the power lift), the automatic function
is reactivated. 138
If the gear selected is outside the current range,

however, the Auto Shift function is cancelled when
you exit standby mode.
If 8th gear is selected and the Auto Shift range
includes gears 5, 6 and 7, the gearbox will
immediately shift down to 7th gear when you exit
standby mode. If the automatic range includes gears
6, 7 and 8 and you select 5th gear after exiting
standby mode, the gearbox will remain in 5th gear
until the situation permits a normal upshift into 6th
gear. The original automatic range featuring gears 6,
7 and 8 is re-established.
Auto shift during road travel
In the road range, the automatic function shifts
through gears 13 to 16/17. Slide the range selector
lever all the way forwards (H) and briefly press the
automatic button (1). The auto road symbol (trailer)
will light up on the gearbox display to confirm the
action.
The gearbox now automatically shifts through gears
13 to 16/17.
1
When you are in the 9 - 17 range, you can program
the gearbox to upshift and downshift automatically
through gears 9 to 16/17, including the range change
from 12th to 13th gear, by pressing the automatic 139
button (1) twice.
2 - 71
Changing the shift point

In order to adapt to different applications, the
gearbox's shift point can be reset from the standard
setting of 20 % for automatic gear changes. Auto Shift
gear changes are linked to an increase or decrease in
engine speed, which can be set to 5, 10, 15, 20 or 25.
NOTE: For transport operations, the shift point
is automatically adjusted as standard to 20 %
if a lower value has been set. If the shift point
is adjusted to 25 %, this setting is retained.
If the shift point is adjusted to 10 %, the gearbox
upshifts when the engine speed increases by 10 %.
Likewise, the gearbox downshifts when the engine
speed is reduced by the same percentage.
We would recommend adjusting the shift point to a
low value for field work and to a high value for
transport by road.
To change the shift point, hold down the Auto Shift
button and at the same time hold down the reverse
key on the multi-controller II for at least one second.
The current shift point value is displayed in the gear
display and the ramp symbol (1) lights up. Press the
Auto Shift button again to change through the shift
points.
Once the new shift point has been selected, release
the Auto Shift button and wait five seconds. The new 1
setting will be memorised and the display will return to
normal status.
140
IMPORTANT: If the starter switch (engine off)

is moved into the "Off" position, the settings
undertaken during tractor operations are
transferred from the operating memory into
the main memory. To provide sufficient time
for the transfer of data, you should wait at
least five seconds before switching the key
back on.
2 - 72
Setting off automatically

The driver can use the automatic setting off function to
engage the drive without having to press the clutch
pedal. This is done simply by using the shuttle lever to
select the forwards or reverse direction of travel.
Under normal starting conditions, i.e. the driver is in
the driver’s seat, the clutch pedal is pressed and the
shuttle lever is in Neutral, the automatic setting off
function is activated automatically.
Once a suitable gear range has been selected using
the range selector lever, simply select the forwards or
reverse direction of travel position with the shuttle
lever without pressing the clutch pedal. The automatic 141
setting off function then controls setting off from
stationary.
NOTE: Automatic setting off is deactivated as
soon as the vehicle stops and the driver gets
out of the driver's seat.
If the automatic setting off function is deactivated for
any reason, the driver should reactivate it as follows.
Sit in the driver's seat, release the parking brake and
press the clutch pedal. The vehicle then starts to
move in the direction of travel selected using the
shuttle lever.
Once it is activated, the automatic setting off function
will remain activated as long as the driver is sitting in
the driver's seat.
2 - 73
Error codes
In the unlikely event of an error occurring in the
gearbox control unit or the electronic shift circuits, a
malfunction symbol (1) and a four-digit error code (2)
appear in the dot matrix display on the instrument 1
panel.
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the
error type, e.g. interrupt, short circuit etc. In such
cases, your authorised dealer must check the tractor.
Should a fault occur in the transmission controls,
causing the tractor to become disabled, an error code
will be displayed in the instrument panel. If this 2
happens, please contact your authorised dealer and
provide him with the error code shown. 142
The error codes listed below, which require driver
intervention, may also be displayed on the dot matrix
display.
Error Error
code
P Parking lock on
CP Press clutch pedal for drive activation (re-
establish drive).
N: Move shuttle lever into neutral.
Gearbox calibration
If gears are only changed slowly or with jolts, the
clutches in the gearbox may have to be recalibrated.
Consult you authorised dealer.
2 - 74
Creeper gear (where fitted)

1
For operations requiring extra low road speeds, a
reduction gear set (creeper gears) is/are available.
The creeper gear set has the effect of reducing all the
gears available from the main gearbox and therefore
provides eight additional forwards and reverse gears.
The creeper gears are activated using a rocker switch
(1) on the right-hand side of the control console.
With the engine running, the clutch depressed and the
F/R changeover lever in Neutral, press and hold down
the tractor's brake pedals. Briefly press the button (2)
so that the creeper gears can be engaged. 143
The symbol for the creeper gears (1) flashes on the
gearbox display. Once the creeper gears are fully
engaged, the symbol stops flashing and remains lit up
continuously.
To disengage the creeper gears, repeat the above
steps and press the button (2) again. The creeper
gear symbol (1) goes out.
IMPORTANT: The creeper gears permit very

low road speeds. Do not use the creeper gear
to tow excessive towing loads on the tractor.
Gearbox calibration
144
If the gear shift is undertaken too slowly or is not

smooth enough, the clutches in the gearbox will have
to be recalibrated. Contact your authorised dealer
2 - 75
ROAD SPEEDS in km/h at nominal engine speed (2200 rpm) at 30 km/h with gearbox (16 x 16) and
creeper gear
Gear Range Rear tyres
18.4R-38, 520/70R-38, 600/65R-38
FORWARDS Standard speed Creep speed
F1 A 2.28 0.23
F2 A 2.78 0.28
F3 A 3.40 0.34
F4 A 4.15 0.41
F5 B 5.35 0.53
F6 B 6.53 0.65
F7 B 7.98 0.79
F8 B 9.75 0.97
F9 C 7.07 0.70
F10 C 8.63 0.86
F11 C 10.56 1.05
F12 C 12.90 1.28
F13 D 16.60 1.65
F14 D 20.28 2.02
F15 D 24.80 2.47
F16 D 30.30 3.01
REVERSE Standard speed Creep speed
R1 A 2.25 0.22
R2 A 2.75 0.27
R3 A 3.36 0.33
R4 A 4.11 0.41
R5 B 5.28 0.53
R6 B 6.45 0.64
R7 B 7.89 0.78
R8 B 9.64 0.96
R9 C 6.98 0.69
R10 C 8.53 0.85
R11 C 10.44 1.04
R12 C 12.75 1.27
R13 D 16.41 1.63
R14 D 20.05 1.99
R15 D 24.52 2.44
R16 D 29.96 2.98
2 - 76
ROAD SPEEDS in km/h at nominal engine speed (2200 rpm) at 40 and 50 km/h with gearbox (16 x 16 or
17 x 16) and creeper gear
Gear Range Rear tyres
18.4R-38, 520/70R-38, 600/65R-38
FORWARDs Standard speed Creep speed
F1 A 2.27 0.23
F2 A 2.78 0.28
F3 A 3.39 0.34
F4 A 4.15 0.41
F5 B 5.32 0.53
F6 B 6.53 0.65
F7 B 7.96 0.79
F8 B 9.76 0.97
F9 C 8.86 0.88
F10 C 10.87 1.08
F11 C 13.24 1.32
F12 C 16.24 1.61
F13 D 20.82 2.07
F14 D 25.53 2.54
F15 D 31.11 3.09
F16 D 38.16 3.79
F17 (F17E) D 45.82 (*4000) -
NOTE: * Max speed at 40 km/h Economy gearbox
NOTE: Gear F17 not available in the 40 km/h gearbox
NOTE: Creeper gear not available in the 50 km/h gearbox
REVERSE Standard speed Creep speed
R1 A 2.24 0.22
R2 A 2.75 0.27
R3 A 3.35 0.33
R4 A 4.11 0.41
R5 B 5.26 0.52
R6 B 6.45 0.64
R7 B 7.86 0.78
R8 B 9.64 0.96
R9 C 8.76 0.87
R10 C 10.74 1.07
R11 C 13.09 1.30
R12 C 16.05 1.60
R13 D 20.57 2.05
R14 D 25.24 2.51
R15 D 30.75 3.06
R16 D 37.72 3.75
2 - 77
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Tractors with all-wheel drive are equipped with a
differential lock fitted in the front and rear axles so that
all four wheels can be locked together in the event of
wheel slip.
The differential locks are activated using a spring- 1
loaded rocker switch on the control console to the
right of the driver's seat.
The differential locks can be activated in manual
mode or in automatic mode. The corresponding
symbol lights up on the switch to confirm the mode
selected when activating.
145
WARNING: Avoid activating the differential

lock at speeds of over 8 km/h wherever
possible and never activate it at speeds of over
! 15 km/h or when turning the tractor. If the
differential lock is activated, this will make it
harder to steer the tractor.
IMPORTANT: If the wheels are spinning,

reduce the engine speed before activating the
differential lock to avoid shock loads to the
gearbox.
Manual mode (all models)
On a soft area of ground, briefly press the lower part
of the button (1) (Fig 145) to lock both wheels
together. The differential lock is activated and a
warning light lights up on the button and on the
instrument panel (1).
As soon as one of the two brake pedals is pressed or
you move the button into its “OFF” position, the lock is
released and the warning lights on the button and
instrument panel go out. The bottom part of the button
can also be pressed again to release the differential
lock.
NOTE: The lock remains activated until wheel 146
traction has been balanced.
2 - 78
Automatic mode
To operate the front and rear differential lock in
automatic mode, press the upper part of the button
(1). The warning light in the button is activated. The
telltale (1) (Fig 148) on the instrument panel also lights 1
up but only while the differential lock is activated.
In automatic mode, the lock is released under the
following conditions:
147
The telltale (1) on the instrument panel lights up but
only while the differential lock is activated.
In automatic mode, the lock is released under the
following conditions:
Rapid raising button Lock temporarily

activated (to raise the disengaged (re-engages
rear power lift) when power lift is
lowered)
One of the brake pedals Lock temporarily

is pressed disengaged
Both brake pedals are Differential lock remains 148

pressed at the same activated
time
Tractor speed exceeds Differential lock is

15 km/h permanently deactivated
Front steering angle Lock temporarily

exceeding the preset disengaged (re-engages
limit values (where fitted) when steering angle is
reduced)
The upper part of the Differential lock is

toggle switch is pressed permanently deactivated
briefly
NOTE: If the differential lock is active when

you switch the starter switch off, it remains
active when the starter switch is switched
back on.
2 - 79
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
The all-wheel drive considerably improves the draft
force when working on difficult terrain. The drive on
the front wheels is designed so that it can be engaged
or disengaged when the tractor is stationary or in
motion. 1
NOTE: The front wheel drive is activated using
a three-stage rocker switch on the right-hand
side of the control console. The corresponding
symbol lights up on the switch to confirm the
mode selected when activating.
Manual mode
149
To engage front wheel drive, press the lower part of

the switch (1). When the all-wheel drive is engaged, a
warning light lights up on the button and on the
instrument panel. To disengage the all-wheel drive,
move the switch back into the (central) “OFF”
position.
NOTE: If the all-wheel drive is active when you
switch the starter switch off, it remains active
when the starter switch is switched back on.
Automatic mode
To change the all-wheel drive to automatic mode,
briefly press the upper part of the all-wheel button (1)
(Fig 149). The warning light integrated in the button
is activated. The telltale (1) on the instrument panel
also lights up but only while the all-wheel drive is
activated.
The all-wheel drive remains permanently activated
until one of the following events occurs:
● Road speed exceeds 20 km/h. The all-wheel

drive is reactivated as soon as the road speed
falls below 18 km/h.
150
NOTE: The following information only applies
to tractors which are fitted with a steering
angle sensor.
● The road speed falls below 10 km/h and the

steering angle is greater than 30°. The all-
wheel drive is reactivated if the steering angle
is reduced.
● The road speed is between 10 and 20 km/h

and the steering angle is greater than 25°.
The all-wheel drive is reactivated if the
steering angle is reduced.
2 - 80
The telltale (1) on the instrument panel also lights up

but only while the all-wheel drive is activated.
NOTE: We would recommend deactivating the
all-wheel drive to avoid disproportionate wear
to the tyres when travelling on public
highways or areas of solid ground.
WARNING: When driving tractors with all-

wheel drive activated or deactivated, you
should depress the clutch or move the
gearbox selector lever into Neutral when
! towing or rolling downhill in order to prevent
overspeed. This may otherwise result in you
151
losing control of the tractor, personal injury to
the driver or people standing nearby or
damage to the driveshaft.
NOTE: When driving the tractor downhill, use

the same gear as when driving uphill.
WARNING: Your tractor is fitted with a

highly effective, hydraulically actuated rear
wheel brake. The drive to the front axle in
tractors with all-wheel drive is automatically
activated at speeds of more than 8.5 km/h as
! soon as the all-wheel drive brakes have
locked. Tractor drivers should note that all-
wheel braking significantly increases braking
performance. During severe braking in
particular, ensure that the rear of the tractor
has no ballast.
2 - 81
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM

1
The optional, self-levelling, front axle suspension
provides improved stability, better vehicle control,
more comfort and greater traction. Front axle
suspension is automatically activated each time the
tractor is started but will not function at speeds below
1.5 k/mh.
When operating at speeds up to 12 km/h, the front
axle suspension may be locked if not required. A
warning light in the switch will indicate lock out is
engaged.
IMPORTANT: To lock out the suspension, press 152

the top of the switch (1) on the right-hand
control panel. Press the top of the switch
again to reactivate the suspension.
At speeds above 12 km/h, the suspension will
automatically re-engage, and any lock will be
overridden. In this situation the warning light will
remain on.
NOTE: Should the inhibit switch's warning light flash,
this indicates a suspension system malfunction. If this
happens, contact your authorised dealer..
IMPORTANT: Also read the “Ballasting and Tyres”

section on Page 3 - 137. for use of front end weights
on tractors with front axle suspension.
WARNING: Hydraulic oil in the front axle

suspension system operates under very high
pressure. Escaping hydraulic oil under
pressure can penetrate the skin causing
! serious injury. Unqualified persons should not
attempt to disconnect any pipework in the front
axle hydraulic system. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in serious injury.
WARNING: If a gear is engaged with the

engine running and the tractor supported on
height-adjustable axle stands, the self-levelling
! function of the suspension may cause the axle
to make corrections (move up and down). The
suspension should be locked to maintain
stability.
2 - 82
SECTION 3
FIELD OPERATION
BEFORE STARTING UP
PROGRAMMING THE TRACTOR FUNCTIONS

WARNING: Before you drive or start up the
The tractor has two pieces of memory equipment for
! tractor, please read the safety precautions
provided in section 1 of this manual. controlling and saving the settings for numerous
electronic functions. The settings undertaken when
Read this section carefully so that you fully operating the tractor are temporarily saved in the
understand the operating requirements. Even if you operating memory. When the ignition switch is
already use other tractors, you should read this switched off (engine off), these settings are
section of the manual carefully to ensure that you are transferred to the main memory. If the ignition switch
familiar with the layout and function of all the tractor's is switched off and on then again too quickly during
equipment. this transfer of data, some of this data may be
damaged or lost. When changes have been made to
Do not start the engine or try to drive or start up the the settings saved during tractor operations, wait five
tractor before you are fully familiar with all the controls. seconds between switching the ignition switch off and
Once the tractor is already in motion, it is too late to then on again to ensure that data is transferred
learn. If you have any doubt about how to operate the correctly from the operating memory to the main
tractor, please contact your dealer. memory. Once data transfer is complete, the new
Refer to section 4 for lubrication and maintenance settings remain unchanged until they are
requirements. The technical data for the tractor can reprogrammed.
be found in section 8.
CHECKS BEFORE OPERATION
RUNNING IN Before starting up the tractor, familiarise yourself with
Careful handling during the 50-hour run-in phase and the layout and operation of the controls.
compliance with the recommended maintenance Satisfy all daily lubrication and maintenance
intervals will ensure a long and reliable service life for requirements as laid out in section 4.
your new tractor.
Once the daily maintenance work is complete, walk
Avoid overloading the engine. Operating under heavy around the tractor and undertake a visual inspection.
load and in too high a gear may subject the engine to Note the following points in particular:
extreme overloading. Overloading occurs if the engine
does not respond to accelerating. ● Cracks in the V-belts
Do not operate the tractor without engine load. This
can be just as harmful to the engine as overloading. ● Accumulation of clods of earth in the engine
Vary operations so that the engine is subject to area
different levels of loads during the run-in phase.
● Leaks or damage on hoses,
Use the lower gears with heavy draft loads and avoid lines and fittings
continuous operations at constant engine speeds.
Operating the tractor in too low a gear with too little ● Damaged tyres
load and at a high engine speed wastes fuel. You can
save fuel and minimise engine wear by selecting the
correct gear for each task.
Check the instruments and warning lights regularly
and observe the levels specified for the radiator and
various oil tanks.
3-1
SECTION 3 – FIELD OPERATION
● Loose attached equipment
● Leaks or clods of earth near the driveline and

hydraulic pump
Undertake any repair work required before using the
tractor.
HIGH PRESSURE CLEANING OF THE

TRACTOR
Your tractor is fitted with a range of electronic control
units which link up with various sensors in the vehicle.
These control devices control, monitor and provide
information on the engine, gearbox, PTO and
hydraulic functions.
When cleaning the tractor body or chassis with a high
pressure jet of water, it is therefore very important that
you ensure that the jet of water is not directed straight
at electric components, wiring harnesses or plugs.
3-2
TOWING THE TRACTOR

IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a
short way, e.g. out of a building. Do not tow the
tractor on roads or transport it in this way.
IMPORTANT: If the tractor has to be towed, all
gear levers must be brought into Neutral before
the engine is switched off otherwise gearbox parts
could be damaged during towing. If the tractor is
fitted with creeper gears, the selector lever must be
moved into the “Off” position.
Use a strong chain for towing. At the rear, only tow
the tractor by the drawbar, the rear trailer fixture or
the power lift. At the front, only tow the tractor by
the trailer pin in the front weights or on the front
carrier. The tractor must be steered and braked.
The following points should be noted to prevent
damage to the gearbox or other components which
rotate during towing but which are not lubricated:
_ Only tow short distances
_ Do not travel any faster than 8 km/h
_ If possible, allow the engine to idle so that the
gearbox and servostatic steering system are
lubricated.
WARNING: Do not tow the tractor faster

than 8 km/h. The steering system is much
! slower and much more force is required to
turn the steering wheel when the engine is
not running.
WARNING: Do not use cables or ropes to

tow the tractor. If the cable or rope snaps or
slips, the resultant whiplash could cause
! serious injury. If using a chain, fit the chain
so that the open end of the hook faces
upwards. If the hook slips, it will then fall
downwards rather than flying upwards.
NOTE: The all-wheel drive is activated when the

engine is not running, regardless of the position of
the all-wheel drive switch.
3-3
TRANSPORTING THE TRACTOR

Transport the tractor on a flat bed trailer or low-level
truck on which the tractor can be positioned on all four
wheels. Use lashing chains to secure the tractor onto
the transport vehicle.
IMPORTANT: Do not place the chain around the

all-wheel drive shaft, steering cylinder, front-wheel
drive axle or other components because these
could be damaged by the chain or high levels of
loading.
Use the drawbar or drawbar trailer as a rear
attachment point.
IMPORTANT: Cover the rear silencer so that the

wind does not rotate the turbocharger and damage
the bearing.
The turbine in the tubocharger must not freewheel
[rotate] when the engine is switched off because
the turbocharger bearings are not supplied with oil.
Ensure that the roof hatch is locked correctly and
cannot open of its own accord when you transport the
tractor on a vehicle which travels faster than 50 km/h.
Firmly link both handles with an elastic band as
shown in the above figure for cable connectors (1)
linking the bracket of the roller blind. Do not use wire
or metal straps as these may damage the paintwork.
153
3-4
USING STARTER CABLES
WARNING: Only actuate the starter when

sitting in the driver's seat. If the starter switch
is bridged and a gear is still selected, the
tractor may suddenly move or run away
! which may in turn cause serious injury. Wear
eye protection whenever you use starter
cables to start the tractor or charge the
battery.
If starter cables have to be used to start the tractor,

only use high quality cables and proceed as follows:
BOOSTING THE TRACTOR BATTERY

154
Using remote jump terminals

The remote jump terminals, installed on the right-
hand side of the engine, provide an easy method of
boosting the tractor battery without having to remove
the battery cover.
The positive terminal (1), mounted on the starter
solenoid, is encased in a plastic housing.
The negative terminal (2) is attached to the upper
retaining bolt of the starter.
Connect one end of red jump lead to the positive (+)
remote jump terminal (1) and the other end to the
positive (+) pole of the auxiliary battery.
Connect one end of black jump lead, to the negative (-
) remote jump terminal (2) and the other end to the
negative (-) terminal of auxiliary battery.
When the engine starts, allow it to run at idle speed,
turn off all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then
disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to that
in which they were connected. This will help protect
the alternator from possible damage due to extreme
load changes.
Turn off all electrical equipment not required and run
the tractor engine until the battery is fully charged.
3-5
IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery

to start the engine, ensure that the polarity of
the jump leads is correct (positive to positive,
negative to negative) otherwise the alternator
may be damaged. Only use an auxiliary
battery if the tractor batteries are flat.
Excessive amperage (above 1600 cca) may
damage the starting motor. In the event of the
batteries being almost totally flat, such that
terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will
require a special charging procedure. Contact
your authorised dealer.
MAIN BATTERY SWITCH (where

fitted)
Mechanical engagement
After leaving the tractor or during maintenance, the
battery can be disconnected from the tractor's
electrical system using the battery master switch.
The start key must be removed to avoid
unintentional use or accidents.
Do NOT use the main switch to shut down the
engine!
To switch off - turn lever (1) 90° to the left. 1
To switch on - turn lever to the right.
155
Electrical engagement
If the switch (1) is pressed at the top, the battery
power is automatically disconnected from the
1
tractor's electrical system.
The start key must be removed to avoid
unintentional use or accidents.
If the vehicle is started up, the switch (1) must first
be pressed at the bottom.
156
3-6
STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, always proceed as follows:
● Seat yourself in the driver's seat.
● Ensure that the parking brake is applied.
● Ensure that all gear shift levers are in

Neutral.
● Ensure that the PTO button is in its “Off”

position.
● Move lever for remote control valves into

Neutral.
● Slide the control lever for the hydraulic power

lift all the way forwards.
WARNING: Check the area under the

equipment to ensure that damage or injury
! cannot occur when the equipment is
lowered.
● Press the clutch pedal.

IMPORTANT: The turbocharger's high speed
requires sufficient lubrication when the engine is
started. Therefore allow the engine to idle for
around one minute at 1000 rpm before driving the
tractor.
3-7
Auxiliary start system (where fitted)
WARNING: Your tractor is equipped with an

electronic cold weather starting aid. Do not
use ether when the cold start aid is
installed. It will explode in the intake
! manifold. If any difficulty is experienced when
trying to start your tractor in cold
temperatures, please contact your
authorised dealer.
The auxiliary start system enables the engine to be

started at ambient temperatures of down to --18°; and
consists of a heating element in the intake manifold.
When operated by the starter switch, the auxiliary
start system will ignite fuel in the manifold, heating
indrawn air prior to it being drawn into the combustion
chamber. A warning light on the instrument panel will
illuminate to confirm operation. If temperatures below
--18° are encountered, a block coolant heater is
available as an accessory. The block coolant heater is
effective at ambient temperatures down to --29° when
used in conjunction with the auxiliary start system.
Starter switch
A starter switch with five settings is installed. The
starter switch has the following settings:
Setting 1 No use
Setting 2 Off
Setting 3 Additional equipment on
Position 4 Auxiliary start system, warning lamps and
instruments on
Position 5 Auxiliary start system on,
starter active
157
IMPORTANT: Never push or pull the machine

to start the engine. Use an auxiliary battery
and jump leads.
3-8
Starting during cold spells (with a cold

engine)
● Move the hand throttle into the middle

position and turn the starter switch to
position (4). An indicator light (1)
(Figure159) lights up on the instrument
panel and signals that auxiliary start system
is active.
158
● Once the telltale is illuminated, move the
switch clockwise as far as it will go into
position (5). As soon as the engine starts,
release the start key. Do not activate the
starter for more than 60 seconds.
● If the engine does not start, repeat the

procedure. If the engine still doesn't start,
wait 4 - 5 minutes for the battery to recover
and then repeat the procedure.
● Once the engine starts, move the throttle

back into its idling position and check that
all warning lights go out and the displays 159
are normal.
Starting in warm weather or with a warm
engine
● Move the manual throttle into the central

area and turn the starter switch clockwise as
far as it will go into position (5) to activate the
starter. As soon as the engine starts, release
the start key. Do not activate the starter for
more than 60 seconds.
NOTE: Once the starter has been activated, the

starter switch must be returned to the Off -position
before the starter can be reactivated.
● Move the throttle back into its idling position

and check that all warning lights go out and
the displays are normal. 160
3-9
STOPPING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT: Allow the engine to idle for around
one minute at 1000 rpm before switching off the
engine. The turbocharger and intake manifold can
then cool which prevents components from
possibly being subjected to torsion.
To switch off the engine, proceed as follows:
● Sit in the driver's seat.
● Move the hand throttle to idle.
● Make sure that the parking brake is applied

properly.
● Ensure that all gear shift levers are in Neutral.
● Ensure that the PTO is disengaged.
● Move operating lever for remote control

valves into Neutral.
● Lower attached equipment fitted on the 3

point hitch to the ground.
● Turn the starter switch OFF (pos.2).
3 - 10
Automatic engine shutdown

The system monitors four key areas that are critical to
the operational reliability of the engine and gearbox.
In the unlikely event that at least one of these reaches
a critical condition, the engine will be shut down.
● The engine oil pressure falls below safe

limits.
● The coolant temperature exceeds safe limits.
● Gearbox oil pressure falls below safe limits.
● The gearbox oil temperature exceeds safe

limits.
Prior to engine shutdown, the red stop light will start to
flash and the critical alarm will sound. In addition, the
engine fault warning lights and malfunction symbols
will flash alternately on the dot matrix display. If, after
30 seconds, the driver has not shut down the engine, 161
the automatic shutdown feature will be activated and
the engine will shut down.
After the engine has shut down, the red stop light will
remain on but the alarm will cease to sound. Both
engine and malfunction symbols will continue to flash
in turn.
The automatic engine shutdown feature can be
programmed by your authorised dealer to operate in
one of three modes:
1. No engine shutdown.
In this mode the engine is not capable of
automatic shutdown.
2. Unlimited engine shutdown.
If one or more of the monitored conditions
reaches a critical level, the engine will
automatically shut down.
3. Stationary engine shutdown.
The engine will shut down only during
stationary operations if one or more of the
monitored conditions reaches a critical level.
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to start an

engine that has automatically shut down, first
track down and rectify the fault that caused
the engine to be stopped.
3 - 11
Engine power management

Engine power management (EPM) is an automatic
system designed to boost engine power levels where
tractor performance may be compromised due to
increased loads.
Once activated, EPM will monitor and respond to
increased power demands by gradually raising the level of
horsepower available.
IMPORTANT: The engine management system is
deactivated when the coolant temperature
exceeds 105° C. In these situations either
increase the engine speed or reduce the load on
the engine until the coolant temperature is
reduced.
PTO operation
Before EPM will operate, the following conditions
must be satisfied:
Engine speed is above 1300 rpm.
Tractor’s forwards travel speed is above
0.5 km/h
PTO power output is above 27 kW
(36.2 hp).
Torque of PTO driveline
greater than 250 Nm.
NOTE: Engine power management functions
in all PTO speed ranges, i.e. 540, 540E and
1000 rpm.
162
With the tractor moving and the engine running at
above 1300 rpm, engaging the rear PTO will
automatically switch engine power management
into standby mode. As soon as the torque and load
on the PTO reach or exceed the aforementioned
levels, the warning light (1) will illuminate and engine
power management will be activated.
When the power requirement is reduced, the amount of
boost is also reduced until the system finally reverts to
standby mode.
Road travel
Before EPM will operate, the following conditions
must be satisfied:
16th gear or higher must be selected.
‘Auto Transport’ mode selected.
Engine speed between 1800 and 2200 rpm.
Engine power management will only function when
Auto Shift is selected and the tractor is operating in
16th gear or higher. EPM will be de-activated if one or
more of the following conditions occurs:
Downshifting below 16th gear.
Engine speed falls below 1800 rpm.
Auto Shift is disengaged.
3 - 12
CONSTANT ENGINE SPEED CONTROL

The operator can use constant engine speed control
to preset one or two fixed engine speeds which are
appropriate for the work to be undertaken.
Activation of constant engine speed is indicated by
the telltale on the dashboard (1) lighting up.
Once activated, ESM constantly monitors engine load
and speed for any change. If the engine loads
increases and the engine speed decreases, ESM
compensates for this by controlling the engine speed
such that the engine speed remains constant.
163
Setting constant engine speed
With the engine running, set the manual throttle to
1000 rpm. To activate engine speed management,
briefly press the top of the switch (2) on the right-hand
console. To deactivate, depress the top of the switch 1 2
again. 3
Select program 1 by briefly pressing the bottom of

button (2) and then use the button (1) to increase the
engine speed to the desired level. When the speed for
program 1 has been entered, program 2 can then be
selected (if required) by briefly pressing the bottom of
button (2) again. Repeat the above procedure to set
the second speed. 164
NOTE: Briefly pressing the button will

increase or decrease the speed in 10 rpm
increments. If you press and hold down the
switch, the speed increases or decreases
continuously by 100 rpm a second if the
engine is not loaded.
IMPORTANT: After the starter switch has

been turned off (engine off), electronic
program settings made during tractor
operation are transferred from the operating
memory to the main memory. To allow
sufficient time for the data to transfer, pause
for a minimum of five seconds before turning
the key on again.
3 - 13
Operation at constant engine speed

Constant engine speed can be activated at any time if
the engine is running at a speed of more than 1000
rpm. To activate the constant engine speed function,
briefly press the top of the speed button (2). The
system will automatically default to program 1, 2
depress the bottom of the control switch to select
program 2.
When working in the field, to change between
programs 1 and 2 you can also briefly press the lower 1
part of control button (2) several times or, if it is more
convenient, press the button on the headland
management control(3). 165
NOTE: If the headland management control

button is used to shuttle between constant
speeds, the button (2) will be disabled. To re-
enable switch operation, exit and re-enter the
constant speed function.
NOTE: If the manual throttle lever is moved in
constant speed mode, the speed settings are
deactivated and engine speed control is again
taken from the manual throttle lever or
accelerator pedal.
Accessing a previously stored setting
To access a previously stored setting, briefly press the
top section of the control button (2). The light will start
to flash in the instrument panel.
NOTE: The manual throttle must be set to 1000 3
rpm before the switch is pressed.
Continue to hold the switch down until the light stops
flashing and goes out. The engine speed then
increases or decreases to the setting previously set.
Press the bottom of the speed button (2) or the
headland management switch to select the required
constant engine speed program.
166
NOTE: If the constant engine speed button (2)
is released while the light is still flashing, the
constant engine speed is reset to the standard
value. To restart the process, press the
constant engine speed switch again.
To exit the constant engine speed function:

Press the top of the constant speed button (2).
Move the manual throttle to idling.
Turn the starter switch to OFF.
3 - 14
HEADLAND MANAGEMENT CONTROL (HMC)

Brief instructions for headland management
control (HMC)
Where there is a need to repeat a sequence of
actions, such as those made during a field end turn,
headland management control can be used to create,
store and play-back a program of these actions.
The following text is provided as brief instructions of
how to operate the headland management system.
The following pages contain a detailed description of
the headland management system.
NOTE: For headland management to function,
the manual throttle must be set above 900 rpm
and the tractor must be travelling at a speed
above 0.5 km/h. Start the recording once the
equipment is correctly set and you have left
the field.
RECORD FUNCTION
1. To start the field end management's recording function, press and hold down the
bottom of the record switch for three seconds. The recording symbol will flash in the
gear display.
2. To start recording a program sequence, briefly press the button on the multi-
controller. The recording symbol will cease to flash and light up continuously.
3. Undertake the field end manoeuvre in the usual manner. Since every step is
recorded in the order in which it is performed, the relevant symbol appears in the gear
display. Once a step is complete, this is indicated in the gear display. When a step is
completed and a new one started, the symbol for the completed step will scroll
downwards to be replaced by the new one.
Section 4 contains a description of how to record a second sequence for field end
management. The process for ending the current recording is described in section 6.
4. To record a second sequence after the first program sequence is complete, press
and hold the button on the multi-controller for three seconds. The recording symbol
will start to light up.
5. To start recording, depress the step switch again. The recording symbol will stop
flashing and will light up continuously. You can now start the sequence.
6. Once the recordings for field end management are complete, briefly press the
bottom of the recording switch to save the sequence(s) recorded and to exit the field
end management program.
3 - 15
PLAYBACK FUNCTION
1. To access the playback function, press and hold down the top of the playback
switch. The program number will appear at the top of the HMC display.
Release the switch and the number will be replaced by a flashing playback symbol.
2. If a second sequence was recorded, continue to press the top or bottom of the
playback switch until the required program number (1 or 2) is displayed, then release
the switch.
The program number will be replaced by a flashing playback symbol.
3. To begin playback, press and hold the button until a 'beep' is heard. The playback
symbol will stop flashing and will remain on.
3. During playback, the function symbols will scroll upwards towards the top of the
headland management display.
4. Once the current program has been played back, the next program is held in
standby mode (the playback symbol flashes). Press and hold down the button until a
beep is heard. If you now release the switch, the next sequence will start to play back.
5. If you want to skip a playback program, you have to exit the field end management
program. Press the recording switch to do this. To access headland management
control again, go back and repeat the steps described in section (1).
Explanation of symbols used in headland management control, see page 3 - 19.
3 - 16
Headland management control functions

In recording mode, a sequence of actions or
'steps' are recorded to create a program. In
playback mode, headland management
control runs the program in the same order in
which it was recorded.
Headland management control permits up to
28 individual steps to be recorded in one or
two separate sequences.
Three switches control the operation of
headland management control system: 1
Top of switch (1).
To access a program, briefly press the top of
this switch.
Bottom of switch (1).
This switch is used to deactivate the system
and to select recording mode.
167
Button (2) on the multi-controller
The button is used to start or stop a program.
The button can also be used to insert pauses
during a recording or to pause a program 2
during playback.
NOTE: Each pause inserted during a
recording will be recognised as a program
step by the headland management control
system.
If the headland management control system is used
for a recording, the following steps or functions can be
included in the program recording:
168
● Regulating engine speed.
● Upshifting and/or downshifting of gearbox in
the relevant group.
● Raising and lowering the rear three point
hitch.*
● Raising and lowering the front three point
hitch.*
● Operating the rear electronic remote control
valves.
*If the auto PTO or automatic differential lock
control is activated before one of the front or
rear power lift's operating sequences has been
recorded, the automatic function is integrated
in the headland management control program.
3 - 17
IMPORTANT: If working in the field in

automatic mode and if field end management
control is activated, then AUTO mode is
deactivated. After completing a field end
manoeuvre program, HMC will be suspended
and the ‘Field Auto’ mode program will be
resumed.
In a similar way, ESM will also be disabled
when headland management control is active
and will be re-enabled when headland
management control is suspended. The light
for constant engine speed management
remains lit up while the program is
deactivated.
If headland management control is active, the symbol
(1) is shown on the gear display.
Symbol (2) indicates whether headland management
control is in recording or playback mode.
When recording or playing back a program, each
action or step will be represented by the appropriate
symbol. For example, a gearbox symbol appears
during a gear change or a sequence of gear changes.
See pages 3-17 for an explanation of HMC symbols.
As each step is recorded the accompanying symbol
will move down the display as the next step begins.
The symbol for the new step will appear immediately 169
below the record symbol.
During playback, symbols will scroll upwards from the

bottom of the display. When a symbol reaches the top
of the display (below the playback symbol) the
corresponding function will begin to operate.
A maximum of seven symbols may be displayed at
any one time.
IMPORTANT: If a program fault occurs and

the error symbol is displayed, exit and re-enter
headland management to clear the fault.
170
3 - 18
Explanation of symbols used in headland management control (HMC)

Below you will find examples of the symbols which depending on the program content may appear in the gearbox
display when HMC is active.
Sequence number Front power lift – raise
Engine speed – increase Front power lift – lower
Engine speed – reduce Front power lift – float
Gearbox – upshift Program pause
Gearbox – downshift Recording mode
Power lift – raise Playback mode
Power lift – float Error
Power lift – lower
External cylinder – retract
External cylinder – extend
External cylinder – float
3 - 19
Recording a program
NOTE: To enable headland management
control to function, the manual throttle must
be set to an engine speed of more than 900
rpm. Start the recording once the equipment is
correctly set and you have left the field.
1
IMPORTANT: If the tractor is stopped or if no

controls are used for around 13 minutes when
recording a sequence, the system will
automatically revert to standby mode and all
the steps already recorded will be lost.
To start the recording, press the bottom of the record 171
switch (1) and keep held down for three seconds.
The upper part of the display then shows the symbol

for field end management control along with the
record symbol that starts to flash.
To commence recording, briefly press the step switch 2
(3). As each HMC linked control is operated, a grey
symbol will appear in the display directly below the
recording symbol.
As each symbol moves down the display to be
replaced by the next one, the colour will change from
grey to black.
NOTE: Symbols relating to the function in
current use, either in record or playback
mode, will always appear inverted (grey 172
symbol on black background).
After the first headland management sequence has
been completed, a second sequence (turning at
opposite headland) may be recorded.
Press and hold the step switch (3) for three seconds
to end the first recording and enter standby mode.
The recording symbol will start to flash.
To start recording a second sequence, briefly press the
step switch (3).
NOTE: Gear changes made whilst the tractor is in
reverse will not be recorded or played back by field
end management control. A pause will be
automatically entered in the program at this point.
Regulating engine speed.
3 - 20
During a recording, pauses may be inserted into the

program by briefly pressing the step switch (3).
Headland management will pause at this point and a
pause symbol will be inserted in the program. Press
button (2) again to continue with the recording. 2
To save a recorded sequence, press the upper part of
the record switch (2) (see diagram 171). Field end
management control is thereby deactivated and no
further recordings are made.
IMPORTANT: Turning the starter switch to
OFF when in recording mode will result in all
unsaved steps being lost. Any previously
recorded sequences will however be retained
in memory. 173
NOTE: Shuttling actions are not recorded but

a pause is automatically inserted into the
sequence when the shuttle lever is operated.
IMPORTANT: After the starter switch has
been switched off (engine stop), any
adjustments to electronically stored settings
made during tractor operation are transferred
from the operating memory to the main
memory. To allow sufficient time for the data to
transfer, pause for a minimum of five seconds
before turning the key on again.
IMPORTANT: If you want to include an electro-
hydraulic remote control valve in a headland
management control sequence, it is important to
allow sufficient time for the movement of the
control lever to be recorded as it passes through
the Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions (or
vice versa). You need simply hold the control
lever in the individual positions for around half a
second for each step to be correctly recorded. If
you move the control lever too quickly, data
transfer may be interrupted. When undertaking
the relevant sequence, the implement will not
then follow the order of commands required.
NOTE: The maximum time permitted for a
single step in an electro-hydraulic control
valve sequence is 25 seconds. After this time
another step will be created to continue the
operation and a new symbol will appear in the
display.
3 - 21
Playing back a program
WARNING: Before commencing work, it is

recommended that HMC programs are given
! a 'dry run' to ensure all program steps have
been retained in the memory, and any timed
EHR sequences replay correctly.
To play back a recorded sequence, briefly press the

top of the playback switch (1) and the program is
played back. Playback will be activated but will remain
in standby mode.
If the pause/resume function (button) was used to
record a second program sequence, the operator may
1
now cycle between sequences 1 and 2 by holding
down the top of the switch.
When the correct number appears at the top of the
gear display, release the switch. The program number
will be replaced by a flashing playback symbol.
174
When reaching the point at which the sequence is to

start, press and hold the button (2) until a 'beep' is
heard. Then release the switch. Playback will start as
soon as the switch is released and the first symbol in
the sequence will appear below the playback symbol. 2
When playback begins, the symbol will stop flashing

and will remain displayed.
As each function comes into play, the corresponding
symbol will appear immediately below the playback
symbol. At this point it will change from black on grey
to grey on black (inverted).
175
Subsequent symbols in the program sequence will
appear below the one currently in play. As each
step is completed, the corresponding symbol will
disappear from the display to be replaced by the
next one.
3 - 22
In playback mode, each step will be played back

exactly as it was recorded.
NOTE: If necessary, the foot throttle may be
used to increase engine speed during HMC
playback.
If a gearbox upshift or downshift is programmed into a
program sequence but the target gear is not in the
currently selected range, headland management
control playback will pause and the gearbox symbol
will flash until the correct range is manually engaged.
Press and hold down the button and release it to
continue the playback.
The same applies to instances in which the tractor is
travelling in reverse gear but the next programmed
gear is a forwards gear. Headland management
playback mode is then stopped and the gearbox
symbol flashes. Move the shuttle lever to forward
travel. The gearbox symbol now stops flashing. Press
and hold down the button and release it to continue
the playback.
If pauses were inserted into the program sequence
during recording, playback will automatically stop at
each pause point. To resume the sequence, press
and hold the button (2) switch until a 'beep' is heard.
The next step will start immediately after the button is 2
released.
This however only applies to pauses inserted at the
recording stage.
In playback mode, the program may be stopped at
any time by pressing the step switch (3). The program
will pause and playback symbol will begin to flash.
176
3 - 23
IMPORTANT: If the step stage is used to be bypassed and the program will move on to the next
suspend a function in play, all headland step when playback is re-started.
management control actions, including timed
However, the cancelled action will remain in the
electro-hydraulic control valve program
program memory for subsequent playback actions.
sequences, will be aborted and it may be
necessary to manually complete the paused To continue the program, press and hold the step
step before re-starting headland management switch until a 'beep' is heard, then release the switch.
control playback.
NOTE: The playback symbol and the symbol
To resume program playback, press and hold the step for the electro-hydraulic control valve (EHR)
switch until a 'beep' is heard and then release the will flash in the display until the button is
switch. pressed to continue the program. At this time,
the playback symbol stops flashing and the
IMPORTANT: During playback, one or more of symbol for EHR disappears from the display.
the following actions will cause headland
management to be stopped and all automated IMPORTANT: If a field end management
functions, including timed electro-hydraulic control program is halted by the driver leaving
control valve sequences, to be terminated: the seat for more than 2 seconds, the current
engine speed will be maintained until the
● The tractor speed falls to below 0.5 km/h (0.3 driver returns to the seat or the throttle setting
mph) or the tractor is stationary for more than is changed.
10 seconds. Before leaving the seat, always de-activate
HMC and apply the tractor parking brake.
● The operator leaves the driver's seat for more
than 2 seconds.
● The three point hitch fender switch or PTO

controls are actuated.
● Manual throttle is set to idling speed.
● One of more of the tractor controls linked to

the headland management are activated to
bypass the program.
NOTE: A control is not then bypassed by field
end management control until the sequence
reaches the point at which the automated
operation of that control begins. At this time,
the sequence will be stopped.
On completion of a program or if headland
management control is halted during playback, the
electro-hydraulic control valves will not return to the
float position even if the relevant control lever is in the
float position. The following scenarios are exceptions
to this:
● The lever was in the float position when

headland management was activated.
● The float function was selected by the last

command to headland management control.
If a function of the electro-hydraulic control valve is
played back and button (2) is used to abort this
function, i.e. to stop an external implement cylinder
from extending, then the implement cylinder stops
and playback is interrupted. The cancelled action will
3 - 24
TURN ASSIST STEERING ASSISTANCE (if fitted)

The optional hydraulic steering assistance is
designed to provide fast steering response when
required, e.g. during front loader work.
From the straight-ahead position, the steering aid 1
undertakes a full steering lock to the left or right using
a turning angle of less than 10° of the steering wheel.
IMPORTANT: Before travelling on public
roads, the steering assistance (Turn Assist)
must be switched off and normal steering
reactivated. Before setting off, check the
normal steering: turn the steering wheel from
one steering lock to the other.
177
NOTE: The steering assistance is deactivated
at tractor road speeds of more than 10 km/h.
To activate the steering assistance (Turn Assist),
press the On / Off switch (1). A warning light in the
switch will illuminate to confirm activation.
178
To activate the steering assistance, press the central
ring (3) on the steering wheel and hold it down.
Release the ring to deactivate the function. When the
central ring is pressed, the telltale (2) on the
dashboard lights up. It goes out when the central ring
is released again.
NOTE: If the On/Off switch (1) remains in the
‘ON’ position when the engine is switched off,
the steering assistance is deactivated when
the engine is next started up. The warning
light in the On/Off switch does not light up and
the display light (2) flashes if the central ring
is pressed. To reactivate the steering assistance
(Turn Assist), the On/Off switch must first be moved 179
out of the ‘OFF’ position and then back into ‘ON’.
3 - 25
The steering assistance only functions if the following

conditions are satisfied.
1. The On/Off switch is in the ON position and the
telltale is lit up.
2. The tractor's road speed is not higher than 10 km/h.
3. The gearbox oil temperature is above 5° C.
NOTE: Trying to use the steering aid if all the
aforementioned conditions are not satisfied
will result in the display light (2) flashing.
NOTE: If the tractor speed exceeds 10 km/h
when the steering assistance is activated, the
steering assistance is switched off and the
display light (2) flashes.
NOTE: If the gearbox oil temperature is low
and the steering assistance is switched on, we
would recommend turning the steering wheel
from one lock to another before operating the
steering assistance.
180
The steering assistance is deactivated if an error
occurs. If the system is switched off, an audible
warning signal sounds and an error code appears in
the dot matrix display. If it is a critical error, the ‘STOP’
warning light on the dashboard also lights up. Contact 1
an authorised dealer.
To reactivate the steering assistance (Turn Assist),
turn the On/Off switch (1) to ‘OFF’, rectify the error,
and turn the switch back to ‘ON’.
IMPORTANT: To be able to safely operate the
steering aid, drivers should familiarise themselves
with this function before working on the field.
181
3 - 26
REAR PTO
Description
The PTO is engaged and disengaged using a knob
(1) on the right-hand console. The warning light (2)
next to this lights up whenever the PTO is engaged.
182
The shiftable PTO is supplied with a range lever. The
lever is used to select one of the two or three PTO
speed ranges and to provide additional power or
economic viability. The range lever (1) is located at
the rear on the right-hand console.
In conjunction with the shiftable three-speed PTO, a
PTO drive shaft can be provided for all types. As the
name suggests, the PTO drive shaft speed is linked
directly to rotation of the rear wheels and not to
engine speed. A second lever (2) is provided if the
tractor is fitted with a PTO drive shaft.
183
Three drive speed ranges are available and can be

selected using the PTO drive shaft range lever (1).
The lever (2) is used to select the PTO drive shaft.
3 - 27
FITTING EQUIPMENT DRIVEN BY THE PTO
IMPORTANT: Before fitting or removing

equipment or changing the PTO:
● Firmly apply the parking brake.
● Ensure that all gear shift levers are in

Neutral.
● Disengage the PTO (knob at very bottom)

and wait until the PTO and equipment come
to a standstill. Switch off the engine before
leaving the tractor.
Once the engine is switched off, the PTO brake is
released and the shaft can be turned by hand to help
with equipment alignment.
Fit or attach the equipment to the tractor as is
described in 3-POINT POWER LIFT LINKAGE on
see page 3 - 81.
The PTO guard is used to protect equipment driven
by the PTO and increases your level of safety. Do not
modify the guard in any way. A plastic PTO cap (1) is
supplied and should always be fitted on the shaft
whenever the PTO is not being used.
184
A flip-up PTO guard is fitted as standard. Remove the
locking clamp (1) from the dowel pin and slide the
guard upwards to reach the pin. Rotate the guard to
gain access to the PTO. If necessary, a second dowel
pin can be used to secure the guard at 45° .
To connect equipment driven by the PTO to the PTO,
tip the guard up in order to gain access. Remove the
plastic cap from the shaft and store in the tractor's tool
box.
NOTE: Tractors with slider-type, vertically

adjustable drawbars have a removable PTO guard
which is fitted on the slider frame. Refer to 'Slider
frame drawbar' in section 7. 185
3 - 28
Attach the equipment to the PTO shaft ensuring that

the hitch locking pin (3) or the locks of the equipment's
input shaft snap into the groove in the PTO (2). If the
hitch does not feature any locking equipment, link the
hitch to the shaft using a pin. Lower the flip-up guard
and reinsert the locking clamp.
IMPORTANT: Once the attached equipment has

been fitted, use position control to carefully raise
and lower it and check the clearances, the sliding
range of the PTO and articulation. When
connecting up attached equipment, ensure that the
drawbar is set correctly.
186
3 - 29
Precautions for PTO operations
WARNING: When operating equipment

! driven by the PTO, the following precautions
must always be taken:
● Check that the correct PTO speed for the

equipment is set. Follow the instructions in
the equipment manufacturer's operating
manual.
● When using equipment driven by the PTO,

ensure that the PTO guard is fitted.
● Do not wear lose clothing when operating

equipment driven by the PTO.
187
● Before stationary PTO operations, firmly
apply the parking brake, move all gear shift
levers into Neutral and block all four wheels.
● Do not stand near equipment driven by the

PTO and do not clean or adjust these while
the engine is running. Disengage the PTO
(button at very bottom) and wait until the PTO
and equipment come to a standstill. Switch off
the engine before leaving the tractor.
● Once the engine is switched off, the PTO

brake is released and the shaft can be turned
by hand to assist with installing or removing 188
the equipment shaft.
3 - 30
PTO SYSTEM WITH THREE SPEEDS

General information
It is generally the case that equipment driven by the
PTO does not have high power requirements and is
designed to run at a PTO speed of 540 rpm and has a
6-taper plug-in coupling. A PTO shaft speed of 540
rpm is obtained at an engine speed of 1970 rpm.
Equipment with a high power requirement is designed
for a PTO speed of 1000 rpm and has a 21-taper
plug-in coupling. If the 21 --taper shaft is fitted, allow
the engine to idle at 2120 rpm to reach a PTO speed
of 1000 rpm.
Equipment with very lower power requirements can
be operated in another speed range at a lower engine
speed which reduces fuel consumption and engine
wear.
Tractors with a PTO with 3 speeds have the
advantage of being able to operate PTO driven
equipment for low power ratings (540) at a reduced
engine speed by selecting 540E on the lever. Refer
see page 3 - 34 for PTO and engine speeds.
IMPORTANT: Equipment with high power

requirements should be operated with the 1000
rpm PTO (21-taper shaft). Should you need to use
the 6-taper shaft (at 540 rpm) to operate equipment
which has a power requirement of more than 75 hp,
we would seriously recommend fitting the
equipment with a slip clutch so that the PTO and
other tractor components are not damaged.
NOTE: Depending on the work undertaken and

equipment used, change the PTO as is described
under 'Changing PTO' on see page 3 - 40.
3 - 31
Operation
While the engine is running at 1000 rpm, press the
button (1) and raise the collar (3) and button to
engage the PTO. The button will remain raised for as
long as the PTO is engaged, the warning light (2) next
to lights up.
IMPORTANT: In order to protect the PTO from
shock loads, reduce the engine speed to approx.
1000 rpm while the PTO is engaged.
189
Accelerate to reach the engine/PTO speed required.
The PTO speed can be displayed on the central LC
display on the instrument panel (4).
NOTE: The light (2) lights up as soon as the PTO is
engaged. If PTO overspeeding occurs (faster than
630 rpm), the light flashes for 5 seconds and then
lights up continuously. When using the 1000 rpm
shaft, the light may also flash (but can be ignored)
because the PTO speed is above 630 rpm. The
light again flashes at a PTO speed of 1170 rpm and
indicates that the PTO has overspeeded in the
1000 rpm range.
190
Press the knob down firmly to disengage the PTO.

NOTE: Once the engine has been switched
off, the PTO knob (1) must first be reset to be
able to operate the PTO when restarting the
engine. Manually return the knob to its
Off-position (press it), then re-engage the
PTO as is described above.
IMPORTANT: An automatic PTO brake is fitted to
quickly stop the PTO when disengaging. To avoid
overloading the PTO brake, brake the equipment
by reducing the engine speed before the PTO is
disengaged. This is especially important when
working with equipment with high levels of inertia.
Ideally, such equipment should be fitted with an
overrun clutch. To avoid damaging the brake when
operating equipment with high levels of inertia, hold
down the switch (5) to release the brake and simply
allow the equipment to come to a natural rest.
WARNING: Always switch off the PTO after

! use to prevent the equipment from moving
unintentionally.
191
3 - 32
PTO WITH THREE SPEEDS (where fitted)

A 6-taper PTO with a diameter of 34.9 mm is supplied
and is designed for operations at 540 rpm.
Depending on the tractor version, a 21-taper shaft
with a diameter of 34.9 mm, designed for operations
at 1000 rpm, can also be supplied or can be obtained
from your dealer.
Operation
Before engaging the PTO, select a PTO ratio as
follows:
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is fitted with the

optional PTO drive shaft, an additional lever (2) is
fitted. To avoid damaging the PTO driveline, ensure
that the lever (1) is moved all the way up as shown
before the engine driven PTO is operated. (The
front position is for engaging the PTO drive shaft.)
192
With the 6-taper shaft fitted
● When the tractor is stationary and the PTO

actuation knob is in its disengaged position,
use the range lever (1) to select the speed
required. Raise the spring-loaded collar (2)
under the knob and move the lever all the
way up to activate 1000 rpm, move into the
central position for 540 economy and move
all the way down for 540 standard speed.
IMPORTANT: The PTO range lever cannot be
moved before the spring-loaded collar (2) under the
knob has been raised. This fixture was integrated to
prevent the economy range being selected
unintentionally which could result in overspeeding
on equipment driven by the PTO. 193
3 - 33
Operation
NOTE: The range lever for the PTO with 3 speeds

has a Neutral position, identified by the letter 'N'.
The PTO and engine speeds are as follows:
Range Engine rpm PTO speed

lever position (rpm) (rpm)
Lowered all the way 1970 540
(6-taper shaft)
Central position 1546 540
(6-taper shaft)
All the way forward 1145 540
(6-taper shaft) (light operations only)
With the 21-taper shaft fitted:
● When the tractor is stationary and the PTO

actuation knob is in its Off position, use the
range lever (1) to select the speed required.
Raise the spring-loaded collar (2) under the
knob and turn the lever all the way up. A PTO
speed of 1000 rpm is thereby reached at an
engine speed of 2120 rpm.
NOTE: The PTO range lever should always be in

this position when the 21-taper -shaft is fitted.
194
3 - 34
With 6 or 21-taper shaft fitted
IMPORTANT: In order to protect the PTO from

shock loads, reduce the engine speed to approx.
1000 rpm while the PTO is engaged; then use the
foot throttle to increase engine speed to reach the
PTO speed required.
While the engine is running at 1000 rpm or less, press
the button (1) and raise the collar (3) and button to
engage the PTO. The button will remain raised for as
long as the PTO is engaged, the warning light (2) next
to lights up.
Press the PTO actuation knob (1) down to disengage
the PTO.
NOTE: Once the engine has been switched off, the
PTO knob must first be reset to be able to operate
the PTO when restarting the engine. Manually
return the knob to its Off position (press it), then re-
engage the PTO as is described above.
IMPORTANT: Although the PTO can be engaged 195
or disengaged when the tractor is stationary or in
motion, do not try to change the PTO speed range
before the tractor is stationary and the PTO
actuation knob (1) is all the way down
(disengaged).
NOTE: The PTO speed (1) can if necessary
be displayed on the central LC display.
196
3 - 35
NOTE: If overspeeding of the PTO occurs (i.e. running

faster than 630 rpm), the light (2) flashes for 5 seconds
and then lights up continuously. When using the 1000
rpm shaft, the light may also flash (but can be ignored)
because the PTO speed is above 630 rpm. The light
again flashes at a PTO speed of 1170 rpm and
indicates that the PTO has overspeeded in the 1000
rpm range.
197
IMPORTANT: An automatic PTO brake is fitted to
quickly stop the PTO when disengaging. To avoid
overloading the PTO brake, brake the equipment by
reducing the engine speed before the PTO is
disengaged. This is especially important when
working with equipment with high levels of inertia.
Ideally, such equipment should be fitted with an
overrun clutch. To avoid damaging the brake when
operating equipment with high levels of inertia, hold
down the switch (1) to release the brake and simply
allow the equipment to come to a natural rest.

unintentionally.
198
3 - 36
PTO drive shaft (where fitted)

The three-speed PTO drive shaft can, as has already
been described, be supplied for all types in
conjunction with the engine driven, shiftable three-
speed PTO. The PTO drive shaft speed is linked
directly to rotation of the rear wheels and not to
engine speed.
Three speed ranges are available and can be
selected using the PTO range lever (1). There is
another lever (2) for selecting the PTO drive shaft.
To engage the PTO drive shaft:
When the tractor is stationary, pull down the knob to
ensure that the engine PTO is disengaged. Move the
lever (1) to the PTO speed range required and then
use the selector lever (2) to select the PTO drive shaft.
199
Activation of the PTO drive shaft is confirmed by the
'Gpto' indicator in the central LC display.
NOTE: To help to ensure soft engagement of the
PTO drive shaft, press and hold down both brake
pedals while moving the selector lever.
Fully depress the clutch pedal, select a gear and open
the hand throttle to increase the engine speed.
Release the clutch pedal. The movement of the clutch
pedal causes the tractor to move and the PTO (and
attached equipment) to rotate.
200
The speed at which the PTO rotates depends on the
speed at which the rear wheels are rotating. Shaft
revolutions per rear wheel revolution are shown in the
table:
NOTE: If the PTO drive shaft is selected while the
engine PTO function is engaged, the engine PTO
drive is automatically deactivated. To reactivate the
engine PTO drive, move the selector lever into the
engine drive position and then switch the main PTO
switch off and on again.
PTO shaft revolution

Lever position per wheel revolution
Range 540 activated 9.93 : 1
Range 540E activated 12.65 : 1
Range 1000 activated 17.08 : 1
3 - 37
Automatic PTO function (where fitted)

The automatic PTO function allows the rear PTO drive
to be automatically engaged or disengaged when
using the transport/control button (2). The PTO drive
is automatically disengaged by pressing the button for 2
raising the equipment. Lowering the equipment using
the button, re-engages the PTO drive.
The height at which the PTO drive is activated and/or
deactivated can be set by means of the following
process.
IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary

and the PTO drive must be disengaged before
you start this procedure.
201
● Hydraulic master switch ON, switch in bottom

position.
● Press the PTO button (1) and hold it down for
2 seconds. The central display shows 'u'
followed by two numbers, for example 'u38'.
The number 38 stands for the current height of
the linkage.
● Use the knob for position control (nominal

value) or inner external button to raise the
linkage to the point at which the PTO is
disengaged. Briefly press the PTO button (1). 1
The engagement point is displayed. The
central display shows 'd 38' (whereby '38' is
the current height of the linkage).
202
● Use the knob for position control or the inner

external button to lower the linkage until the
lifting required for PTO engagement is
reached. Confirm by pressing the PTO shaft
button (1) once. The central display shows
'End' for two seconds and then returns to the
option selected before setting mode was
called up.
This procedure can be carried out at any time
provided that the tractor is stationary and that the
PTO is disengaged. The new settings remain
available until reprogrammed in the memory.
3 - 38
As has already been described, to activate the

automatic function, engage the PTO and then press
the switch (1) (see fig. 202 ) and hold down for more
than one second. The telltale on the instrument panel
lights up to confirm activation.
The auto light remains lit up when the power lift is
lowered and the PTO engaged. When raising the
equipment, the telltale flashes until the equipment is
lowered and the PTO is re-engaged.
When the auto PTO switch is pressed again, the
function is deactivated and the telltale goes out.
NOTE: The auto PTO function is deactivated
whenever the starter switch is switched off.
NOTE: The PTO management function is only
available at speeds of > 0.5 km/h.
If using electronic draft control, the PTO drive is
disengaged if one or more of the following conditions
are satisfied:
● The tractor is travelling faster than 0.5 km/h

and the power lift is in a raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
● If the power lift is raised and the tractor speed

falls to less than 0.5 km/h or the tractor
remains stationary for more than 10 seconds
with a raised power lift.
● One of the external PTO or power lift buttons

is pressed.
● The PTO is disengaged using the internal or

external button.
● Internal and external buttons for the PTO are

pressed at the same time.
● The PTO drive shaft has been selected.
● The driver leaves the driver's seat with the

auto PTO active for more than 2 minutes and
the power lift is in a raised position.
To reactivate the auto PTO, remedy the error and
reactivate the function as previously described.
NOTE: The auto PTO function is deactivated
whenever the starter switch is switched off.
3 - 39
REPLACING PTO
Use an appropriate tool to force together the circlip (1)
and remove from PTO housing. Carefully take out the
PTO stub.
Once the shaft has been removed, check the O-ring
seal in the PTO housing for damage. Replace the O-
ring if it is worn or damaged.
Carefully clean the replacement PTO stub before
inserting it in the housing. Reinsert the circlip. Ensure
that it snaps correctly into in the PTO housing.
203
Wrap the removed shaft in a clean cloth and place it in

the tool box for protection.
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL PTO CONTROLS (where
fitted)
As an optional extra, a PTO switch (1) can be fitted on
both fenders to assist in aligning the PTO splines with
the equipment and in stationary PTO operations.
With the engine running, briefly press the switch so
that the PTO turns to align the shaft splines. If the
switch is pressed for less than 5 seconds, the shaft
remains stationary when the switch is released.
Press the switch and hold it down for more than 5
seconds. The PTO then functions on a permanent 1
basis. Press the switch again to stop the PTO.
Alternatively, the PTO can also be stopped, as has 204
already been described, using the controls in the cab.
NOTE: The warning lamp on the PTO control

panel lights up when the PTO is engaged
(briefly or permanently).
NOTE: The PTO can be engaged or
disengaged using the fender switches,
regardless of whether the actuation switch in
the cab is On or Off.
NOTE: Pressing the cab and external PTO
controls at the same time (within two seconds)
results in an error code which is displayed in
the central LC display. There is a delay of 10
seconds before PTO operations can
recommence.
3 - 40
NOTE: The soft-start function operates

regardless of whether the PTO is engaged
from the cab or the fender switch.
NOTE: Before leaving the tractor to operate
the external PTO switches:
● Move the gear selector switch into Neutral.
● Disengage the PTO.
● Apply the parking brake.

With the engine running, move the manual throttle
into the lower idling speed position (right at the
rear).
The operator may only use the external PTO switch
(1) if he is standing by the side of the tractor (next
to the rear wheels). To avoid damaging the
equipment or tractor, the internal and external
switches for the PTO should not be pressed at the
same time.
WARNING: Before you use the external

PTO switch, ensure that there are no people
! or objects near the attached equipment, the
3-point power lift linkage or the PTO.
205
Never operate the external switches from these

positions:
● Directly behind the tractor or wheels.
● Between the lower links.
● On or near the equipment.
● When operating the external switch, never
place your arms, legs or other body parts or
objects near the 3 -point linkage, the PTO or
the equipment.
● Never allow the controls to be operated on

the other side by an assistant.
● To move around the tractor or equipment if

you want to use the controls on the other
side,
● never pass between the equipment and

tractor.
3 - 41
FRONT PTO AND HYDRAULIC FRONT POWER LIFT

(where fitted)
The tractors may be fitted with an engine driven PTO
and a hydraulic front power lift. These functions are
available as options and can be fitted in the factory or
installed as accessories by your dealer.
FRONT PTO
The front PTO transfers the engine power via a 6-
taper shaft directly to the front attached equipment.
The PTO rotates anti-clockwise (when viewed from
the front).
NOTE: A 21-taper shaft is available as an
accessory and can be installed by the dealer.
The PTO has a plastic cap (1). Pull the cap to remove
it.
NOTE: When the engine is switched off, the PTO
coupling is released and the shaft can be turned by
hand to simply the process of aligning the
equipment.
The front PTO is activated electro-hydraulically and
this is done using a control button on the right-hand
console. This is similar to the rear PTO.
206
While theengine is running at 1000 rpm or less, press
the control button (2) and raise the collar (3) and knob
to engage the PTO. The button will remain raised for
as long as the PTO is engaged and the warning light
(1) next to it will remain illuminated. Open the manual
throttle lever to increase the engine speed to 2120
rpm and to thereby reach a PTO shaft speed of 1000
rpm. Press the PTO shaft button (2) down to
disengage the PTO.
NOTE: Once the engine has been switched off, the

PTO knob must first be reset to be able to operate
the PTO when restarting the engine. Manually
return the knob to its Off position (press it), then re- 207
engage the PTO as is described above.

unintentionally.
3 - 42
HYDRAULIC FRONT POWER LIFT

(where fitted)
The front power lift (option) consists of an adjustable
top link (1) and a pair of folding lower links (2). The top
and lower links have open claw ends which permit
rapid coupling and uncoupling of equipment. The
claws are fitted with self-locking latches to ensure that
the equipment is securely held on the tractor linkage.
208
Three ball bushes are supplied for installation on the
equipment.
209
Operation
Move the crossgate lever (3) in a longitudinal direction
for remote control valve (green) where there is a lock
in float position and lock in the RAISE position.
= float position
= lower
3
= Neutral
= raise
The green remote control valve is used as standard to

operate the front power lift depending on the number
of valves fitted on the tractor. If necessary, another 210
valve can however be set as standard. Please contact
your authorised dealer
3 - 43
Transport position
When not in use, the top links and lower links should
be fixed in the transport position. Position the top link 1
(1) vertically and secure, fit bolt (2) and secure with 2
spring cotter (3).
3
211
Swivel lower link aroundrotary journal (4). The rotary
journal should only be removed if the lower links have
to be moved. Remove the bottom pin from the lower
links and move the lower links (1) into a vertical
position as shown. Insert the pins in the front holes (3
+2 ) when the holes in the inner and outer links are in
line. Before starting up the tractor ensure that both
pins are locked with bolts.
If the front power lift is not specified, the joystick can
be fitted to operate other equipment, such as front
loaders, spray implements, manure spreaders etc.
212
With the lower links in their transport position, remove
the bolt, pull out the pin (5) and manually lower the link
arm into the operating position, as shown. If
necessary, insert the removed pin in one of the holes
(6) or (7).
When the pin is inserted in the rear hole (6), the lower
link is locked as a rigid unit. When the pin is inserted
in the front hole (7) as shown, the lower link can move
freely up and down (float) in a range of approx. 75
mm. Lock the pin with a bolt.
213
The other lower link is set in the same way. Ensure

that both lower links are set in the same way, i.e. both
locked as a rigid unit or floating.
NOTE: If the lower links are fixed in the float

position, both sides of the equipment can be moved
up and down independently of one another to allow
for operations on uneven surface. The remote
control valve float function also allows the
implement to move up and down on uneven areas
of ground.
3 - 44
Coupling the equipment to the Tractor

Start the engine. Press the button (1) on the left.
Lower the power lift until the lower links are just above
the ground. Position the tractor so that the open claw
ends are below the equipment's hitch pins.
1
Press the button on the right (1) to raise the lower
links until the claw couplers snap onto the ball bushes.
A clicking in action should be heard when the self-
locking latches snap onto the equipment's ball
bushes. The joystick should be returned to Neutral
before the lower links raise the equipment off the
ground.
214
IMPORTANT: Before starting the tractor,
ensure that the unlocking latches (1) are fully
latched into the link ends.
215
Secure the top link to the attached equipment and use
the grab lever (3) to set the correct length by turning.
To prevent the centre piece from turning during
operation, place the locking link (1) above the locking
pin (2). The top link has a similar claw end to the lower
link. Lower the top link claw onto the equipment's
upper ball bush and press down until the interlock can
be heard to snap into place.
If equipped accordingly, the equipment supports can
now be removed or drawn in and the equipment can
be supported on the front linkage.
216
3 - 45
The top link is connected to the bracket by means of

the pin (1) and secured with the splint (2). The top link
bracket has two holes to fix the top link. Use the top 3
hole (3) for maximum lifting force. Use the lower hole
as shown to achieve the maximum equipment height
when raising.
217
Lifting limitation is controlled by a knob (1) on the
right-hand console. Turn all the way clockwise to
reach the maximum lifting height. Turn all the way
anti-clockwise to reach the minimum lifting height.
NOTE: Changes to the assignment of
activation to the control valve can be
undertaken at any time. Please contact your
authorised Case dealer.
1
218
Decoupling the equipment from the tractor

Lower the equipment to the ground using the button
on the multicontroller. Ensure that it cannot fall when
decoupled from the front power lift. Use equipment
supports (where fitted).
Pull back the lever on the top link to release the claw
of the equipment's top hitch pin.
Fully withdraw the ring (1) on the two lower links. The
lever then snaps in (with the latch retracted) as in the
position shown. The links of the ball bushes can
thereby fit onto the equipment's lower hitch pins
whenever the links are fully lowered.
Use the joystick to fully lower the lower links and move
the tractor back from the equipment.
219
3 - 46
ELECTRONIC FRONT POWER LIFT CONTROL EFH (where fitted)

The option of electronically controlling the front power
lift ensures that the locating pressure of the
equipment attached (e.g. mowers) can be adjusted.
Once the engine has been started and the hydraulic
master has been activated (by pressing downwards),
the system is ready.
Approval for EFH
1. The red telltale (5) goes out when the button (9)
is pressed at the top for RAISE or the bottom
for CONTROL
.
2. Pressing the button (9) for
RAISE or CONTROL again activates the
power lift.
220
1. SWITCH for Selection of functions
AUTO-TRANSPORT at top
RAISE at bottom
2. PUSH BUTTON FOR FRONT POWER LIFT
ACTUATION
This pushbutton functions in parallel with external
activation of the front power lift. If the button is
released, the front power lift remains stationary for a
moment.
2 1
221
3. TELLTALE (green)
3 4
4. POTENTIOMETER FOR
LOWERING THROTTLE 5
The lowering speed of the front power lift is set using
the knob.
Right-hand position = max. lowering speed
5. DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY (red)
222
3 - 47
6. NOMINAL VALUE POTENTIOMETER

The nominal value potentiometer is used to set relief
in pressure control mode and to set the position in
positioning mode.
7. POTENTIOMETER FOR
LIFTING LIMITATION
The transport height of the front power lift is set using
a knob. (Right-hand position = maximum transport
height)
8 7 6
223
8. PRESSURE/MIXED/POSITION CONTROL
POTENTIOMETER
Left-hand pos. =100% pressure control
Right-hand pos. =100% position control
When positioned all the way to the right, the front
power lift moves precisely in line with the rotary
setting on the rotary nominal value switch.
9. BUTTON RAISE/CONTROL
Raise
2 functions depending on AUTO
TRANSPORT/RAISE switch (1) on right-hand control
panel.
1a.Press switch (1) RAISE position, button at top,
front power lift raises for as long as the
button is pressed (> 100 ms).
224
1b.If the RAISE button is just pressed briefly
(< 100 ms), the front power lift is raised,
but as soon as the RAISE button is released, it
changes to control mode
2. Press switch (1) AUTO position, button at bottom,
front power lift is automatically raised to the
set lift limitation (transport position).
225
3 - 48
Control
PRESSURE CONTROL
Front power lift lowers to the set pressure level and/or
relief value.
If the control button is pressed for longer, the front
power lift moves into its rapid retraction function
(faster lowering when travelling over obstacles/knolls).
POSITION CONTROL
The front power lift lowers to the set nominal value
when the potentiometer for pressure / combined /
position control (8) is in the position control setting
(right-hand position =100% position control).
226
NOTE: If the CONTROL button (9) is pressed and
there is no equipment on the front power lift, the
front power lift can only be lowered if the
potentiometer for pressure/combined/position
control is in the right-hand position (100%
position control).
227
Ride control:
Ride control is active when the front power lift is in its
top limit position (transport position). This is set using
the potentiometer for lifting limitation.
When using 100% position control, ride control is not
active.
Calibrating:
The nominal value is calibrated to the equipment
weight and must be undertaken whenever the
equipment is changed.
3 - 49
Calibration process
Vehicle stationary. To calibrate use the button (9) to
raise the equipment until the equipment is suspended
just above the ground. Use the potentiometer (7) for
lifting limitation to fix this position. Press the button (9)
again (for at least 10 seconds) until the diagnosis LED
(5) flashes evenly. Once the flashing has stopped, the
new calibration value has been saved.
228
Mobile application
3
As soon as the rotary nominal value switch (6) is
turned from position 0, the green telltale (3) on the 5
multi-controller lights up. Pressure control (relief) is
active. If the green telltale does not light up, no
calibration value has been saved (equipment weight
too low).
Raise - control
These settings are made in the motion application
using the (9) RAISE/CONTROL button. 7 6
Position/pressure control
Possibility for adjusting between position and 229
pressure control in a continuously variable manner.
Combination of position and pressure control.
The following setting applies for combined operations:
a) Speed range 0-5 is used to set the control
sensitivity (0=max. control sensitivity) with pure
pressure control (relief). Here, there is no combination
with position control.
b) Speed range 5-10 permits a combination of
pressure and position control whereby a position
share of 0% - 100% can be combined (10 = 100%
position control).
3 - 50
STOP function
The power lift stops when the button is pressed at the
top “RAISE” (9) or at the bottom “CONTROL”
immediately after the button has been pressed at the
top “RAISE” (9).
The power lift stops when the button is pressed at the
top “RAISE” (9) or at the bottom “CONTROL”
immediately after the button has been pressed at the
top “RAISE” (9).
CONNECTION and. DISCONNECTION of attached
equipment
IMPORTANT: Only undertake this process

using the external buttons near the front
power lift or using the pushbutton for front
power lift actuation (2) inside the cab.
Do not use the RAISE/CONTROL button (9)!
Error diagnosis
Errors are displayed via the diagnosis LED (5). The
errors are displayed using different flash signals.
Example of a setting available during operations, e.g.
mowing.
1. Calibrate implement weight.
2. Set control sensitivity (8), pos. 0
3. Open lowering restrictor (4), pos. 4 - 7
4. Set lifting limitation (7) as required.
5. Press the CONTROL button (9) and set pressure
relief using the nominal value switch (6), pos. 3 - 5.
6.The mower should be raised using the RAISE
button (9) (max. to the lifting limitation set).
Perfect mowing results can be obtained from setting
the pressure relief and control sensitivity according to
the terrain and road speed.
IMPORTANT: To couple and decouple the

equipment, the button for front power lift
activation (2) or the external buttons should
be used. To allow for precise coupling and
decoupling, the power lift initially raises or
lowers at a delayed speed.
3 - 51
ELECTRONIC POWER LIFT CONTROL (EDC)

The system described below is known as electronic
power lift control. The electronically controlled
hydraulic system records changes in draft resistance
using sensors in the lower link pins of the three-point
linkage and changes in the power lift position using a
sensor on the cross shaft. The system functions as
position and draft control.
Position control allows for accurate monitoring of
equipment, such as sprayers, rakes, mowers, etc. that
operate above the ground. As soon as the equipment
height is set, the system retains the position selected,
regardless of any external forces.
Draft control is intended for attached or semi-
mounted equipment operating in the ground.
Changes to the ground resistance results in the draft
on the equipment increasing or decreasing.
Operation
Function in terms of draft control
Draft control controls the operating depth in the
ground by keeping the draft resistance constant. If the 7
indicator on the knob for position control (7) is set to a
value just below the normal working depth of draft
control, this prevents the equipment from sagging on
looser or light ground.
230
Position control takes precedence over draft control if
the knob is turned to beyond the working depth set on
the wheel for draft control (9). Therefore, position
control can be used to lift the attached equipment out
of the ground, from the working depth set with draft
control, without changing the draft control setting.
This function is useful when gradual raising is needed.
The adjustable stop can be set so that position control
can be returned quickly to the working depth limitation
just below the presented draft control working depth.
9
231
3 - 52
The transport/control (3) button is usually used to

raise and lower the attached equipment during work.
232
Controlconsole
The hydraulic master (1) can be used to activate or
deactivate the power supply for all remote control
valves and EDC actuations. .
Switch positions:
top = remote control valves operating
centre= EDC and remote control valves 1

not operating
bottom= EDC and remote control valves
operating
IMPORTANT: To avoid unintentional activation 233

of the power lift or the electrical remote
control valves, the power supply must always
be switched off when travelling on roads.
The stop button (2) is a safety element which can e.g.
be pressed in an emergency situation. If the stop
button is pressed, all EDC functions are interrupted
and the red telltale on the control panel lights up. To
continue work, the EDC must be reactivated.
234
3 - 53
The RAISE / LOWER button (3) is used to activate

the EDC system and/or for alternating between power
lift raising and lowering.
3
Activate - The EDC is activated by pressing the
button (3). The red telltale on the right-hand
control panel goes out. If the tractor was
switched off in "Control" mode, the power lift
4
moves into its upper limit stop (to the lifting
limitation set). If the tractor was switched off in
"Transport" mode, the power lift moves into its
lower limit position (setting made using knob for
position control).
Raise/lower - By alternately pressing the button
(3), the power lift is raised from its working 235
position into the transport position (only raised
up to the height of the set lifting limitation, speed
of lifting cannot be set) or the power lift is
lowered from the transport position into the
working position (corresponding to setting for
position control).
NOTE: The speed of lowering can be set in a
continuously variable manner.
If the power lift is in its transport position, the telltale
(4) lights up.
3 - 54
Rapid retraction (5) can only be activated by pressing

the button for lowering. When rapid retraction is
activated, the setting for the speed of lowering is
bypassed and lowering at maximum speed becomes
possible.
5
If the pushbutton is held in the rapid retraction
position, the power lift overrides the lower setting of
the nominal value wheel. Once the pushbutton is
released, the power lift returns to the operating depth
set. This function allows the set operating depth to be
reached must faster.
236
The knob for position control (7), when working with
position control, is used to set the working height and, 7
when working with draft control, is used to set the
maximum working depth. A fixed working depth or 8
working height can be set using the adjustable stop
(6) in conjunction with position control.
6
The pushbutton for power lift activation (8) functions in
parallel with rear activation and can be used to
raise/lower the power lift. This may prove very useful
for minor adjustments if equipment is connected to the
power lift linkage (slowed speed). To raise the power
lift, push the pushbutton upwards and to lower it, push
the button downwards. Once this pushbutton has
been pressed, the EDC system has to be reactivated. 237
NOTE: Sensing time = power lift stroke

The draft load wheel (9) determines the draft
resistance and therefore the equipment’s working
depth by specifying a load to the draft control load
measuring pin. If you turn this all the way to the right,
you set it to the maximum loading and therefore the
equipment's maximum working depth.
238
3 - 55
EDC – control panel

The knob for control sensitivity (12) is used to make
system activation more or less sensitive to changes
in draft resistance. Maximum sensitivity is obtained
by rotating the control fully clockwise.
You can use the lowering speed controller (11) to
control the speed at which the power lift is lowered
during a lowering operation. In position 1 (tortoise
symbol), the lowest speed of lowering is set and in
position 10, the highest.
You can use the rotary controller for lifting height
limitation (10) to set the maximum lifting height to 10 11 12 13
which the three-point linkage can be raised. Set this
rotary controller so that the tractor is not damaged 239
when fully raising very large attached equipment.
The rotary controller for wheel slip limitation (13) is
only available on tractors which are fitted with the
radar sensor (available as optional extra). You can
use this controller to set the wheel slip threshold
value at which the attached equipment is raised until
the wheel slip returns to the nominal value.
Telltales
The error warning light (16) has two tasks:
14 15
– As a flashing light, it indicates a malfunction in the
system's power circuits. This will be accompanied by
the power lift error symbol appearing in the dot matrix
display.
– By lighting up continuously, it indicates the 'Power 16
lift off' status. The 'Power lift off' warning is also
displayed on the dot matrix display by means of the
power lift symbol.
Telltales (14) and (17) light up whenever you raise and 17
lower the equipment using the control lever for
position control or whenever you correct the
equipment position during work. The lower telltale 240
(17) lights up when the three-point linkage is being
lowered. The upper telltale (14) lights up when the
three-point linkage is being raised.
The telltale for wheel slip limitation ‘On’ (15) lights up
when slip control is activated.
3 - 56
Power lift position display

The digital display on the instrument panel indicates
the position of the lower links on a scale of 0 to 100. A
display showing “0” indicates that the links are fully
lowered. “100” indicates that they are fully raised. Use
the enhanced keypad to select the display.
241
Error warning light

Should an unexpected EDC error occur, the error
warning light (1) will flash (Figure 240). The warning
light flashes at the same time as the power lift symbol
(1) and the error code (2) appear on the dot matrix
display.
The error code indicates the power circuit and sensor
affected as well as the type of malfunction, e. g. short
circuit, power circuit interrupted, sensor failure etc. In
such cases, your authorised dealer must check the
tractor.
If the error warning light is continuously lit up, this
indicates 'Power lift not activated'’.
The ‘Power lift not activated’ warning appears in the 242
following scenarios:
● The knob for position control has been

pressed when the engine is off.
● A rear operations switch for raising or

lowering the three-point linkage has been
pressed. Refer to ‘External hydraulic power
lift control’ on page 3 - 64.
3 - 57
PRE-OPERATION SETTINGS
Fit the equipment to the 3-point power lift linkage.
Turn the draft control wheel (9) anticlockwise as far as
it will go to the position control setting.
Start the engine and use the knob for position control
(7) to gradually raise the attached equipment. Ensure
that there is always a gap of at least 100 mm between
the attached equipment and all points on the tractor.
Look at the digital display on the dashboard. If the
value displayed is less than ‘100’, this means that the
equipment is not fully raised. 9 10 11
243
Set the rotary controller for lifting height limitation (10)
so that the three-point linkage cannot be raised any 7
further if the tractor has been damaged by the
attached equipment at the full lifting height.
When the fast raise/lower switch or the position
control knob is used to raise the implement, it will only
raise to the height set by the height limit control, as
determined in the previous step.
Use the lowering speed rotary controller (11) to match
the speed of lowering to the size and weight of the
attached equipment. Turn the rotary controller
clockwise to increase the speed of lowering or
anticlockwise to reduce the speed of lowering.
244
IMPORTANT: Set the rotary lowering speed

controller to slow lowering before first using
the attached equipment (tortoise symbol).
When the fast raise/lower switch is used to lower the
implement, it will lower at a controlled rate as
determined in the previous step.
3 - 58
OPERATING WITH DRAFT CONTROL

In order to operate the tractor with draft control,
various controls must be set to adapt operations to
the equipment and field conditions.
The draft control wheel (9) specifies the equipment's
working depth by setting the force required on the
draft sensing pins. Move the wheel into its central
position 5 before starting any work.
The setting on the draft loading sensitivity wheel (12)
specifies system sensitivity. Move the button into its
central position before driving onto the field.
9 12
245
Then drive the tractor onto the field and lower the
equipment into its working position by pressing the
transport/control button and turn the position control 7
knob (7) to the left. Use position control to set the
maximum working depth to prevent the equipment
from sagging on areas of soft ground. Use the draft
control wheel (9) to set the equipment working depth 6
required.
Turn the controllable stop (6) without changing the
position control until it clicks and the indicator is in line
with the indicator on the position control knob. If
position control is adjusted after this, it can be quickly
returned to the original position by rotating until it is felt
to 'click' and the pointer re-aligns with the adjustable 246
stop.
Note how the implement is pulled through the ground
and use the rotary controller (12) to set the activation
sensitivity for draft control until the lowering and
raising movements triggered to correct changes in
ground resistance are satisfactory. Once set, the
tractor’s hydraulic system will automatically adjust the
equipment’s working depth to maintain an even pull
(draft load) on the tractor.
3 - 59
You will find the perfect setting by observing the power

lift telltales (14) and (17). The upper telltale (14) lights 14
up each time the system raises the equipment to
correct the level of draft loading required. The lower
telltale (17) lights up when the attached equipment is
lowered.
17
247
Turn the rotary controller for draft control activation
sensitivity (12) slowly to the right. The system now
responds with shorter, faster movements which can
be seen by the flickering of both telltales. Turn the
knob out of this position and slightly anticlockwise until
one of the telltales flashes every 2 to 3 seconds (or as
appropriate for the ground circumstances).
Once the required working conditions have been
established, there is no need to rotate the position
control knob again until the work in hand is
completed. 9 12
248
When you reach the end of the field, briefly press the
transport/control button (3) to raise the attached
equipment to the height set for the lifting height
limitation on the rotary controller. Once you have 3
turned, press the button (3) again.
249
For example, after turning on narrow headlands, you
may need to pull the equipment into the ground
quickly. Press the button (5) for rapid retraction.
250
3 - 60
Wheel slip limitation

The rotary controller for wheel slip limitation (13) is
only available on tractors which are fitted with the
radar sensor (available as optional extra). You can use
this controller to set the wheel slip threshold value at
which the attached equipment is raised until the wheel
slip returns to the nominal value. The system then
overrides the normal signals for draft and position
control. Be careful not to set too low or too high a
wheel slip limitation. Setting the slip limit to a very low
level, unobtainable in wet conditions, may have a
detrimental effect on the work rate/depth.
13
251
The telltale for wheel slip limitation ‘On’ (15) lights up
whenever slip control is activated and the equipment
is raised to re-establish the preselected slip rate.
15
252
OPERATING WITH POSITION CONTROL

To use position control, the wheel of the draft control
wheel (9) should be turned as far to the right as
possible.
253
3 - 61
Use the knob for position control (7) to raise or lower

the three-point linkage. The attached equipment is 7
then raised to the height which you have preset using
the rotary controller for lifting height limitation.
NOTE: The speed of lifting is adapted

automatically. If the lever for position control is 6
moved quickly, the lower links are moved quickly.
When the links approach the position which was set
by the lever for position control, the equipment
slows down.
When the requested equipment working height is
reached, turn the controllable stop (6) until you feel it
click and the indicator is in line with the indicator on 254
the knob for position control (7). Whenever the
equipment’s working height is subsequently changed,
it can be quickly returned to its initial setting by
rotating the position control knob until it is felt to 'click'
and its indicator is again in line with the adjustable
stop.
To raise the attached equipment at headlands, press

the transport/control button (3). The equipment is then
raised to the position preselected on the rotary
controller for lifting height limitation. Once you have 3
turned, press the button (3) again. The attached
equipment is then lowered to the height previously
selected using the knob for position control (7).
255
TRANSPORT LOCK
Turn the lowering speed rotary controller (11) all the
way to the left into its transport lock position when
transporting attached equipment. This will prevent the
attached equipment from accidentally lowering and
damaging the road surface.
10 11 12
256
3 - 62
RIDE CONTROL
When transporting equipment at high speed, nose-
down vibrations from the trailed equipment may
restrict the vehicle's steering ability. Once ride control
has been activated, the hydraulics respond with an
immediate counteraction to the front wheels impacting
on uneven surfaces and the front of the tractor being
raised. This minimises the nose-down vibrations of
the attached equipment and produces smooth travel.
Turn the knob for controlling draft loading sensitivity
(12) all the way to the left to activate ride control.
Then press the transport/control button (3) to raise the
attached equipment into the height set for lifting height
limitation (10).
Turn the lowering speed rotary controller (11) all the
way to the left into its transport lock position (padlock
symbol).
10 11 12
257
The ride control function only operates at speeds of
more than 8 km/h. If the tractor speed exceeds 8
km/h, the equipment falls 4 - 5 points (as is shown on
the instrument panel) while the hydraulics undertake 3
corrections to compensate for equipment seesawing.
If the tractor speed falls below 8 km/h, the equipment
is again raised to the height set by the knob for the
lifting limitation and the ride control function is
deactivated.
258
3 - 63
EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC POWER LIFT

OPERATION (where fitted)
An external button (1) for raising (top) and lowering
(bottom) can be found on both rear fenders.
WARNING: When actuating external

controls of the hydraulic power lift, do not
! stand on the equipment, near it or between
the equipment and tractor.
1
259
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
button:
● Move the gear selector switch into Neutral.
● Disengage the PTO.
● Apply the parking brake.
With the engine running, move the manual throttle
into the lower idling speed position (right at the
rear).
WARNING: Before you use the external

hydraulic power lift switch, ensure that there
! are no people or objects near the equipment
or power lift linkage. 260
Never operate the external switch while standing:

● Directly behind the tractor or
wheels.
● Between the lower links.
● On or near the equipment.
WARNING: When operating the external

switch, never place arms, legs or other parts
! your body or objects near the power lift
linkage or equipment.
Never allow the controls to be operated on the other

side by an assistant. To move around the tractor or
equipment if you want to use the controls on the other
side, never pass between the equipment and tractor.
3 - 64
The operator may only use the external switch if he is

standing by the side of the tractor (next to the rear
wheels).
Pressing the upper part of the toggle switch (1) slowly
raises the 3-point power lift linkage. Pressing the
lower part lowers the linkage. Once the lower links are
aligned to the equipment, release the switch and
attach the equipment as normal to the 3-point power
lift linkage.
To operate the power lift, go back to the nominal value
wheel and turn this wheel all the way to the right and
then slowly back to the left. The power lift unlocked
symbol is displayed on the dashboard. This indicates
that the 3-point power lift linkage is again being
controlled from the nominal value adjustment wheel. 1
261
IMPORTANT: If control of the power lift has been

returned to the nominal value wheel, the attached
equipment can be raised fully and the rear of the
cab may be damaged in the process. The operator
should bear this in mind and remember to stop
raising before the maximum lifting height is
reached. Set the knob for lifting limitation as is
described in the 'Operating with position control'
section.
3 - 65
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
WARNING: Upon escaping, pressurised

hydraulic oil may penetrate the skin and
! cause serious injuries. If oil penetrates the
skin, get medical assistance straight away
otherwise gangrene may set in.
● Do not try to feel for leaks with your hand.

Use a piece of card or paper.
● Switch off the engine and relieve the system's

pressure before connecting or disconnecting
any lines.
● Tighten all connections before starting the

engine or pressurising any lines.
Hydraulic remote control valves can be supplied to
operate external hydraulic cylinders and motors etc.
All types have two standard valves which are installed
on the rear of the tractor next to the top link.
In tractors with four valves, valves 1 and 2 can be
controlled using a lever of a 4-way joystick situated to
the right of the driver's seat.
Each control lever is coloured according to the
coloured markings on the corresponding remote
control valve.
NOTE: Do not hold the joystick/control lever in the
extension or retraction position as soon as the
external cylinder has reached the stroke end,
otherwise the pressure relief valve will open. If oil is
forced through the pressure relief valve for long
periods of time, the oil will overheat and errors may
occur on parts of the hydraulics and driveline.
Plug-in couplings for auxiliary control valves
Each remote control valve has one pair of rapid
release 1/2-inch plug-in couplings. They are self-
sealing and self-locking, but allow the hoses on the
external cylinders to be released if the equipment is
to be decoupled from the tractor. The plug-in
coupling for raise (1) can be found at the bottom on
the left-hand side and the plug-in coupling for lower
(2) on the right-hand side.
The folding covers have a colour marking (black,
brown and green) which corresponds to the control
lever in the cab.
262
3 - 66
Connecting external cylinders
WARNING: Before connecting or

disconnecting hydraulic lines to/from external
cylinders, switch off the engine and relieve
the circuit by moving the control lever and/or
joystick for the remote control valves all the
way forwards into the float position and then
relieve by moving back into the Neutral
position. Never work or stand under raised
attached equipment which is close to other
items because the equipment may lower
suddenly if the system pressure is relieved.
WARNING: Ensure that the equipment is

securely supported before disconnecting
cylinders or equipment.
To connect an external cylinder, raise the fold-up

cover (1) until it snaps into its raised position, insert
the supply and/or return hose through the slot in the
dust cover and ensure that it is seated correctly in
the coupler. Ensure that the hose or hoses have
sufficient clearance for the tractor or equipment to
turn in both directions.
IMPORTANT: Before connecting up the hoses to

the external cylinder, switch off the engine and
thoroughly clean the connections to avoid
contaminating the oil.
263
In order to balance the pressure in the hose and in the

tractor's plug-in couplings, start the engine and move
the joystick/control lever for the valve into its float
position and then back into Neutral. To remove the
hose, grip the hose a little way off the plug-in coupling,
slide it forwards into the coupling and then pull it
rapidly to disconnect it from the coupling. Close the
fold-up cover to protect the valve.
3 - 67
WARNING: Never work under equipment

which is supported by means of a hydraulic
fixture because the equipment may lower
suddenly if the control is pressed (even if the
engine is off) or the hose has a defect.
Always use a secure support for equipment
which has to be held in a raised position for
maintenance work.
NOTE: The external cylinders are operated with oil

from the tractor's hydraulic system. The oil level in
the hydraulic system should therefore be checked
and topped up at all times once cylinder equipment
has been fitted and briefly operated. Operating the
tractor with a low oil level can lead to damage to the
rear axle and the gearbox parts.
When filling up the rear axle to cover the oil
requirements of the external cylinders, do not add
more than 20 litres to bring the oil level up to the full
mark on the dipstick.
External cylinders with a total oil fill of up to 18
litres can however be connected to the tractor's
hydraulic system without the oil having to be topped
up provided that the tractor is operated on level
ground.
3 - 68
Operating dual action cylinders

Connect the supply hose (1) between the end of the
piston of one dual action cylinder and the left plug-in
coupling on the remote control valve. Connect the
hose (2) between the right plug-in coupling on the
same valve and rod end of the cylinder. To extend a
dual action cylinder, move the joystick or control
lever into the extend position (raise).
To retract a dual action cylinder, move the joystick or
control lever into the retract position (lower).
264
Operating single action cylinders
Connect the hose (1) of a single action cylinder to
the left plug-in coupling (2) on the remote control
valve.
To extend a single action, move the joystick or
control lever into the extend position (raise).
Return the joystick or control lever manually into
Neutral to stop the cylinder before it is fully
extended. Alternatively, allow the valve to
automatically return to Neutral once the cylinder has
reached the stroke end.
To retract a single action cylinder, move the joystick 265
or control lever beyond the retract position (lower)
and into the float position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the float position to

retract a single action cylinder. The retract
position is only for dual action cylinders.
NOTE: If a single action cylinder is decoupled
when extended while a load is being
supported, the hose can be reconnected to
the remote control valve. It does not however
function until the pressure level has dropped.
Proceed as follows:
● Connect the hose as described above.

Start the engine and briefly subject the cylinder to
pressure by moving the joystick or control lever
for the remote control valve into the extend
position and then immediately into the float
position (F) to retract the cylinder and lower the
attached equipment.
3 - 69
Operating hydraulic equipment with

continuous throughflow
Attached equipment with continuous throughflow
(e.g. hydraulic motors) should be connected to the
plug-in coupling of a remote control valve whereby
the supply hose (2) must be connected to the right
plug-in coupling and the return hose (1) to the left
plug-in coupling of the same remote control valve.
The motor is at rest when the joystick or control
lever of the remote control valve is in its float
position. If the joystick or control lever is moved into
the retract position (lower), the hydraulic motor runs.
266
IMPORTANT: Move the joystick or control

lever into the float position (F) to stop the
engine. The motor then slowly comes to a
natural rest and doesn't stop abruptly which
could cause damage to the motor seals as a
result of the build up of pressure in internal
lines.
Note the following points to protect the tractor and
equipment:
● Do not open bypass valves in the
equipment or motor. Use the flow control
valve to control the throughflow volume or
speed of the motor. 1
● To achieve optimum cooling of the hydraulic
oil and to prevent overheating, operate
equipment with a permanent throughflow in
the maximum throughflow setting (using the
flow control valve (1)) and at the lowest
engine speed at which the machine output
and -speed required can be obtained.
267
● Should hydraulic motors run in continuous

mode, we would recommend installing a
temperature indicator (where fitted) in the
remote control valve circuit. If overheating
occurs, stop the hydraulic motor until the oil
has cooled down. Ensure that the maximum
throughflow and minimum motor speed for
the machine output are set.
If temperatures remain high under normal operating
conditions, an oil cooler should be installed in the
motor's return circuit. The recommended maximum
operating temperature for oil is 110° C. Your
authorised dealer can provide you with a suitable oil
cooler and the parts required or can undertake
installation for you.
3 - 70
Using several remote control valves or remote

control valves and a power lift at the same time
NOTE: The hydraulic load sensing system in
your tractor controls the oil flow, according to
the individual settings of the flow controller, up
to the maximum possible output, depending
on engine speed. The flow of oil in the circuits
of the remote control valves is relatively
constant when flow control valves are used to
control the throughflow. This results in a
constant operating speed for the hydraulic
motors etc. even if the tractor's engine speed
varies. Keep the engine speed above the
minimum speed which is required to
simultaneously operate all the circuits needed
and vary the road speed by selecting the
appropriate ratio.
When operating two or more remote control valves at
the same time or operating remote control valves and
the hydraulic power lift, all throughput control valves
should be set so that they output a partial flow. If they
are not set in this manner, the total flow available can
be diverted to the full flow circuit if the pressure level in
this circuit is lower than that in the other circuits used.
Venting the external cylinders
When connecting up a cylinder with entrained air, i.e.
a new cylinder or a cylinder which has been out of
service or which has had its hoses removed, the
cylinder must be vented to remove the air.
Connect the hoses and use the plug-in couplings of
the remote control valves on the rear of the tractor to
position the cylinder so that the hose end is pointing
upwards. Use the joystick or control lever of the
remote control valves to retract or extend the cylinder
7 or 8 times.
Check the rear axle oil level before and after operating
an external cylinder.
3 - 71
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

Hydraulic master for remote control valves
The remote control valves cannot be operated until
the system has been supplied with power by the
hydraulic master (1). Press the lower or upper part of
the switch to activate the circuit. The remote control
valves are now always operational when the tractor
engine is running.
IMPORTANT: The hydraulic master can be

used to immediately stop operation of the rear
remote control valves. To do this bring the 1
switch into the mid position.
268
Actuation for a front loader (if fitted)
To operate the front loader, your vehicle is also
equipped with 2 buttons on the crossgate lever.
269
Control levers
TOGGLE SWITCH ON MULTI-CONTROLLER II
1
The toggle switch (1) on multi-controller II is assigned 2
to the remote control valve by the colour BLUE.
If the toggle switch is moved to the right, the
implement cylinder is extended.
If the toggle switch is moved to the left, the implement
cylinder is retracted.
If the toggle switch (1) is activated at the same time as
selecting the LOWER position and actuating the
button (2) (on the rear of multi-controller II), the blue
remote control valve can be shifted into its float
position.
If you leave the float position by activating the rocker
switch (1) LIFT or LOWER, the float position is 270
deactivated and the remote valve switches to the
neutral position.
This remote control valve can be used to operate an
additional oil motor.
3 - 72
TIME POTENTIOMETER
Activate the timer menu:
1. Using the Shift key on multi-controller II (2)

and the potentiometer (1) for flow volume
control.
1
2. By double-clicking on the control element of a
remote control valve.
All timers are locked when restarting the vehicle.
If the timer menu is activated, the timers can be
reactivated when the vehicle is stationary. Turn the
potentiometer to zero and then set the new value.
271
If the timer menu has been activated, the timers can
be activated or deactivated by double-clicking on the
2
control element of a remote control valve.
If the timer is running, the remote control valve can be
stopped again by briefly pressing the control element
(EMERGENCY STOP function).
Time setting for remote control valves:
The time can be set using the monitor, either by
pressing the button (2) and at the same time pressing
the rotary knob (1) or by double-clicking on any
remote control valve. The screen window opens
automatically. The time interval can be set in a
continuously variable manner to between 0 - 15, as 272
well as 20, 25, 30, 35 and ∞ seconds. The remote
control valve remains activated for the specified time,
e.g.: to set the time period required for turning a
plough. The value set can be read off the DM display.
NOTE: Each time the vehicle is restarted, a

value already set on the time potentiometer
must be reactivated. Set the time
potentiometer to 0 and then set the value
required or activate the screen (by double-
clicking on a remote control valve, or the Shift
key and potentiometer, or process menu),
then the timer can be activated and
deactivated by double-clicking on the remote
control valve needed without having to turn
the potentiometer.
NOTE: The timer functions cannot be
transferred to the field end management
(HMC).
3 - 73
Defining priority for the remote control valve

A priority remote control valve with oil flow always
takes priority over the other remote control valves with
a hydraulic oil flow. Regardless of the amount of oil
flow needed by the other remote control valves, the
output of the priority valve remains constant at all
times.
If equipment need several remote control valves,
under certain circumstances, if may be important for
you to determine one priority remote valve with oil
flow, i.e. to ensure a constant flow of oil to one
hydraulic motor.
With electro-hydraulic remote control valves, the
driver can select a remote control valve as the priority
valve.
● Move the ignition key into the ON position,

and hold down the menu/enter key (2) until
firstly Setup and then CAL appear in the
centre LCD display.
273
● At the same time press the remote control
valves button (1). “Pehr” appears on central
LCD display and after a few seconds changes
to Ehrx (x= number of the priority valve).
NOTE: If a dash (- ) appears in the display, no
priorities are set for the remote control valves.
● By pressing the remote control valve button

(1), you can select the valve for which you
want to define a priority. You can run through
the valve numbers by repeatedly pressing
this button.
274
● When the valve number you want appears on

the display, press the close/abort button (3) to
exit setting mode and return to the previous
display. The priority remote control valve is
now saved.
3 - 74
CROSSGATE LEVER
5
Move the selector lever (4) in a longitudinal direction
for remote control valve (green) where there is a lock
in the float position and in the RAISE position.
Selector lever (4) can be moved in a transverse
direction for remote control valve (yellow). 4
The remote control valve is shifted into its float
position by pressing the shift key on multi-controller
II and at the same time fully articulating to lower. Exit
the float position by pressing the RAISE or LOWER
selector lever (4) from Neutral.
There are 2 buttons (5) on the selector lever for
additional front loader operations (if fitted). 275
SELECTOR LEVER
Selector lever (6) for remote control valve (black)
where there is a float position and lock in the RAISE
position, e.g. for oil pressure motor.
= float position
6
= lower
= Neutral
= raise
276
During oil motor operations, the switch (7) must be
moved into its ON position. Position (N) on the
selector lever (6) then becomes the float position. The
advantage of this function is that it prevents peaks in
pressure when shutting down the oil motor, thereby
avoiding hydraulic component defects.
IMPORTANT: During oil motor operations, the

switch (7) MUST be moved into the ON 7
position.
NOTE: For reasons associated with safety,
each time the vehicle is shut down, the ON
function of switch (7) must be reset which
means that position N on the selector lever (6) 277
actually reverts to a neutral function. Each
time the vehicle is restarted during oil motor
operations, the switch (7) must therefore be
switched off and on again.
3 - 75
Visual indicators
Press the remote control valve button on the keypad.
The following information appears in the dot matrix
display for every valve:
1. The current oil flow from the valve. The shaded

area shows the oil flow as a percentage. This
changes as the flow increases or decreases.
2. The maximum throughput volume (%) which
has been set by the operator. The arrows for
extension/retraction show the maximum flow
setting.
3. The number of the remote control valve
currently operating.
4. The direction of the cylinder movement; extend
(raise) or retract (lower). The direction of the
cylinder movement is shown by the arrow.
Setting of maximum flow volume 278
Raise
If knob 1 is turned fully anti-clockwise, 0 l/min
hydraulic oil is available for the consumer. If the
knob is turned fully clockwise, this results in the
maximum hydraulic oil for the consumer.
279
Lower
The maximum flow volume of each remote control
valve can be set using the menu keys on the
enhanced keypad.
The starter switch must be switched ON to set the
remote control valve flows.
Select the appropriate valve (1, 2, 3 or 4) with the
remote control valve button (1) .
280
3 - 76
As soon as the relevant control valve is shown on the

dot matrix display, increase or decrease its maximum
flow volume using the UP / DOWN buttons (1 and 2).
The flow volume is saved in the tractor's control
module until it is reprogrammed. The setting is not
deleted by switching off the starter switch.
281
NOTE: The flow volume setting of the remote
control valves (1) applies to retraction and
extension movements of the cylinder.
IMPORTANT: If you stop pressing the keys for

more than two seconds when setting the
remote control valves this will interrupt the
setting process, and the system reverts to the
old setting. Reactivate the setting mode to
continue.
282
Additional displays
When the individual functions of the electro-hydraulic
remote control valves are selected, a corresponding
visual display appears on the dot matrix display.
NOTE: The following figures relate to remote

control valve no. 1.
3 - 77
1. Remote control valve in Neutral.
2. Remote control valve operating with maximum

flow set by the operator. The figure shows the
cylinder in retract mode.
3. Lever for remote control valve in float position.
4. Remote control valve locked in hydraulic motor

mode.
Only retract and float positions available.
5. Electro-hydraulic remote control valve system

deactivated. All valve functions deactivated.
6. Timer functions locked.
7. Timer functions open.
283
3 - 78
Operation with sequence for automatic field System pressure relief

end actions (where fitted)
IMPORTANT: If the operation of an electro- WARNING: Depressurise the oil circuit

hydraulic remote control valve is recorded in a before connecting and/or disconnecting the
field end automatic sequence, it is important hydraulic hoses of external hydraulic
that you provide sufficient time for the control cylinders by starting the engine and moving
lever movement to be recorded if this passes the control lever into the float position. Then
through the individual positions (R,N,L,F or switch off the engine. When relieving the
vice versa). If the lever remains in each system pressure, ensure that no-one could
position for 1 / 2 second, this ensures sufficient be injured by moving the equipment. Before
time for recording the step. If the lever is disconnecting cylinders or operating
moved too quickly, data transfer may be equipment make sure the equipment is
disturbed which will result in the equipment
responding incorrectly during playback. ! supported securely.
Never work under attached equipment which
Carrying out a time-controlled program is supported by the hydraulics because this
may sink (even when the engine is switched
The time-controlled sequence begins as soon as the
off) if the control lever is actuated
lever is tilted briefly. At the end of the specified time,
unintentionally or a hose bursts etc. Always
the oil flow is stopped by the remote control valve. If
use reliable supports to secure implements
the ignition switch (engine off) is moved into the "Off"
which have to be held in a raised position for
position, the settings undertaken during tractor
maintenance work. Ensure that the oil in
operations are transferred from the operating memory
external hydraulic cylinders is clean. It must
into the main memory. To provide sufficient time for
also correspond to the specified oil grade.
the transfer of data, you should wait at least five
seconds before switching the key back on.
3 - 79
ADDITIONAL OIL SUPPLY FOR REMOTE

CONTROL VALVE HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONS
(where fitted)
For equipment and towing equipment which need a
continuous throughflow or a high oil flow from the
tractor's hydraulic system, there is an option of
connecting directly up to the main hydraulic circuit on
the rear of the tractor.
For this to function correctly, the implement must be
fitted with a closed-centre hydraulic valve system
which controls the oil flow from the tractor's main
hydraulic pump (via a sensing line).
IMPORTANT: Before plug screw connections are

removed or tubes are connected, switch off the 3 1
engine and ensure that the areas around the
screws and tube connections are totally clean to 284
avoid contaminating the hydraulic system.
P - Pressure Line (1)
To connect the equipment pressure line, remove the
plug (1) from the 'power beyond' port for external
consumers below the remote valve manifold. Using a
suitable connector, M22 x 1.5/15.5 (ISO6149), attach
the equipment's pressurised oil line to this port. With
the equipment's control valve in neutral, a low standby
pressure of 21 to 24 bar is retained in the pressure
line to this port.
285
LS – Load Sensing (LS) line (2) IMPORTANT: To ensure that the system is
functioning correctly, the equipment's control valve
Connect the load sensing line to the M12x1.5/11.5
must be able to return the pressure from the
(ISO6149) port (2) and to the equipment's control
sensing line to the oil pan through the return line (3)
valve. It is the load sensing line which generates and
when in Neutral. The hydraulics then return to low
controls the oil pressure and flow from the tractor's
standby pressure.
hydraulic pump. When an equipment control valve is
operated, the low standby pressure from port 'P', is R – oil return line (3)
diverted down the load sensing line to 'switch on' the
The oil return line of the equipment's control valves
tractor's hydraulic pump’. In operation, the load
should be connected to the M27 x 2/19 (ISO 6149)
sensing line constantly monitors oil pressure and flow
port. The oil can thereby run directly into the tractor's
to ensure supply never exceeds demand.
hydraulic system.
To connect up the load sensing line, please contact
your authorised dealer. NOTE: Ensure that the hoses have sufficient
capacity for the oil flow required and that the
sensing line and hoses are long enough to ensure
equipment motion during work.
3 - 80
3-POINT POWER LIFT LINKAGE

FITTING 3-POINT LIFT LINKAGE 2. Connect up additional trailed equipment (if
needed).
NOTE: Before equipment is attached, set the lift
3. Once the equipment has been fitted but before
rods and select the correct top link hole for the operation, check that:
equipment and the work to be carried out.
Ensure that the telescopic stabilisers are fitted and set ● The equipment does not represent an
correctly. Take off the drawbar before fitting the trailed obstacle for other tractor parts.
equipment which keeps at a short distance from the
tractor. ● The top link does not touch the PTO guard
when the equipment is in its lowest position.
IMPORTANT: Always activate position control
when you are fitting or transporting attached IMPORTANT: Before operating equipment driven
equipment, when no attached equipment is fitted or by the PTO, check that the PTO's drive journal
if you do not need draft control. When using does not extend too far and disconnect, snap
mechanical lower link sensing hydraulics, move the through or is not at too great an angle. Ensure that
lever for draft control all the way to the front. When the sign for the drive journal does not touch the
using electronic draft control, turn the position/draft PTO guard or drawbar. Refer to “Fitting PTO
loading activation knob as far as it will go driven equipment”.
anticlockwise (10).
IMPORTANT: When fitting attached or semi-
Most equipment can be fitted to the tractor as follows. mounted equipment on the lifting platform linkage
1. Position the tractor so that the coupling points or when coupling attachment equipment to the
of the lower links are at the same height and drawbar or tow hitch, be sure to keep a sufficient
slightly in front of the equipment's coupling distance between the equipment and tractor. Semi-
bolts. Carefully move the tractor back a few mounted or attached equipment may represent an
centimetres at a time to align the tractor and obstacle to the tractor's rear wheels. If necessary,
equipment coupling points. set the steering locks or stabilisers.
2. Fit the equipment to the lower links as
described under QUICK HITCH (see page 3 -
85).
WARNING: Always apply the parking brake

before leaving the tractor to establish the
necessary connections. The engine must be
running in order to actuate the external
! power lift controls when fitting the lower link
connections. Switch off the engine if your
tractor is not fitted with these switches or if
other connections are established.
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating

equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends
(where fitted) are locked in their operating
position.
1. With the engine switched off and the parking
brake applied, adjust the top link until the
equipment's lifting platform pin can be inserted
through the lifting platform and the top link.
Ensure that sufficient thread remains in the
adjustment tube to prevent the ends from being
torn out under load.
3 - 81
Distance between equipment and cab/platform Disassembling equipment

The process for disassembling equipment is the
reverse to the fitting process. The following
WARNING: Some attached or semi- information will make decoupling easier and safer.
mounted equipment may interfere with and
damage the cab or platform. People could be ● Always lower the equipment onto solid level
! injured by pieces of broken glass or the cab ground.
rollover bar could be damaged if equipment
touches the cab or platform. ● Support the equipment so that it cannot tip
over or fall over when being disconnected
To avoid damage to the tractor, proceed as follows: from the tractor.
● Fit the equipment as previously described. ● Fully reduce the hydraulic pressure in the
external cylinders by selecting float position
● By slowly raising the equipment with the before decoupling the equipment.
power lift control lever in position control,
check whether the distance is sufficient. If When fitting attached equipment on the power lift
parts of the equipment are less than 100 mm linkage, the following settings can be undertaken to
away from the cab, select one of the following ensure satisfactory operations:
alternatives:
If the tractor is fitted with mechanical lower link
sensing hydraulics, set the lifting limitation cams to
prevent excessive lifting. If the tractor is fitted with
electronic draft control, set the knob for the lifting
limitation to limit the upwards lift.
If draft control is needed or there is insufficient ground
clearance with a sufficient distance from the cab, you
can adjust the power lift linkage, open the tractor's
rear window or adjust the equipment in order to pass
the cab. Adjustments to the linkage may increase the
distance to the cab, but may impact negatively on the
equipment's operating characteristics.
● Place the lift rods in the front holes in the

lower links. This reduces the height of lifting
(depending on the left of the lift rods).
● Extend the lift rods.

● Connect the top link to the top hole in the top
link fitting and use the lowest lifting platform
hole for the equipment.
● Only undertake minor adjustments in order to

pass the cab. Should the equipment rating be
insufficient, you may have to have the
equipment modified. Consult you authorised
dealer.
3 - 82
LIFT RODS, LOWER AND TOP LINKS

Lower link and lift rod
setting
Each lower link (3) has three holes for fitting the lift
rods. Ex factory, the tractor lift rods (1) are connected
to the rear hole of the lower link to achieve maximum
lifting force. If necessary, fit the lift rods to the front
hole for maximum lifting height (nearer to the tractor).
The centre hole allows for a compromise between
optimum lifting height and lifting force.
286
The left and right lift rods both have a slot at the
bottom end which is used to provide limited play for
the lower link arms. For normal operations, the square
plate is positioned on the locking pin (1) so that the
lifting arm remains fixed opposite the lower link arm.
287
If the locking pin is rotated by 90° as shown (2), the
equipment may move vertically (to a limited point),
independently of the tractor, which is useful when
using wide equipment. After setting, ensure that the
outer retaining plate and the spring retainers are
reinserted and securely locked.
Before a lift rod is disconnected from the lower link,
lower the attached equipment to the ground, apply the
parking brake and switch off the engine. Before
removing the locking pin, ensure that the attached
equipment is securely supported and that the
hydraulics are fully depressurised.
Move the power lift control lever forwards and 288
backwards several times to remove any residual
pressure.
When using electronic draft control, move the power
lift control lever into the lowest position before the
engine is switched off.
3 - 83
To increase or decrease the lift rod length, use the

handles on the lock nut (1) to turn the upper part of
the lift rod.
Before the lock nut can be turned, it must be raised to
snap the slot (2) out of the lug (3) on the lower part of
the lift rod. Turn the lock nut to extend or shorten the
lift rods.
When the setting is OK, allow the lock nut to fall into
the lower position. Ensure that the lock nut is right at
the bottom and the lug is snapped into the slot to
prevent any unintentional turning.
IMPORTANT: When fitting attached or semi- 289

mounted equipment to the power lift linkage or
when coupling attached equipment to the drawbar
or the automatic pick-up hitch, ensure there is
sufficient space between the equipment and tractor
or for opening the rear window.
Top link
The top link has a central threaded sleeve (3) with
which the top link can be extended or shorted as
required (by turning the sleeve). Raise the spring-
mounted bracket (1) so that the threaded sleeve (3)
can be turned. Raise the handle (2) and use it as a
lever to simplify the setting process. The link end (4)
can also optionally be turned to achieve limited
adjustment of the top link length.
To lock the sleeve after setting, press down the spring-
mounted bracket so that it pushes the handle flushly
against the sleeve.
290
When not in use, the top link can be taken off and
stored upright. Hook the ball end of the handle (2) into
the bracket (1) on the rear axle housing as shown.
291
3 - 84
TOP LINK CONSOLE

(Only lower link sensing hydraulics)
Draft loadings are sensed using the lower links. The
top link is therefore fitted to a console which is
permanently linked to the rear axle housing.
The console has two holes for securing the top link.
For maximum lifting force and maximum distance
between equipment and cab, insert the pin (1) in the
top hole. For optimum penetration of the equipment in
the ground and maximum distance between
equipment and ground (when the equipment is being
raised), use the bottom hole (2).
292
QUICK HITCH
The quick hitch consists of one wider pair of lower
links (1) and one adjustable top link (2). The top link
and lower links have open claw ends which permit
rapid coupling and uncoupling of equipment without
the operator having to leave the cab. The claws are
fitted with self-locking latches to ensure that the
equipment is securely held on the tractor linkage.
Cables are provided for securing the latches.
An adjustable spacer spring is available as an

accessory. The spring holds the lower links apart to
compensate for the width of the equipment.
293
Threeball bushes are supplied for installation on the
equipment (if required). The ball bushes with
projecting lips (1) should be fitted on the upper
equipment hitch pins. The two ball bushes (3) and
their detachable guides (2) should be fitted on the
equipment's lower hitch pins.
294
3 - 85
Coupling the equipment to the tractor

Set the stabilisers so that the tractor's lower links
maintain the correct distance to one another and are
therefore in line with the ball bushes on the
equipment's lower hitch pin. Alternatively, use the
adjustable spacer fixture, where fitted.
Move the top link into its transport position. When the
lower links are fully lowered and the self-locking
latches (1) are in the operating position shown,
reverse the tractor until the claw couplers of the lower
links are below the equipment's hitch pins. Precise
alignment of the tractor and equipment is not needed
thanks to the combination of the large claw openings
and guides on the ball bushes on the equipment.
Use the power lift control lever to raise the lower links
until the claw couplers snap into ball bushes. An
audible click signals that the self-locking latches have
snapped into the ball bushes on the equipment.
Lower the top link claw onto the equipment's upper
ball bush and press down until the interlock can be 295
heard to snap into place. Increase or decrease the top
link length as required. Where fitted, the equipment
supports can now be removed or retracted and the
equipment can be supported on the power lift linkage.
Decoupling the equipment from the tractor
Use the power lift control lever to lower the equipment
all the way to the ground. Ensure that it cannot fall
when decoupled from the tractor. Use equipment
supports (where fitted).
Pull the unlocking cable on the top link to unlock the
claw.
Pull the unlocking cable (2) on the two lower links.

The lever then snaps into the position shown with the
latch draw in (1). The links of the ball bushes can
thereby fit onto the equipment's lower hitch pins
whenever the links are fully lowered. Fully lower the
lower links and move the tractor away from the
equipment.
NOTE: Ensure that the unlocking cables do not get

caught up in the wheels, moving parts of the power
lift linkage or the equipment. When the cables are
not in use, they should be secured to the rubber
loops on the rear right of the cab frame.
296
3 - 86
TELESCOPIC STABILISERS
(round section screw version – where fitted)
WARNING: To avoid excess lateral

movement, never operate steerable
! equipment while the telescopic stabilisers
are not set correctly.
Telescopic stabilisers control the seesawing of the

lower links and attached equipment during work or
transport.
Each stabiliser consists of a round section tube (3),
which is fixed to the console (1) by a pin (2) and is
secured (with a bolt) to the outer ends of the rear axle
housing. An inner section (4) with a smaller diameter,
secured to a console on the lower links, slides freely in
the outer tube. The total length of the stabiliser is
determined by the position of a pin (5) which is
inserted into the outer and inner tubes through holes.
The holes in the inner tube and outer tube have
different positions so that many stabiliser settings are
available with the pin in the appropriate pair of holes.
To adjust the attached equipment, fit both stabilisers
to the power lift linkage without pins. Once the
attached equipment is aligned correctly, insert the 297
pins through one of four holes in the outer tube which
covers one of the holes in the inner tube. If you insert
the pins in this way, both stabilisers are fixed as rigid
units and prevent the attached equipment from
seesawing during work or when in the raised
transport position.
If the pin is removed from the front hole (1), the front
end of the stabiliser may retract whereby the attached
equipment's seesawing motion is limited. The unused
pin should be placed in one of the other holes (2) in
the inner tube for safekeeping.
IMPORTANT: Always ensure that the locking

pin is inserted in the front stabiliser hole when
there is no attached equipment fitted.
IMPORTANT: When setting the length of the

stabiliser, in particular with limited seesawing
motion, ensure that the rear wheels do not
restrict the stabilisers or lower links. 298
3 - 87
TELESCOPIC STABILISERS
(round section screw version
where fitted)

! equipment while the telescopic stabilisers
are not set correctly.
Telescopic stabilisers control the seesawing of the

lower links and attached equipment during work or
transport.
Each stabiliser consists of a tube (5) with a coupling
on each end. The front, mobile end (6) is fitted to a
console (1) and secured to the outer end of the rear
axle housing with pins. This coupling slides loosely in
the tube. The total length of the stabiliser is
determined by the position of a pin (3) which is
inserted into the tube through a hole. The rear end (4)
is secured to the power lift linkage and has a thread
for fine adjustment.
To adjust the attached equipment, fit both stabilisers
to the power lift linkage without pins. Pull back the
locking clamp to remove the pin. Once the equipment
is aligned correctly, insert the pin through the hole and
refit the locking clamp. If the pin is not inserted, the 299
tube for fine adjustment can turn and the pin can then
be reinserted.
When the pins are in the holes, both stabilisers are
fixed as rigid units and prevent the attached
equipment from seesawing during work or when in
the raised transport position.
The stabilisers are secured at the front with a pin (2)

which is inserted through the hole into the consoles.
300
3 - 88
If the front end of the stabilisers is attached to the top

hole (2) in the console, the equipment may seesaw
during work (this is restricted when raised). This
function is used for better equipment control when
turning at the field's headlands.
IMPORTANT: When setting the length of the

stabiliser, in particular with limited seesawing
motion, ensure that the rear wheels do not restrict
the stabilisers or lower links.
AUTOMATIC STABILISERS
Automatic stabilisers can be fitted in place of the
aforementioned standard telescopic stabilisers.

! equipment while the stabilisers are not fitted
and set correctly.
Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube system

with an inner thread at the rear end. The tube system
is fitted to a console which is secured to the outer
ends of the rear axle housing by pins.
A rod (3) with external thread is fitted to the lower
links. The threaded rod protrudes into the thread in
the tube system, the total length of which is set by
screwing the rod in or out.
An adjustable chain (4) is secured at one end to the
rear fender and at the other end by a spring to a
swivel-mounted cover (1) on the extendable part of
the stabiliser. A lug (2) on the extendable part of the
stabiliser snaps into a groove in the cover.
If set correctly, the chain is loose as soon as the lower
links are raised out of their operating position whereby
the cover can fall over the lug on the stabiliser. When
the cover is at the bottom, as shown, the stabiliser is 301
locked in the preset length. This keeps the lower links
at a predetermined distance from one another
whereby seesawing motion is prevented (even on the
attached equipment).
When lowering the power lift into its operating

position, the chain is tensioned and the cover is raised
off the stabiliser and can be freely pulled out. The
stabilisers (and the attached equipment) can then
seesaw freely during ground work. This function is
useful because it is used for better equipment control
when turning at the end of the field.
3 - 89
Setting the stabilisers

In practice, you should fit the equipment on the power
lift linkage whereby the cover (4) is raised off the two
stabilisers for free motion.
Raise the locking/adjustment lever (2) over the journal
(1) so that the lever is at a right angle to the stabiliser.
Use the lever to turn the extended part so that the
threaded part (3) is screwed into or out of the
stabiliser. Once the length is correct, i.e. the groove in
the cover matches the lug on the stabiliser, lower the
lever again via the journal and close the cover.
The chain should then be set by placing the
appropriate link over the hook so that the cover lifts
the stabiliser when lowering the trailed equipment into 302
its operating position.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length for

free seesawing motion, ensure that the rear wheels
do not get in the way of the stabilisers or lower
links.
3 - 90
DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS

NOTE: Read the following text carefully before SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR DRAWBAR
coupling attached equipment. WARNING
CONNECTION/DISCONNECTION OF ATTACHED WARNING: Do not tow equipment from the

EQUIPMENT lower links with the links above the horizontal
position. Always use the drawbar, pick-up hitch
IMPORTANT: In some countries, brakes must be ! or lower links in the fully lowered position for
fitted to attached equipment when used on public towing work, otherwise the tractor may
highways. Before travelling on public highways, overturn rearwards.
always ensure that you are complying with national
legislation. NOTE: Before attaching equipment to the
To connect the tractor to the attached equipment, drawbar ensure that the total weight on the
proceed as follows: rear axle does not exceed the maximum static
support load or the rear tyre load capacity,
1. Ensure that the equipment is the same height whichever is the lower (see Tyre Pressures
as the drawbar. and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3
2. Carefully move the tractor back a few for more details).
centimetres at a time to align the drawbar and
trailed equipment hitch. ● When transporting attached equipment on
public roads it is recommended that a
3. Apply the parking brake and switch off the
safety chain with a tensile strength equal
engine.
to the gross weight of the attached
4. Plug in the coupling pins and ensure that the equipment be fitted between the tractor
bracket is locked. and drawbar. You will find more information
about safety chains on see page 3 - 95.
IMPORTANT: When fitting attached or semi-
mounted equipment on the lifting platform linkage
or when coupling attached equipment to the
drawbar or tow hitch, be sure to keep a sufficient
distance between the equipment and tractor. Semi-
mounted or attached equipment may represent an
obstacle to the tractor's rear wheels. If necessary,
set the steering locks or stabilisers.
NOTE: When using equipment which requires
the attached fixture to be extended or
obstructs the tractor's towing fork, remove and
store the towing fork and hitch pin.
When transporting by road, always fit a safety chain
between the tractor and trailed equipment hitch (see
page 3 - 95).
When towing equipment without brakes, the following
precautions must always be heeded:
● Do not tow equipment which is more than

twice the weight of the tractor.
● Do not travel any faster than 16 km/h if the

equipment weighs more than the tractor.
● When towing equipment which is lighter than

the tractor, do not travel any faster than
32 km/h.
3 - 91
SWIVEL-MOUNTED DRAWBARS
Two swivel-mounted drawbar versions can be
supplied. The extendable version is shown in Figure
294. This drawbar can be fitted as part of an attached
fixture or as an independent unit.
The version with rollers (see page 3 - 94) is
recommended for continuous use of attached
equipment under heavy-duty towing conditions. This
drawbar is fitted on rollers and allows for easier
turning compared with the extendable version.
Extendable and swivel-mounted drawbars
The drawbar (2) rotates around a pin at the front end
so that the drawbar can swing at the rear over the full
width of the trailer. Limited drawbar motion is
achieved by inserting the swing limitation pins (1) into
the corresponding holes. Optionally, you can fix the
drawbar in one of three positions by inserting the bolts
into the corresponding holes. The figure shows the
drawbar fixed in its central position to prevent
seesawing motion.
Fix the drawbar with a pin when towing equipment
which requires precise positioning and when
transporting equipment.
303
Allow the drawbar to swing when towing equipment

for excavation work which does not have to be
positioned precisely. This simplifies steering and
turning.
WARNING: To prevent seesaw movements

when transporting equipment or when
! operating equipment for excavation work,
always secure the drawbar.
The height and length (protrusion) of the drawbar can

be set to the end of the PTO. To adjust the height of
the hitch point of the drawbar or equipment, take off
the drawbar and turn it round.
3 - 92
All countries
The front locking pin can be inserted in one of three
holes in the drawbar to adjust the distance between
the PTO and hitch point. Refer to above figure and the
following table:
Hole PTO to Maximum static

drawbar support load
hitch point
Drawbar fork right at top
1 406 mm 1140 kg
2 356 mm 1330 kg
3 243 mm 2040 kg 304
Drawbar fork
at bottom
1 406 mm 1045 kg
2 356 mm 1225 kg
3 243 mm 1305 kg
Use hole 1 for 1000 rpm PTO work and use hole 2 for
540 rpm PTO work.
When towing equipment which exerts high static
downwards forces, such as two-wheel trailers etc.,
hole 3 must be used.
All drawbars
WARNING: Do not tow using the lower links

if the links are above the horizontal position.
Always use the drawbar, the pick-up hitch or
! the lowered lower links for towing work
because otherwise the tractor may tip
backwards.
NOTE: When supporting equipment on the

drawbar, ensure that the total weight on the
rear axle does not exceed the maximum static
downwards load or the load bearing capacity
of the rear tyres, depending on which is the
lower value (refer to tyre air pressure levels
and permissible load bearing capacities at the
end of section 3).
IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment

by road, we would recommend fitting a safety
chain, the towing force of which corresponds
to the gross weight of the equipment, between
the tractor and equipment hitch. Refer to
safety chain on page 3 - 95.
3 - 93
Swivel-mounted drawbar with rollers

The drawbar (2) rotates around a pin at the front end
so that the rear end of the drawbar can swing over the
full width of the trailer. The drawbar can be fixed in
one of seven positions by inserting the swing limitation
pin (1) in the corresponding hole and through the
drawbar. The drawbar may optionally swing over the
entire width of the trailer (3).
Fix the drawbar with a pin when towing equipment
which requires precise positioning and when
transporting equipment. Allow the drawbar to swing
when towing equipment for excavation work which
does not have to be positioned precisely. This
simplifies steering and turning.
305
WARNING: To prevent seesaw movements

when transporting equipment or when
! operating equipment for excavation work,
always secure the drawbar.
The height and length (protrusion) of the drawbar can

be set to the end of the PTO. To adjust the height of
the hitch point of the drawbar or equipment, take off
the drawbar and turn it round.
The front locking pin can be inserted in one of two
holes in the drawbar to adjust the distance between
the PTO and hitch point. Refer to above figure and the
following table:

drawbar support load
hitch point
Drawbar fork right at top
1 406 mm 1360 kg
2 356 mm 1630 kg
Drawbar fork at bottom 306
1 406 mm 1045 kg
2 356 mm 1225 kg
Use hole 1 for 1000 rpm PTO work and use hole 2 for
540 rpm PTO work. WARNING: Do not tow using the lower links
if the links are above the horizontal position.
When towing equipment which exerts high static Always use the drawbar, the pick-up hitch or
downwards forces, such as two-wheel trailers etc., ! the lowered lower links for towing work
hole 2 must be used. because otherwise the tractor may tip
backwards.
NOTE: When supporting equipment on the

drawbar, ensure that the total weight on the rear
axle does not exceed the maximum static
3 - 94
downwards load or the load bearing capacity of the

rear tyres, depending on which is the lower value
(refer to tyre air pressure levels and permissible
load bearing capacities at the end of section 3).
IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment by

road, we would recommend fitting a safety chain,
the towing force of which corresponds to the gross
weight of the equipment, between the tractor and
equipment hitch. Refer to the following text and
figure.
SAFETY CHAIN
When transporting equipment on the road, use a
safety chain (2) with a towing force which is equal to
or greater than the gross weight of the equipment to
be towed. The equipment (1) is then kept under
control should the drawbar (3) and equipment be
separated.
Once the chain has been fitted, you should undertake
a short trial run during which the tractor is steered to
the left and to the right to check the safety chain
setting. Reset the chain if it becomes too loose or too
tight.
307
For information on the equipment weight and coupling

parts, refer to the equipment's operating instructions.
Safety chains, coupling parts and chain guides can be
obtained from your authorised dealer.
3 - 95
REAR TOW HITCH

Description
Various rear tow hitch versions can be supplied. All
versions consist of a steel frame which is secured to
the rear axle housing with a pin. A trailer pin with
height adjustment options is available.
The sliding frame is shown in Figures 299 and 300.
Snap the rotary pins in the trailer pin unit into the
grooves in the frame to secure the trailer pin at the
correct height. A second, non-adjustable trailer pin
(Piton-Fixe) is also available as an option with this
frame. The Piton-Fixe fixture is fitted at the bottom of
the unit.
308
Four types of trailer pin unit are available:

● Non-swivel-mounted trailer pin.
● Non-swivel-mounted heavy-duty trailer pin.
● Swivel-mounted trailer pin –
manual operation
● Swivel-mounted trailer pin –
automatic operation.
A swivel-mounted drawbar can also be supplied as
part of the unit. Refer to extendable and swivel-
mounted drawbars on page 3 - 92 for information
about drawbar operation.
NOTE: The tow hitch is primarily designed for

operations with four-wheeled trailers which do not
exert high downwards load onto the trailer pin. Note
the maximum static downwards loads given in the
text.
3 - 96
Sliding frame with non-swivel mounted trailer pin (accessory fitted by the dealer)
The tow hitches shown are fitted with a non-swivel-
mounted trailer pin unit with height adjustment
options. The standard trailer pin is shown in Figure
299. Figure 300 shows the heavy-duty trailer pin.
Remove the safety bracket (1) and move the handle
(5) vertically. Raising the handle rotates the bolts and
moves them out of the grooves in the frame. Raise or
lower the trailer pin unit (4) by placing both hands on
the handle (5) if necessary. Once the height required
has been reached, use one hand to support the trailer
bolt and move the handle horizontally (refer to
Figures299 and 300). Turn the bolts and snap back
into the grooves in the frame. Lower the PTO guard
(6).
To connect the trailer towbar to the trailer pin,
remove the safety bracket (1) from the trailer pin
and use the handle (2) to raise. Reinsert the trailer
pin so that it slides through the eye of the trailer 309
towbar. Reinsert the safety bracket.
NOTE: The static support load on the trailer pin

must not exceed the load bearing capacity of the
rear tyres or the following values, depending on
which is the lower value (refer to tyre air pressure
levels and permissible load bearing capacities at
the end of section 3).
Standard trailer pin
(Figure 299) 1500 kg
D2 version trailer pin
(Figure 300) 2000 kg
NOTE: A D2 version trailer pin (with housing)
can be supplied as an accessory (installed by
the dealer). The static downwards load on the
D2 trailer pin must not exceed 2500 kg or the
load bearing capacity of the rear tyres,
depending on which is the lower value. (Refer
to tyre air pressure levels and permissible
load bearing capacities at the end of section
3).
3 - 97
Sliding frame with swivel-mounted trailer pin

Grasp the handle (2) with your right hand. Press
button (1) and hold down to unlock the locking
mechanism. Use your left hand to pull the handle
(3) into a horizontal position and release the button
to lock the handle (3) horizontally. Lowering the
handle turns the bolts and forces them out of the
frame. Use both hands to raise or lower the entire
trailer pin unit. Once the height required has been
reached, press in the button and pull the left-hand
handle into a vertical position. The bolts rotate and
snap back into the grooves in the frame. Lower the
PTO guard (4).
310
WARNING: Before connecting up a trailer,

ensure that the bolts have snapped fully into
the grooves, i.e. the handle (3) is in its
! vertical position. The trailer pin unit must not
be placed on the PTO guard or on the pin
heads at the end of the slideways.
Refer to the following text for how to attach a trailer

towbar to the upper trailer pin:
3 - 98
Swivel-mounted trailer pin –

manual connection
To connect the trailer towbar to the trailer pin, remove
the safety bracket (1) from the trailer pin and use the
handle (2) to raise. Reinsert the trailer pin so that it
slides through the eye of the trailer towbar. Reinsert
the safety bracket.
311
So that the trailer pin can swivel, the inner hex bolt (1)
must be released from the side of the trailer bolt unit.
A trailer with a non-swivel-mounted towbar can then
swing with the tractor.
NOTE: The static downwards load on the trailer pin

must not exceed 2000 kg or the load bearing
capacity of the rear tyres, depending on which is
the lower value. (Refer to tyre air pressure levels
and permissible load bearing capacities at the end
of section 3).
Swivel-mounted trailer pin –
automatic connection
312
The trailer pin (2) is spring-loaded when in its
connected (lowered) position. To connect a trailer to
the trailer pin, raise the unlocking lever (1) into its
vertical position and push the trailer pin back into its
housing.
The unlocking lever is connected to a handle in the
cab by a cable (4). A trailer can therefore be attached
without leaving the cab.
313
3 - 99
To activate the cable, unlock the trailer pin and retract,

raise the collar (1) to release the latch and then pull up
the lever.
The pin remains in its raised position until the trailer
towbar is underneath it. The towbar lug touches the
release lever (3) (Figure 304) and the pin falls into the
connected position. The pin will also fall into the
connected position when the lever (1) is pulled down.
WARNING: Never try to release the lever by

! hand because your fingers may be trapped
by the spring-loaded trailer pins.
314
So that the trailer pin can swivel, the inner hex bolt (1)
(Figure 303) must be released from the underside of
the trailer pin unit. A trailer with a non-swivel-mounted
towbar can then swing with the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the tractor's trailer pin to

swing when the attached equipment is fitted with a
swivel-mounted trailer pin coupler.
NOTE: The static downwards load on the trailer pin

of section 3).
3 - 100
Non-adjustable trailer pin (Piton-Fixe)

A non-adjustable trailer pin (Piton-Fixe) can be fitted
underneath the unit (optional).
To connect a trailer to the Piton-Fixe, remove the
safety bracket (2) and pull out the pin (4).
315
Raise the safety latch (1) and lower the trailer towbar
lug over the Piton-Fixe (3). Lower the safety latch,
reinsert the locking pin (4) and use the safety bracket
(2) to secure. The safety latch prevents the trailer from
accidentally coming loose from the Piton-Fixe.
NOTE: The static support load on the Piton-Fixe

of section 3).
316
3 - 101
Ball and socket joint K80

The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height
adjustable, 80 mm ball assembly. Pull out the securing
pin (2) and turn the handle (1) upwards until vertical.
Lifting the handle will rotate the pins and disengage
them from the notches in the frame. Using both hands
on the handle, lift or lower the tow ball assembly (3) as
required. When at the required height, support the tow
pin with one hand and lower the handle back to the
horizontal position with the other hand. The pins will
rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Then
fold down the PTO cap (6).
317
NOTE: When setting the height of the tow

hitch ball, it must be adjusted to the lowest
position relative to the correct operating
height of the equipment drawbar.
To attach a trailer, remove the 'R' clip (5) and pull out
the locking pin (4). This will allow the security latch to
pivot forwards toward the tractor. When the equipment
drawbar has been securely attached, replace the
locking pin so it passes through the security latch and
re-insert the 'R' clip.
NOTE: The support load on the tow ball must
not exceed 3000 kg or the rear tyre load
capacity (whichever is lower. See Tyre
Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end
of Section 3).
3 - 102
AUTOMATIC PICK-UP HITCH WITH HOOK AND DRAWBAR

The automatic pick-up hitch and drawbar on
tractor may be the drop down type, swing back
type or the hydraulic extending type.
All pick-up hitches are raised and lowered using a 3-
stage lifting device and are fully self-supporting when
locked in the operating (raised) position.
Depending on type, the pick-up hitch will be equipped
with a reversible hook and clevis drawbar or
interchangeable hook and clevis drawbars.
318
Connecting equipment
Raise the Auto Hitch to its maximum point. Press the
button (1) at the top. 1
To open the locking latches, slide the collar (1)
upwards (see Figure 309) and then raise the approval
lever and hold in position. Lower the hitch to the
ground by pressing the button (1) down.
319
3 - 103
Position the tractor so that the pick-up hitch (2)

is under the equipment towbar opening. Then
raise the Auto Hitch until an audible click
indicates the locking latches (1) have engaged
the tie rods (3).
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the height limit

control is set to the maximum height position.
Failure to observe this may result in the hitch failing to
latch correctly. Press the button so that the pick-up
hitch (along with the attached equipment) is raised
from the locking latches.
320
NOTE: The maximum static support load on the
hook of the pick-up hitch must not exceed 3000 kg.
If the towing equipment produces high static lowering
forces, as is the case for example with two-wheel
trailers etc., select the position at which the towbar is
attached. Alternatively, change to the hitch hook
mode.
IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on

the towbar or pick-up hitch, ensure that the
total weight on the rear axle does not exceed
the maximum static support load or the load
bearing capacity of the rear tyres , whichever is
the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and 321
Loads at the end of Section 3).
3 - 104
"Drop Down" pick-up hitch (where fitted)T

The hook on the Drop Down hitch can be
interchanged with the clevis drawbar.
To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the pick-
up hitch, remove the two securing pins (2) (see Figure
313) and withdraw the hook assembly.
Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with
the two pins.
IMPORTANT: Never raise or lower the pick-up
hitch when in the drawbar mode with a trailer
attached.
322
When using holes (1), (2), and (3) in
conjunction with the holes in the clevis
drawbar, a choice of equipment/drawbar hitch
points on the end of the PTO can be used. The
hitch point positions and maximum permitted
lowering load on the drawbar are listed in
Figure 314 and the following table:
The two additional holes (5) are provided in the
hanger for the rear securing pin (2) so the drawbar
may be offset to the left or right of the centre line.
323
The drawbar (see Figure 315) may be inverted to vary
the height of the drawbar/equipment hitch point.
Hole (see PTO at drawbar hitch point Maximum

Fig. 3 1 4 ) support
Drawbar fork at top
1 356 mm 1650 kg
2 406 mm 1500 kg
Drawbar fork at bottom
1 356 mm 1650 kg
2 406 mm 1500 kg
324
When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar
may be stored in the bracket (1), attached to
the rear axle. Ensure the clamp screw (2), is
fully tightened to retain the drawbar in the
bracket.
325
3 - 105
"Swing Back" pick-up hitch (where fitted)

The swing back hitch moves back during lowering.
This provides improved visibility of the hook from the
driver's seat. This simplifies the process of aligning
the hook on the equipment drawbar.
The pick-up hitch hook is reversible and has a
drawbar clevis on the other end. The combined hook
and drawbar is secured to the hook hanger by means
of two pins.
Refer to Figure 317: To change from pick-up
hook mode to drawbar, lower the pick-up
hitch, remove the two securing pins (1) and
(2) and withdraw the combined pick-up
hook/drawbar fixture (4).
Re-install the assembly, hook first, with the hook on
the fixture's side and secure with the pins. The two
additional holes (5) are provided in the hanger for the
rear securing pin (2) so the drawbar may be offset to
the left or right of the centre line.
326
There are four holes in the drawbar. By

inserting the two securing pins in the
appropriate pair of holes, a choice of
equipment/drawbar hitch points on the end of
the PTO is available. The hitch point positions
and maximum permitted lowering load on the
drawbar are listed in Figure 318 and the
following table:
To change from hook mode to drawbar mode (refer to
Figure 317), lower the pick-up hitch, pull out the two
locking pins (1) and (2) and then pull out the hook /
drawbar unit (4).
Firstly refit the unit using the hook and, if the hook is
positioned sideways, secure with the pins. The trailer
has two additional holes (5) (Figure 317) for the rear
locking pins (2) so that the drawbar can be moved to
the left or right from the centre line.
IMPORTANT: Never raise or lower the pick-up
hitch in drawbar mode with the trailer
attached.
3 - 106
The drawbar can be turned around to adjust the

attachment point for the drawbar and/or to adjust the
height of the equipment.
There are five holes in the drawbar. A number of
equipment/drawbar positions can be set in relation to
the PTO end by inserting the two locking pins in the
corresponding pair of holes (1), (2) or (3). Refer to the
above figure and the following table for the
attachment point position and the maximum
permissible static downwards load on the drawbar.

drawbar hitch point downwards load
Drawbar fork right at top 327
1 406 mm 1500 kg
2 356 mm 1650 kg
3 256 mm 2400 kg
Drawbar fork at bottom
1 406 mm 1500 kg
2 356 mm 1650 kg
3 256 mm 2180 kg
When towing equipment with high static downwards

loads, such as two-wheeled trailers, the close
attachment position (pair of holes 1) must always be
used. As an option, you could change to the hitch's
hook mode.
3 - 107
When supporting equipment on the drawbar or the

pick-up, ensure that the total weight on the rear axle
does not exceed the maximum static downwards load
or the load bearing capacity of the rear tyres,
depending on which is the lower value (refer to tyre air
pressure levels and permissible load bearing
capacities at the end of section 3).
Extendible pick-up hitch (where fitted)

The pick-up hitch can be extended hydraulically to
give a better view when towing the trailer fixture.
Operated through one of the remote control valves
fitted at the rear, the hitch is extended or retracted
using the remote control valve lever. The hoses
should be connected with one another in such a way
that moving the remote control valve lever to E
(Extend) will extend the hitch and moving the lever to
R (Retract) will retract the hitch.
NOTE: The figure shows hitch operation
through remote control valve number I.
However, it may be operated using an
alternative valve where required.
328
Using the 3-stage lifting fixture, lower the hitch

until it is clear of the locking latches and then
extend the hook or clevis rearwards by moving
the remote control valve lever to (E). With the
drawbar extended, continue to lower the hitch
until it is just above the ground.
Position the tractor so that the pick-up hitch (2)
is under the equipment towbar opening. Turn
the position control clockwise to raise the hitch
until the equipment drawbar is just clear of the
ground.
Fully retract the pick-up hitch by moving the remote
control valve lever to (R). To assist in retracting the
hitch, release the tractor brakes to allow movement of
the tractor towards the equipment. Re-apply the
handbrake before leaving the tractor seat.
With the hitch in the fully retracted position, raise it
slowly until an audible click indicates that the locking
latches (1) have engaged the tie bars (3).
329
NOTE: The maximum static support load on the
hitch hook must not exceed 3000 kg.
3 - 108
To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the

pick-up hitch, remove the two securing pins
(1) and withdraw the hook assembly.
Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with
the two pins.
Maximum permissible support load
PTO to Maximum permissible

towbar hitch point static support load
406 mm 1500 kg
330
When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar
may be stored in the bracket (1), attached to
the rear axle. Ensure the clamp screw (2), is
fully tightened to retain the drawbar in the
bracket.
IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on

the drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the
total weight on the rear axle does not exceed
the maximum static lowering load or the
maximum load on the rear wheel, whichever is
the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and
Loads at the end of Section 3).
331
3 - 109
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES

HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES
SYSTEM (not Italy)
Hydraulic trailer brakes can be connected to the
hydraulics on the rear of the tractor using a quick
release coupling (1).
NOTE: The position of the trailer brake coupling
may vary slightly from that shown, depending on
the version of the remote control valves fitted.
If the trailer brake hose is connected to coupling,
the trailer brakes are activated automatically as
soon as foot brake is used to stop the tractor.
IMPORTANT: The brake pedals must be locked to
one another to ensure that the trailer brakes
function, that the tractor brakes act evenly and that
the all-wheel brake system (only tractors with all- 332
wheel drive) function.
WARNING: When the engine is switched

off, the trailer brake system cannot be
supplied with hydraulic pressure. When
parking the tractor and trailer, apply the
parking brake on the tractor and trailer while
! the engine is still running. If the brake pedals
are locked, apply the parking brake, switch
off the engine and lock the wheels
immediately. Always lock the brake pedals if
a trailer with a hydraulic brake system is
connected to the tractor.
NOTE: Always leave the dust protection cap fitted

when the trailer brake coupling is not being used.
Legislation in most countries prescribes that trailer
brakes may only be connected to the tractor
coupling using an appropriate plug-in coupling.
3 - 110
HYDRAULIC TRAILER
BRAKE SYSTEM (Italy only)
The hydraulic trailer brake system for tractors
intended for the Italian market functions slightly
differently from the standard system described above.
If the trailer brake hose is connected to the coupling,
the trailer brakes are activated automatically if you use
the foot brake to stop the tractor or if the parking brake
is applied when the engine is running. When the
engine is switched off, the trailer brakes remain
applied.
IMPORTANT: The brake pedals must be locked to
one another to ensure that the trailer brakes function,
that the tractor brakes act evenly and that the all-
wheel brake system (only tractors with all-wheel drive)
333
function.
To relieve hydraulic pressure and to release the trailer
brakes, start the engine, press both brake pedals and
release the parking brake.
NOTE: The light (1) on the instrument panel flashes
in conjunction with the critical alarm to signal that the
hydraulic oil pressure level in the trailer brake circuit is
too low. Switch off the engine and determine the
cause.
ATTENTION: If the trailer brake warning light starts
to flash, the trailer brakes are automatically
activated.
NOTE: Always leave the dust protection cap fitted
when the trailer brake coupling is not being used.
Legislation in most countries prescribes that trailer
brakes may only be connected to the tractor coupling
using an appropriate plug-in coupling.
334
3 - 111
PNEUMATIC TRAILER BRAKES

PNEUMATIC TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM (not
Italy)
WARNING: Single line braking systems for

trailers are designed for maximum speeds of
up to 25 km/h. Tractor/trailer combinations
with dual line brake systems may be used at
higher speeds, they must however
! correspond to local rulings at all times. The
gross weight of the tractor, i.e. tractor and
trailer and/or the individual weight of the
trailer, must not exceed the total weight
specified in local rulings for trailer use.
The following text describes the operation of

pneumatic trailer brake systems which can be
installed as an option to hydraulically actuated trailer
brakes.
The system consists of an engine driven compressor,
with one or, depending on the system installed, two
reservoirs, a pressure gauge, control valves, two or
three couplers and the relevant pipework.
The couplers fitted on the rear of the tractor can be
connected to the trailer's single or dual line braking
system. One or both versions can be installed. The
pneumatic lines connected to the couplers have
colour coding in black, red and yellow. The black line
is used for a single line brake system, and the red and
yellow ones for dual line brake systems.
IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes only function if

both brake pedals are pressed. Only therefore lock
the brake pedals if there is a trailer connected to
the tractor.
NOTE: The parking brake is connected to the main

control valve. The trailer brakes are activated as
soon as the parking brake is applied.
3 - 112
Operation
When starting the engine with a trailer connected to
the tractor's pneumatic brake system, place chocks
under the wheels, then release the parking brake. The
warning light (1) remains on until the air pressure has
increased to between 4.5 and 5.5 bar.
The pressure level continues to rise. This is displayed
by the pneumatic diagram on the dot matrix display.
Select the pneumatic diagram for the enhanced
keypad.
335
The air reservoir (s) should reach operating pressure
level within 3 minutes of the start. This may however
take longer depending on the size of the pneumatic
reservoir(s) fitted in the trailer brake system.
When the pressure level required is reached, a loud
plopp sounds which signals that the pressure relief
valve has opened to drain off overpressure.
IMPORTANT: Press the brake pedals several times

to ensure that the pressure falls (as shown) when
the brakes are activated, and rises, when they are
released. Never drive the tractor when the trailer
brake warning light is illuminated.
336
IMPORTANT: If you press the brake pedals
without applying the parking brake, ensure that the
telltale for front wheel drive (1) lights up and that all
brake lights are working.
IMPORTANT: Various trailer brake systems can be

supplied. Check the operating manual provided by
the trailer manufacturer before connecting a trailer
to the tractor's pneumatic brake system.
Clean the connection couplings on the trailer and
tractor before connecting up the hoses. Ensure that
the connections are secure. Regularly check the
trailer brakes to ensure that they are functioning
correctly. 337
WARNING: Do not overload the brakes on

steep downhill stretches. When driving the
! tractor downhill, use the same gear as when
driving uphill.
3 - 113
Dual line brake system

When using a trailer with a dual line brake system,
connect the supply line to the red coupler (2) and the
control line to the yellow coupler (1).
IMPORTANT: The dual line brake system only
functions when the red and yellow lines are
connected.
Red line (brake supply line) – (2): The red coupler is
supplied with compressed air at full system pressure.
This is the brake supply line and it supplies the
pneumatic reservoir(s) on the trailer. If the trailer brake
system is separated from the tractor for any reason,
the pressure falls to zero and the trailer brakes are 338
activated.
Yellow line (control line) – (1): When the tractor
brakes are activated, the air pressure is increased
and supplied to the control valve on the trailer via the
yellow coupler until full system pressure is reached.
The trailer brake is activated in proportion to the
pressure exerted on the tractor's brake pedals.
Single line brake system
An additional coupler is installed if the trailer has a
single line brake system. Connect the hose to the
black coupler (1).
There is always a pressure level of 5.5 bar at the
couplers once the tractor's parking brake has been
released. When the tractor brakes are activated, the
pressure falls to zero and the trailer brakes can
therefore be activated.
339
Additional pneumatic supply

An additional pneumatic supply is available to pump
up the tyres etc. . The pneumatic supply operates at
full system pressure of 7 or 8 bar depending on the
system installed. When not in use, ensure that the
dust protection cap is fitted.
When pumping up tyres, always use a standard
pneumatic pistol with pressure gauge. Connect the air
hose to the pneumatic connection (1) on the left-hand
side of the rear axle funnel.
340
3 - 114
PNEUMATIC TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM (only Italy)

This system functions in a similar way to the dual line
brake system described above. The one difference is
that it uses a combined dual coupler. Please read the
entire text relating to pneumatic trailer brakes and the
following text:
The coupler is protected using a sheet metal cap.
Press the handle (2) downwards to remove the cap.
The handle is held in place by a strong spring. You
only need to exert a little pressure to push it down and
to unlock the cover (1).
341
Connections
To simplify handling, the lines to the couplers are
marked using colour coding. The supply line to the left
coupler (1) is red and the control line to the right
coupler (2) is yellow. The trailer hoses have a dual
plug-in coupler. Press the handle (3) downwards and
insert the coupler from the trailer. When the handle is
released, the trailer and tractor couplers are locked to
another.
342
3 - 115
Tractor/trailer brake power splitter

When it leaves the factory, the brake power splitter is
set so that the trailer has the maximum available level
of braking power. This setting can be retained for most
conditions and thereby ensures even braking
performance.
In some cases, situations may arise in which this
setting gives the trailer too much braking force. In
such cases, the trailer's braking force can be reduced
slightly by turning the controller (1) anti-clockwise.
First pull out the button to turn the valve. Once the
setting is complete, press in the button to save the
setting. When using a different trailer, the controller (1)
must be again be turned as far as it will go in a
clockwise direction.
WARNING: The brake force control function

is extremely sensitive and should not be
343
turned by more than half a rotation before a
test run has been undertaken with a fully
laden trailer. Further adjustments should be
! undertaken using the same procedure. Non-
observance could result in an uneven
distribution of braking force between tractor
and trailer if the valve is turned too far in an
anti-clockwise direction.
3 - 116
EQUIPMENT MOUNTING POINTS

Your tractor is fitted with various threaded holes for
mounting optional equipment. All threaded holes are
suitable for M20 x 2.5 threads. The depth of the holes
varies with their location. To avoid damaging the
thread or metal housing, it is important that the hole is
checked before inserting mounting pins.
Gearbox housing
The figure shows the mounting points on the left-hand
side of the tractor. The same threaded holes can be
found on the right-hand side.
NOTE: When using threaded bores in the gearbox

housing in particular to fit equipment, ensure that
the cab or other parts under the tractor are not
acting as obstacles.
IMPORTANT: Do not fit equipment or brackets on

the cab mounting points.
344
Fron taxle carrier
NOTE: If you have front end weights on your
tractor, these holes will have already been used to
secure the front weight carrier.
IMPORTANT: When attaching equipment to

the mounting points, adjust the tyre pressures
to compensate for the additional weight.
Ensure the maximum axle loads for the tractor
are not exceeded, see page 3 - 130.
345
Depending on tractor specification, the number of
holes in the side of the axle support casting may vary.
NOTE: Consult the torque levels for fasteners
specified in section 8 before screwing attached
equipment to the mounting points. Check the fastener
torque after one hour of operation and on a daily basis
thereafter.
346
3 - 117
FRONT WHEEL TRACK SETTING

With variable track adjustment
The cross-section diagrams show the wheel rim and
well settings in relation to the hub with different track
settings. The following track widths are available:
Track settings with 24" and 28" front wheels
Position Track width

A 1566 mm
B 1662 mm
C 1766 mm
D 1862 mm
E 1966 mm
F 2062 mm
G 2166 mm
H 2262 mm
The track widths given in the above table are based

on a tractor fitted with a standard all-wheel drive front
axle.
For models with spring-loaded front axles, add 18
mm.
NOTE: The track widths shown in the above
table are nominal values. Depending on the
tyre size, the effective track widths may
deviate from these by anything up to 25 mm.
IMPORTANT: If the optional steered front

fenders are fitted, the narrower track width
settings may not be possible since there
sufficient distance between the wheels or rim
and the fender or its mounting cannot be
observed.
IMPORTANT: When working on tractors with

front fenders, ensure that there is always
sufficient space between the fender and
wheel. With the narrower track settings a foul
condition may occur between the tyre or
fender and the tractor when the wheels are
turned to the full lock position particularly
when the axle is fully articulated. Adjust the 347
fenders and/or steering stops accordingly to
avoid this situation.
3 - 118
Front wheels without track adjustment

Two track width settings are possible on tractors with
front wheels without track adjustment. You can
replace the front wheels to gain the narrow (A) or mid-
way (B) track setting if required.
NOTE: Tractors with a 50 km/h gearbox are
fitted with front wheels without track
adjustment.
Tractors which are fitted with a 50 km/h gearbox, have
rigid front wheels and two track settings. To change
the track width, replace both front wheels to set a
narrow (A) or wide (B) track setting as required.
NOTE: When changing the left and right wheel
units, ensure that the "V" at the top of the tyre tread
is always facing forwards in the direction of travel.
348
Track width settings with 24” and 28” wheels
All-wheel drive front axle Position Track width
Standard – min. setting A 1854 mm
Standard – max. setting B 2080 mm
Spring-loaded – min. setting A 1821 mm
Spring-loaded – max. setting B 1978 mm
NOTE: The track widths shown in the above

table are nominal values. Depending on the
wheel rim overhang, the effective track widths
may deviate from these by anything up to 28
mm.
Fitting the front wheels
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, the retaining bolts
must be tightened to the tightening torques listed
below. After this, check the values after 50 operating
hours and then as required.
Well to hub nuts 294 Nm
Well to rim nuts 250 Nm
(as required)
WARNING: Never operate the tractor with
loose wheel rims or wells. Always tighten the
nuts at the recommended intervals and to
the torque levels specified. Vehicle owners
! should ensure that all steering system parts
are in a safe and good condition to ensure
appropriate safety and to meet with
legislation.
3 - 119
Steering stops
The axle has steering stops at either end. The stops
are adjustable and should be set so that there is a
minimum distance of 20 mm between the tyres and all
tractor parts when the wheels are locked all the way to
the left or right and the axle is fully articulated.
Loosen the lock nut (1) and turn the stop bolt (2)
anticlockwise to reduce the steering lock and turn
clockwise to increase the steering lock. Tighten the
lock nut to 150 Nm.
349
Front wheel track setting

Once the track width has been set, the front wheel
tracking may have to be reset. For correction
operations, the front wheels should be parallel to one
another.
Measure the distance between the wheel rims at the
height of the wheel hubs at the front of the wheels.
Turn both front wheels through 180° and recheck the
measurements but now take them on the rear
wheels. This will rule out the possibility of
measurement errors caused by the wheel rims not
being round. The correct tracking setting is 0+/-3mm.
If the toe-in of the front wheels has to be reset,
proceed as follows:
Remove the self-locking nut (2) at the left end of the
track rod, throw away the nut and pull out the track rod
head (1). Loosen the lock nut (3) and tighten or loosen
the track rod head to the track rod to extend or
shorten the track rod as required. Re-insert the track
rod end and, when the alignment is correct, secure
with a new self-locking nut. Tighten the self-locking
nut to 100 Nm and the lock nut to 180 Nm.
350
3 - 120
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

The optional, self-compensating front axle
suspension system increases stability, steerability,
operating comfort and traction. The front axle
suspension is activated automatically as soon as the
tractor is started. It does not however function at
speeds of less than 1.5 km/h.
When operating at speeds of up to 12 km/h, the front
axle suspension may be locked if not needed. A
warning light in the switch indicates that the lock is
active.
To lock the suspension, press the upper part of the
switch (1). Again press the top of the switch to
reactive the suspension function.
At speeds of more than 12 km/h, the suspension is
automatically reactivated even if the lock is active. In
such situations, the warning light remains on.
NOTE: If the warning light in the lock switch starts
to flash, this indicates an error in the suspension 1
system. Consult you authorised dealer.
IMPORTANT: Refer to ballast and tyres for how to
use front weights with front axle suspension, see
page 3 - 131.
351
WARNING: The hydraulic oil in the front

axle suspension system operates under very
high pressure levels. Upon escaping,
pressurised hydraulic oil may penetrate the
! skin and cause serious injuries. The piping in
the front axle hydraulics must not be fitted or
removed by untrained staff. Non-observance
of these instructions may result in serious
injury.
WARNING: If a gear has been selected with

the engine running and the axles jacked up, the
self-compensating function of the front axle
! suspension may cause the axles to undertake
corrections (to move up and down). The
suspension should be locked to ensure that the
tractor is stable.
3 - 121
FRONT WHEEL FENDER

(where fitted)
Two types of fender can be supplied. They are fully
adjustable and can be used with different tyre sizes
and track widths. Both versions are adjusted in a
similar way. The following text however describes how
to adjust the dynamic fenders.
Dynamic fenders turn with the front wheels when the
tractor is steered. As the steering lock angle
increases, a spring-loaded rotary journal in the fender
bracket limits the lock angle of the fenders. This
prevents the fender from colliding with the engine hub
or loader frame while the wheels continue turning
under the fenders. This allows for smaller turning
circles which would not be possible with a standard
fender, especially with narrow track settings.
Lateral adjustment, fender support
The fender can be moved horizontally towards or
away from the tractor by moving the shims (2) on both
sides of the fender support (1).
Vertical adjustment
The fender can be moved vertically by placing the
bolts (3) in the corresponding holes in the fender
support. Some holes are shaped as longitudinal holes
so that the fender can tilt forwards or backwards.
352
Fender steering stop
Both fender support arms are fitted with an adjustable
stop bolt (3). When turning, the bolt moves against a
fixed stop (2) on the axle housing and restricts the
angle about which the fender can turn while the
wheels can continue turning under the fenders. If
necessary, the stops may have to be adjusted if you
change the track width or tyre size.
Lateral adjustment, fenders
The mounting points (1) for the bracket and support
arms under the fenders allow for additional lateral
adjustment whereby the fender can be centred over
the tyre. 353
NOTE: Once adjusted, ensure that there is still
a minimum gap of 60 mm between the tyre and
fender or attachment where fitted. Tighten all
mounting pins.
3 - 122
REAR WHEEL TRACK SETTING

WARNING: Your tractor is fitted with lights
which corresponds to the rulings for use on
public highways. If you adjust the track
setting which was undertaken in the factory,
you may have to position the lights according
! to national legislation or to install additional
lighting. Before travelling on public highways,
you should also ensure that the total width of
the tractor does not exceed the maximum
width permitted in your country.
354
The rear track width can be set by adjusting the wheel

rim to the well, the rim and/or well to the axle hub or
by changing the rear wheels.
WARNING: Tractor wheels are very heavy.

Exercise caution when working with the wheels.
! When storing, ensure that they cannot fall down
and cause injuries.
Note: Depending on tyre size and tractor model, there

are three well designs. The wells shown are as
follows:
355
Square centre well – variable track (type 1)
Round centre well – variable track (type 2)
Round centre well – fixed track (type 3)
The well type fitted affects the track setting. Determine
which well type is fitted and note the following table
and Figure 348 to gain the wheel rim and well settings
required for the necessary track setting.

! nuts at the recommended intervals and to
356
the torque levels specified.
3 - 123
The cross-section diagrams show the wheel rim and

well settings in relation to the hub with different track
settings.
IMPORTANT: When changing the left and

right wheel units, ensure that the "V" at the
top of the tyre tread is always facing forwards
in the direction of travel.
When fitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts
to the tightening torque given below and check
again once the tractor has driven 200 m, after 1
hour and again after 8 hours of operations and then
check at 50-hour maintenance intervals.
Rear well to hub nuts 250 Nm
Rear well to rim nuts
M16 bolts 250 Nm
Track settings
Adjustable rim (types 1 and 2)
Track setting Rim types 1 and 2

Figures 345, 346
A 1412 mm
B 1510 mm
C 1614 mm
D 1710 mm
E 1812 mm
F 1910 mm
G 2014 mm
H 2110 mm
NOTE: When using larger tyre sizes, it may be

the case that the narrower track settings
cannot be set as a result of the minimum
distance between the tyres and fenders or
equipment. The dimensions specified in
Figure 348 are nominal values and should
only be used as a reference. The track
settings may differ depending on wheel type
and tyre size.
357
3 - 124
Fixed rim (type 3)

A minimum track adjustment of around 50 mm is
possible by changing the wheel units on both sides.
A track width adjustment of approx. 50 mm per side
can be achieved by swapping over the wheels.
Track width Wheel disc type 3

(18.4 x 38 tyres)
A 1730 mm
B 1834 mm
NOTE: Depending on rim type, the above

settings may vary by approximately 10 mm. 358
3 - 125
WHEEL SETTING
The cross-section diagrams in Figures and 351 show the wheel rim and well settings with different track settings.
Two track width settings for each axle type are given in each table. These settings are the minimum or maximum
settings possible when both wheel units are set all the way in (towards the tractor) and all the way out (away from
the tractor).
Track setting Rim and well setting
1524 - 1830 mm
1727 - 2030 mm
1930 - 2235 mm
2133 - 2438 mm
359
WHEELS WITH STEEL CENTRE WELL SECURED BY BOLTS ON RIM FLANGE

NOTE: When using larger tyre sizes, it may be NOTE: The track widths in Figure are nominal
possible that the narrower track settings and may differ depending on wheel and tyre
cannot be set as a result of the minimum size.
distance between the tyres and fenders.
3 - 126
Track setting Rim and well setting
1524 - 2133 mm
1625 - 2235 mm
360
WHEELS WITH STEEL CENTRE WELL WELDED ONTO RIM FLANGE
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 351 are nominal IMPORTANT: When changing the left and right
and may differ depending on wheel and tyre size. wheel units, ensure that the "V" at the top of the
NOTE: When using larger tyre sizes, it may be tyre tread is always facing forwards in the direction
possible that the narrower track settings of travel.
cannot be set as a result of the minimum
distance between the tyres and fenders.
IMPORTANT: Tractor wheels are very heavy.
Exercise caution when working with the
wheels. When storing, ensure that they cannot
fall down and cause injuries.

! nuts at the recommended intervals and to
the torque levels specified.
When fitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to

the tightening torque given below and check again
once the tractor has driven 200 m, after 1 hour and
again after 8 hours of operations and then check at
50-hour maintenance intervals.
Well to hub nuts
8 bolts, wheels with steel well 260 Nm
Well to rim nuts
Wheels with steel well, M16 nuts 240 Nm
3 - 127
BALLAST AND TYRES

General Selection of ballast
Maximum tractor performance depends on use of the When the engine loads vary, the optimum tractor
correct ballast and tyre selection. The tractor must weight also changes. This means that ballast may
have the correct weight for the current application in possibly have to be added or removed to achieve
order to achieve maximum efficiency. optimum performance. The correct ballast improves
the way in which the tractor operates and drives.
The tyres fitted on your tractor must be able to support
the weight of the tractor and equipment and must offer The volume of ballast required is affected by:
sufficient towing capacity for converting the tractor's
engine performance into usable towing performance. ● The weight of the tractor
Always maintain correct air pressure in the tyres so
that loads can be carried. Do not overpump the tyres.
● The ground characteristics and towing
conditions
NOTE: Radial tyres are operated at lower air
pressure levels and when filled correctly, their sides
● The type of attached equipment: the attached
equipment, semi-mounted equipment or fitted
will have a bulge of up to 20%.
equipment
Factors which affect tyre performance
● The operating speed
● The correct air pressure for the load
● The engine load
● The correct bending of the sides
● The tyre type and size
● The correct wheel slip
● The tyre pressure
● The correct tyre size for the expected load Do not use more ballast than is required. Remove
excess ballast when no longer needed.
● The correct liquid ballast fill
IMPORTANT: Only attach the weight which is
actually needed to give sufficient towing capability
● The same tyre pressure levels in both the
and stability. Excess, unnecessary ballast weight
tyres on one axle
loads the tractor and increases fuel consumption.
When calculating ballast, take into account the
maximum load bearing capacity of the tyres, as
specified in the tables as of page 3 - 137. For more
information or assistance in selecting ballast,
please contact your authorised dealer.
Too little ballast:
● Bumpy ride
● Too much wheel slip
● Lack of power
● Tyre wear
● Above-average fuel consumption
● Reduced productivity
3 - 128
Excessive ballast: FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

IMPORTANT: When using tractors with front axle
● Higher maintenance costs suspension, the correct ballast is absolutely
essential for optimising the function of the
● Increased driveline wear suspension system, in particular when operating
heavy rear-mounted equipment. Sufficient front
● Loss of power ballast must be provided for this work. Preference
should be given to wafer weights rather than liquid
● Increased soil compaction ballast.
● Above-average fuel consumption Under certain operating conditions with too little front
ballast, the suspension may be deactivated and error
● Reduced productivity code L7 is displayed. Stop the tractor, switch off the
engine and restart to delete the error code and
To achieve maximum output under heavy-duty reactivate the suspension. If the error code
towing conditions, the ballast should take the form reappears, more front ballast should be fitted. Ensure
of liquid ballast, cast iron weights or a combination that the maximum axle and vehicle loads are not
of both. exceeded.
Front-loaded ballast may possibly be required for Ballast limits
stability and safe steering if weight has been moved
from the front wheels to the rear wheels and if rear The ballast is restricted by the load bearing capacity
attachments are raised using the 3-point power lift of the tyres or tractor. Every tyre has a recommended
linkage. load bearing capacity which should not be exceeded
(see page 3 - 137).
When raising a rear attachment into the transport
position, the weight carried on the front wheels If more weight is needed for traction, larger tyres
should be at least 20 % of the total tractor weight. should be used.
The ballast can be increased by fitting cast iron
weights with pins or by filling the tyres with liquid
WARNING: Additional front ballast may be calcium chloride. We would recommended screw-on
needed when transporting large equipment cast iron weights because they are easy to remove
! fitted to the power lift. Always travel slowly
over uneven ground regardless of how much
when no longer needed.
front ballast is being used.
For optimum performance and efficiency, tractors with

single axle drive should be provided with ballast so
that around one third of the total tractor weight (minus
the weight of the equipment) is on the front wheels.
Tractors with all-wheel drive should be provided with
ballast so that around 40 - 45 % of the total tractor
weight is on the front wheels.
For stability during operations and transport, if
necessary, fit additional front-mounted ballast. Front-
mounted ballast does not always ensure sufficient
stability if the tractor is operated on even ground at
high speed. Under these conditions, reduce speed
and drive carefully.
When using front mounted equipment, additional
weight may have to be fitted to the rear wheels to
attain towing capability and stability.
3 - 129
TRACTOR WEIGHT
Maximum gross weight of the vehicle
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross

vehicle weight specified. This can cause an
overload condition that may invalidate the
warranty and may exceed the load rating of
the tyres. The maximum permissible gross
vehicle weight is the weight of the tractor plus
ballast plus any attached equipment such as
sprayers, tanks etc. in the raised position.
Models Maximum axle load Total weight

Front # kg Rear kg Total kg
All models 3600 III 7300 8700
# Incl. front loader in raised position but with no load in

the bucket.
IMPORTANT: The braking regulations of individual

countries may prescribe lower gross weight limits
for the vehicle for transport by road than those
specified in the above tables.
Intermittent loading
IMPORTANT: For intermittent loading, the

front axle load (including loaded front loader
bucket) may be increased ((see Intermittent
loading), provided that the road speed does
not exceed 8 km/h and the track width settings
are maintained within the limits shown:
Maximum front axle loading Track
All (Restricted operation) setting
models kg mm
6200 1727 - 2032
NOTE: The total axle weight is weighed with
attached equipment in a raised position and
liquid and cast iron weights fitted. The weight
is measured by only placing the rear wheels
or front wheels on the scales.
IMPORTANT: Braking regulations in some
countries may impose lower gross vehicle
weight limits for road transport.
3 - 130
Front weight discs

The front weight discs can be supplied as follows:
45 kg weight discs are available in sets of 4, 8 and 16.
When combined with the weight carrier, their weights
are as follows:
4 weights,
including weight carrier 270 kg
8 weights,
16 weights,
361
To install the weights, hook the upper part of the
weight over the lip on the carrier and then slide to the
centre of the carrier. A recess in the lower part of the
weight will interlock with a locating pad beneath the
carrier. Fit as many weights as required and then use
the tie rods (1) and holder plates supplied to clamp
into place.
Use a tie rod of a suitable length to clamp down the
weights and tighten the locking nut to a torque of 169
Nm.
To remove the weights, reverse the above procedure.
362
3 - 131
Two front weights can be replaced by one trailer pin.

This results in the following total weights:
2 weights, trailer pin 294 kg and weight carrier
The weight carrier has a towing device fitted. A hitch
pin (1) is available which is clamped onto the weight
package at the front when the weights are fitted.
363
If the front weights and carrier are not installed, a
trailer pin (1) can be obtained which is secured
directly onto the rear axle block with a bolt.
364
3 - 132
LIQUID BALLAST
IMPORTANT: Liquid ballast should not be

used for tractors which are operated at speeds
in excess of 40 km/h because this could have
a negative impact on the drive quality.
Filling the front and rear tyres with liquid ballast is a
convenient way of increasing the weight. We
recommend using a calcium chloride-water solution.
The solution has a lower freezing point and a higher
density than normal water.
IMPORTANT: The use of calcium chloride as

liquid ballast for tyres is banned in some
countries. Ensure that national legislation is
observed. Use cast iron weights as an
alternative to liquid ballast.
The following tables provide the volumes of calcium
chloride and water needed for each tyre size and are
based on 0.6 kg of calcium chloride per litre of water.
The figures given in the table fill the tyres to 75%. This
calcium chloride-water solution offers protection from
freezing down to an ambient temperature of -50 °C.
WARNING: When mixing the ballast

solution, the calcium chloride flakes are
added to the water and the solution must be
stirred until the calcium chloride has
dissolved.
! Never add the water to the calcium chloride
because this produces high levels of heat.
Should any flakes come into contact with
your eyes, rinse your eyes straightaway with
cold water for at least 5 minutes. Seek
medical aid immediately.
3 - 133
Front tyre ballast
Tyre size Water Calcium chloride Total weight of solution per tyre
litres kg kg
11.4 - 24 77 46 123
12.4R - 24 94 56 150
13.6R - 24 123 73 196
14.9R - 24 151 90 241
13.6R - 28 119 71 190
14.9R - 28 170 102 272
16.9R - 28 219 131 350
14.9R - 30 174 104 278
380/70R - 24 117 70 187
420/70R - 24 149 89 238
380/70R - 28 144 86 230
420/70R - 28 166 99 265
440/65R - 28 167 100 267
480/65R - 28 200 120 320
480/70R - 28 222 133 355
520/60R - 28 210 126 336
540/65R - 28 251 150 401
320/85R - 34 144 70 188
3 - 134
Rear tyre ballast
Tyre size Water Calcium chloride Total weight of solution per tyre
litres kg kg
18.4R - 30 286 171 457
12.4 - 32 123 73 196
16.9 - 34 270 162 432
18.4 - 34 292 175 467
13.6R - 38 176 105 281
16.9R - 38 275 165 440
18.4R - 38 312 187 499
20.8R - 38 429 257 686
18.4R - 42 352 211 563
14.9R - 46 245 147 392
480/70R - 34 248 148 396
520/70R - 34 307 184 491
480/70R - 38 270 162 432
520/70R - 38 318 190 508
540/65R - 38 316 189 505
600/60R - 38 365 219 584
600/65R - 38 419 257 670
600/60R - 38 436 261 697
650/65R - 38 510 306 816
320/90R - 50 153 91 244
IMPORTANT: Only attach the weight which is

actually needed to give towing capability and
stability. Excess, unnecessary ballast weight
loads the tractor unnecessarily and increases
fuel consumption. When calculating ballast,
take into account the maximum load bearing
capacity of the tyres, as specified in the tables
as of page 3 - 137. For more information or
assistance in selecting ballast, please contact
your authorised dealer.
WARNING: Tractor wheels are very heavy.

Exercise caution when working with the
wheels. When storing, ensure that they
cannot fall down and cause injuries.
! Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel
rim or well. Always tighten the nuts at the
recommended intervals and to the tightening
torque levels specified.
3 - 135
TYRE CARE axle nuts to the specified torque. Check the

seat of the nuts every day until the tightening
When you receive your tractors, check the air
torque has stabilised.
pressure in the tyres and check this again every 50
operating hours.
● Refer to the section on tractor ballast before
When checking the tyres, investigate the sides and calculating the ballast for the tyres.
tread for damage.
The tyre air pressure affects the load which a tyre can
● Ensure that the wheel jack is placed on solid
level ground.
carry.
Refer to tyre air pressure and load tables on page 3 - ● Ensure that the wheel jack has sufficient load
137. Do not exceed the load for the specified pressure bearing capacity.
levels. Do not overfill or underfill the tyres. If the tyres
on your tractor are not listed, please contact your ● Use appropriate support blocks to support the
authorised dealer for pressure and load information. tractor while carrying out tyre repairs.
● Do not work or start the engine with any parts

WARNING: Pumping up and maintaining of your body under the tractor while the
the tyres may be a dangerous task. tractor is jacked up.
Whenever possible, trained staff should be
! requested to maintain or fit tyres. To avoid ● Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
serious injury and death, observe the
following safety precautions: ● Ensure that the rim is clean, free of rust and
undamaged. Do not weld, solder or try to
repair a damaged rim in any other way.
● Never repair tyres on public highways.
● Only pump up a tyre if the rim is fitted on the
● Do not pump up a steering tyre (front tyres on tractor or secured so that the tyre cannot
tractors with two axle drive) to more than the suddenly start to move.
maximum pressure specified on the tyre by
the manufacturer or more than the maximum ● When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a
pressure recommended by the authorised plug-in valve adapter with a separate
dealer or tyre supplier. pressure gauge so that the operator can
remain at some distance while the tyre is
● Never pump a tractor tyre (front tyres on an being pumped up. Use a safety cage, where
all-wheel tractor or all rear tyres) to more than fitted.
2.8 bar. Once this pressure level is reached,
if the bead is not seated properly on the rim,
let out air, lubricate the bead with a
water/soap solution and pump the tyre back
up. Do not use oil or grease. If the bead is not
seated properly on the rim, pumping up to
more than 2.8 bar may cause the bead or rim
to break with explosive force and thereby
cause serious injuries.
● If the bead is not sitting correctly, set the air

pressure to the recommended operating
pressure.
● Do not pump back up a tyre which has been

driven on when flat or in far too soft a
condition until the tyre has been inspected for
damage by a qualified person.
● Once you have refitted the wheel, tighten the
3 - 136
TYRE AIR PRESSURE LEVELS AND PERMISSIBLE LOAD BEARING

CAPACITIES
The efficiency of the radial tyres is specified by a load
index and speed signal and not by the number of ply
layers which can often be found on diagonal tyres.
Figure 356 shows typical markings on the side of
radial tyres.
NOTE: Radial tyres have the 'A8' and/or 'B'
speed signal which indicate the maximum tyre
speed classifications. Tyres featuring the A8
symbol are suitable for speeds of up to 40
km/h, and tyres featuring the 'B' symbol may
be operated at speeds of up to 50 km/h.
365
The maximum load bearing capacity of the tyre is

specified by the load bearing capacity index shown on
the side. The loads in the following tables are for
individual tyres designed for use at speeds of up to 40
or 50 km/h. The two right-hand columns specify the
maximum permissible load per tyre at speeds of up
to 40 or 50 km/h.
WARNING: When operating at high road

speeds, the tyre air pressures and maximum
permissible load bearing capacities specified
by the manufacturer must be observed. In
! order to gain the correct air pressure levels
and load capacities for the tyres on your
tractor, please contact your authorised
dealer or tyre dealer.
1. Load index
2. Speed symbol for
40 km/h
3. Speed symbol for
50 km/h
4. Maximum load/tyre pressure at
40 km/h
5. Old marking for number of ply layers
3 - 137
Tyre air pressure – bar 40 50

Tyre 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0 2,2 2,4 2,6 2,8 km/h km/h
Load
Load bearing capacity per tyre (kg) – 30 km/h
size index
380/70 R24 125A8 1295 1415 1530 1650 - - - - - - 1650
(122B) 1295 1415 1530 1650 - - - - - - 1650
13.6R-28 123A8 1170 1275 1320 1400 - - - - - - 1400
(120B) 1285 1400 1450 1550 - - - - - - 1550
18.4R-30 142A8 1930 2095 2275 2430 - - - - - - 2430
(139B) 2120 2300 2500 2650 - - - - - - 2650
480/70 R38 145A8 2300 2500 2700 2900 - - - - - - 2900
(145B) 2300 2500 2700 2900 - - - - - - 2900
20.8R-38 153A8 - - - - 2210 2410 2460 2865 3140 3350 3350
(150B) - - - - 2430 2650 2900 3150 3450 3650 3650
18.4R-42 148A8 - - - - - - 2300 2725 2900 3150 3150
(148B) - - - - 1800 2120 2300 2725 2900 3150 3150
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limits at various air
pressure levels for a selection of the tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures apply
pertyre and only serve as approximate values. For more information on air pressure levels and
load capacities for your tyres, please contact your authorised dealer or tyre dealer.
3 - 138
SECTION 4
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL NOTES
INTRODUCTION
Section 4 guides you stage by stage through
everything you need to know to keep your new tractor
in perfect condition. The lubrication and maintenance
table on page 4 - 10 provides an overview of all the
operations required. Please contact your dealer if you
have any concerns regarding lubrication and
maintenance.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Read and note all the safety precautions provided in
the introduction at the start of this manual in the
Tractor maintenance section.
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids
properly.
WARNING: Do not check, lubricate,

! maintain or undertake settings on the tractor
with the engine running.
DURING THE FIRST 50 OPERATING HOURS

During the first 50 operating hours of your new tractor,
in addition to the maintenance work listed, undertake
the following checks every 10 hours or daily:
● Check gearbox/rear axle/hydraulic oil levels
● Check wheel nuts are secure
● Oil levels of front wheel hubs (all-wheel drive)

IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground
and, if possible, extend all cylinders before
checking the oil levels.
4-1
SECTION 4 – LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
FIRST 50 HOURS MAINTENANCE

Ensure that the following additional maintenance work
is undertaken during the first 50 hours maintenance.
The check points are noted in the list for the first 50
hours maintenance at the end of this manual.
● Check engine oil level

● Change the hydraulic oil filter (all models)*
● Check the oil level of the gearbox, rear axle
and hydraulics
● Check the oil level in the differential of the all-
wheel front axle
● Check the oil level of the all-wheel front axle
hubs
● Check and reset the wheel brakes
● Check all screw connections on the air intake
● Inspect the composite V-belt
● Check and retension the air compressor V-
belt (compressed air trailer brake system -- if
fitted)
● Tighten all hose connections on the cooling
system
● Check the tightening torque of the retaining
bolts of the safety cab and safety frame
● Check the tightening torque of the front
weight clamping bolts (if fitted)
● Check the tightening torque of the retaining
bolts in the exhaust manifold
NOTE: The tasks listed for the 50 hours check
are important. If they are not carried out,
components may fail prematurely and the
tractor's service life may be shortened.
Tractors with variable displacement
hydraulic pump only
IMPORTANT: During the first inspection after

50 operating hours, the hydraulic oil filter (1)
MUST be replaced with the l a r g e r spare filter. Do
NOT replace the filter with a filter of the same
size because this will reduce the hydraulic
system's output.
Filter dimensions Length Diameter
Original part
(factory fit) 204mm 94.3mm
Spare filter 254mm 116.8mm 366
4-2
PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION FUELLING THE TRACTOR

Always keep the area around the filler, level or drain
plugs, dipsticks and filters clean to prevent WARNING: Observe the following
contamination during oil or filter changes etc. Before information when handling diesel fuels:
connecting up lifting cylinders check whether the oil in Do not smoke near diesel. Due to the high
them is clean, has not degenerated due to a long risk of fire or explosion, diesel must never be
period in storage and is of the correct quality. mixed with gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or
dieselhol (a mixture of diesel and alcohol).
Before applying grease, remove dirt from the
lubrication nipples to prevent the ingress of any ! These mixtures are even more explosive
than pure gasoline when stored in closed
foreign bodies. Remove any excess grease from the
containers, such as a fuel tank. Do not use
nipples after lubrication.
these mixtures. Dieselhol is also not
FLEXIBILITY OF MAINTENANCE INTERVALS approved as a result of its possible
inadequate lubrication of the fuel injection
The intervals given in the lubrication and maintenance system.
table are guidelines for use under normal operating
conditions. ● Clean the area around the filler plug and keep
Adapt the intervals to your environment and working it free of clumps of earth.
conditions. Under unfavourable working conditions
(wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty), the intervals ● Top up the tank at the end of the day to reduce
should be shortened. the formation of condensate over night.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE TABLE ● Never fill up with fuel or remove the tank cap
when the engine is running.
The table on page 4 - 10 contains intervals at which
routine checks, lubrication work and/or settings must ● When fuelling, do not leave the fuel filler
be undertaken. Use the table as a general reference nozzle unattended.
guide for maintaining the tractor. The operations are
described after the table. ● Do not fill the tank to capacity. Leave space for
expansion. If the original tank cap is lost, use a
genuine replacement tank cover and screw on
securely.
● Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The quality of the fuel used is an important factor for
reliable performance and satisfactory engine service
life. The fuel must be clean, refined correctly and not
corrode parts of the fuel system. Only use a good
quality fuel obtained from a specialised dealer.
Use number 2-D at temperatures in excess of -7C.
Use number 1-D at temperatures below -7C.
To ensure optimum combustion and minimal engine
wear, the fuel selected should satisfy the
requirements relating to use and characteristics as
listed in the following table.
4-3
DIESEL FUEL SECTION TABLE FUEL STORAGE

Undertake the following safety actions to ensure that
General clas- Boiling Cetane Sulphur any stored fuel remains free of dirt, water and other
sification of point rating content
fuels impurities.
(max.) (min.) (max.)
No. 1-D 288 C 40* 0,3 % ● Store fuel in black iron tanks. Do not use
galvanised tanks because the zinc coating
No. 2-D 357 C 40 0,5 % reacts with the fuel and forms compounds
which dirty the fuel injection pump and
NOTE: If operated at idling speed for long periods, injection nozzles.
during cold weather of less than 0 C or if
continuously operating at an altitude of more than ● Do not fit the storage tanks in direct sunlight
1500 m, use fuel number 1-D. and fit them at a slight angle so that any
deposits in the tanks do not collect in front of
* If operating continuously at low temperatures or at the outlet aperture.
high altitudes, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is
needed. ● Fit the drain plug at the lowest point opposite
If you are using a diesel fuel with a sulphur content of the outlet aperture to simplify the process of
more than 0.5 % , the oil and filters will have to be draining off moisture and deposits.
changed more frequently than specified in the
maintenance plan. ● If the fuel is not filtered by the storage tank,
place a funnel and fine-mesh sieve in the
We do not recommend using diesel fuels with a tank filler neck when refuelling.
sulphur content of more than 1.3%.
For the best fuel economy, use fuel number 2-D ● Plan fuel deliveries so that summer fuels do
whenever the ambient temperature permits. not have to be used in the winter.
Do not use fuel number 2-D at temperatures of less

than -7 C. Cold temperatures cause the fuel to thicken
which in turn may not allow the engine to run. (If this
happens, contact your dealer.)
To ensure that a fuel satisfies the necessary
requirements, only work with trustworthy fuel
suppliers. Both the fuel supplier and fuel user are
responsible for ensuring clean fuels.
4-4
FILLING THE FUEL TANK

1. Clean the area around the filler neck (1) to
prevent dirt from entering the tank and the fuel
from being contaminated.
2. Take off the cap and while refuelling, leave on a
clean surface. The cap is secured to the tank by
means of a chain so that it cannot be lost.
367
3. When refuelling is complete, refit the tank cap
and screw on tightly.
IMPORTANT: Always replace a lost or defective

tank cap with a genuine replacement cap.
Fuel fill volumes
MXU100, MXU110 180 litres
MXU115 - MXU135 254 litres
368
4-5
GUARDS
ENGINE HOOD
For safety the engine hood must be closed and
correctly latched before operating the tractor.
Additional protective plates prevent intervention in the
fan and air conditioning unit V-belts when closing the
engine hood.
The engine hood is attached by hinges at the rear
end and thereby allows for convenient access to the
engine for daily maintenance purposes. Two gas
struts (located under the hood) assist in raising the
hood to either of two positions. An engine hood
bracket keeps the engine hood in the position
required.
To open the engine hood, pull the unlocking handle (1,
Fig. 3) upwards. The gas-operated compression
springs then open the engine hood to the first position
where it is held by a nylon retaining strap which is
secured to the hood at the front. All routine
maintenance operations may be performed with the
hood raised to this position. 369
If you want to fully fold up the engine hood, you have

to unhook the retaining strap (1) from its fastening and
hold it securely while the gas-operated compression
springs open the hood all the way.
NOTE: The engine hood need only be fully
opened for maintenance interventions which
should wherever possible be undertaken by
your sales partner.
To close the hood, pull it fully down ensuring the
retaining strap has been re-fitted to the anchor
bracket. You will hear a click which indicates that the
interlock has been triggered. Check that the engine
hood is properly closed. 370
4-6
RIGHT RAMP (where fitted)

Folding ramps can be fitted to your tractor.
For better access to the right-hand brake actuator,
hydraulic oil filter(s), battery etc., the ramp can be
folded up and secured in this position.
To fold up the steps, take out the locking pin (1).
371
Fold up the step (1) and place the locking pin back in
the hole intended to hold the step in a horizontal
position.
372
COVER OF RELAY AND FUSE BOX
The injection-moulded trim on the right-hand interior
of the cab can be easily removed for maintenance
work. Remove the four screws (1) and trim to gain
access to the relays and connectors.
373
COVER OF FUSE BOX
To gain access to the fuses, undo the two retaining
screws (1) from the panel on the right-hand side of the
cab.
374
4-7
LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS

Lubricants
The correct engine oil viscosity depends on the
ambient temperature. Refer to the table to select the
correct engine oil for your tractor.
NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of
extreme temperatures are encountered, local
lubricant practices are acceptable. These may
be, for example, using SAE 5W30 at
particularly low temperatures or SAE 50 at
extremely high temperatures.
Sulphur content of the fuel
The intervals for changing the engine oil and filters are
shown in section 4. The fuel available locally may
however have a high sulphur content which means
that the intervals for changing the engine oil and filters
should be adjusted as follows:
Sulphur content as % Oil change interval 375
Below 0.5 Normal
0.5 – 1.0 Half of normal interval
Above 1.0 A quarter of the normal interval
NOTE: We do not recommend using diesel fuels

with a sulphur content of more than 1.3%.
Coolant
NOTE: *Use antifreeze (50%). and clean, soft
water (50%). To reduce the amount of deposits
and corrosion, the water used in the cooling
system must comply with the following limit
values.
Total hardness: Chloride: Sulphate
300 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
IMPORTANT: *Refer to operation 32, see page 4
- 43, for using antifreeze when the antifreeze
listed above is not available. In countries with a
warm climate where antifreeze is not available,
just use clean water.
4-8
LUBRICANT AND COOLANT SPECIFICATION
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES CIH International

COOLANTS specification specification
Engine oil
4 cyl. engines:
Akcela type 1 -- engine oil (15--W40) 10 litres MS1121 APICH--4, ACEAE5,
Akcela type 1 -- engine oil (10--W30) 6 cyl. engines: MS1121
15 litres
Oil fill for gearbox, rear axle and

hydraulic system
Akcela Nexplore (10W--30) 62 litres MAT 3525 APIGL4, ISOVG32/46,
semi-powershift M2C134D
Oil fill of front wheel drive MAT3525 APIGL4, ISOVG32/46,
axle--Akcela Nexplore (10W30) M2C134D
- All axles 9 litres
hubs--Akcela Nexplore (10W30)
- All models - per hub 1.5 litres
- All models with wheel brakes – per hub 3 litres
Front PTO gearbox oil APIGL4, ISOVG32/46,
Akcela Nexplore (10W--30) 0.4 litres MAT3525 M2C134D
Cooling system
Capacity
--6 cylinder models 25 litres
--4 cylinder models 23 litres
Water 50%
Akcela Premium -- antifreeze 50% MS 1710 Ethylene glycol
Air conditioning compressor oil N/A PAG--E13,

Oil with low viscosity SP10 As needed ISO100 viscosity
Brake fluid LHM

Akcela LHM brake fluid As needed liquid ISO 7308
Lubrication nipples and bearings
Akcela multipurpose grease As needed 251HEP NLGI2,Li--Ca
4-9
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE TABLE
Operation no.
Lubricate
Page no.
Replace
Adjust
Check
Maintenance
Clean
Wash
Drain
interval Maintenance required
When the warning 1 Engine air filter, outer element X X see page 4 - 12
lights light up: 2 Brake fluid level X X see page 4 - 14
3 Fuel system water separator X X see page 4 - 15
Every 10 hours or 4 Engine coolant level X X see page 4 - 16
daily
5 Engine oil level X X see page 4 - 17
6 Windscreen washer system tank (where X X see page 4 - 18
fitted)
7 of pneumatic tank(s) of trailer brake (where X X see page 4 - 18
fitted)
Every 50 hours 8 Radiator, oil cooler and air conditioning X X see page 4 - 19
condenser
9 Cab air filter X X see page 4 - 20
10 All lubrication nipples X see page 4 - 21
Every 100 hours 11 V-belt for air conditioning and brake X X see page 4 - 26
compressors (where fitted)
Every 300 hours 12 Poly V-belt X X see page 4 - 27
*13 Battery acid level (tropical climate) X X X see page 4 - 27
14 Front axle suspension cylinder, upper X see page 4 - 28
bearing
15 Gearbox/rear axle/hydraulic oil levels X X see page 4 - 29
16 Parking brake X X see page 4 - 29
17 Front PTO shaft (where fitted) X see page 4 - 30
Every 600 hours #18 Engine oil and filter X see page 4 - 31
19 Hydraulic and gearbox oil filters X see page 4 - 33
20 Air filter, outer element X see page 4 - 33
21 Engine air intake connections X see page 4 - 34
22 Fuel pre-filter and fuel filter elements X X see page 4 - 35
23 All-wheel drive front axle and hub oil level X X see page 4 - 37
Every 1200 hours or 24 Cab air filter X see page 4 - 38
annually
25 Gearbox/rear axle/hydraulic oils and filters X see page 4 - 39
26 All-wheel drive axle differential oil X see page 4 - 40
27 All-wheel drive axle hub oil X see page 4 - 41
28 Front PTO X see page 4 - 41
29 Battery acid level (temperate climate) X X X see page 4 - 42
Every 1200 hours or 30 Engine coolant X see page 4 - 43
every 2 years
31 Engine air filter, inner element X see page 4 - 47
32 Check and adjust valve tappet clearance X X see page 4 - 48
33 Air drier cartridge of pneumatic brake X see page 4 - 49
Every 3 years 34 Air conditioning system x x x see page 4 - 50
4 - 10
General maintenance 35 Foot brakes X X see page 4 - 51

36 Tightening torque of front and rear wheel X X see page 4 - 52
nuts
37 Tyre pressures and condition X X see page 4 - 52
38 Automatic pick-up hitch with hook X X see page 4 - 53
39 Drain bottles for remote control valves X see page 4 - 54
40 Headlight and work lamp setting X X see page 4 - 55
41 Change the bulbs X X see page 4 - 56
42 Replace the fuses X X see page 4 - 58
43 Clean the tractor X X see page 4 - 63
* The batteries of tractors operated in a temperate climate must be checked every 1200 hours. Refer to operation 33.
# The interval between oil changes must be reduced if the diesel fuel has a high sulphur content or the tractor is being
used at extremely low temperatures.
4 - 11
WHEN WARNING LIGHTS ARE

ILLUMINATED
OPERATION 1
MAINTENANCE OF OUTER ELEMENT OF

ENGINE AIR FILTER
Only undertake maintenance work on the outer
element if the restriction indicator light on the
instrument console lights up or every 600 hours,
whichever comes first. As soon as the indicator light
lights up, undertake the maintenance task within one
operating hour.
IMPORTANT: Only undertake maintenance

work on the outer element at the
recommended maintenance intervals or if the
restriction indicator light lights up. If the filter
is cleaned too often, this reduces its service
life.
The dry air filter, which is located in the rear right
under the engine hood, consists of an inner and an
outer paper element in a metal housing.
1. Unlock the three retaining brackets (1) and take
off the air filter unit's cover.
376
2. Take the outer element (1) out of the air filter
unit by turning the end of the filter slightly in a
clockwise direction (to release the seal). Pull
the filter out of the housing in a straight line (not
at an angle) and ensure that the inner element
remains in place.
377
4 - 12
IMPORTANT: Do not modify or remove the inner

element (1).
3. Check the inside of the outer element. If dust is
found, the outer element is defective and must
be replaced. The inner element should then
also be replaced.
4. Depending on its condition, clean the outer
element using method A or B.
378
Method A
NOTE: The outer element may be cleaned up
to 5 times before being replaced (method A or
B).
Gently tap the ends of the element against the palm of
your hand.
IMPORTANT: The element must not be tapped

against a hard surface, otherwise it will be
damaged.
Method B
379
Use compressed air of less than 2 bar. To do this, enter
the air nozzle into the element. Keep the nozzle
150 mm away from the element and blow the dust out
of the element (by blowing from the inside out).
WARNING: Wear eye protection and a

! facial mask when undertaking this work.
Before using the cleaned or a replacement filter,

check the filter for damage such as cracks, dents or
punctures. A dent may make it impossible for the
seal to function properly, and a filter with bunched
pleats may reduce the engine output and increase
fuel costs.
380
Clean the inside and outside of the sealing face of
the outlet tube before inserting the filter.
Apply a thin coat of engine oil or silicon to the
sealing faces of the inside of the outer element and to
the outside of the inner element.
Re-insert the outer element in the housing and press
firmly on the outer rim (not on the elastic centre).
381
4 - 13
OPERATION 2
Check brake fluid level
When the telltale on the instrument panel indicates
that the brake fluid level is low, check the level in the
tank.
The tank is located in the rear right under the engine
hood and supplies the rear axle and front axle brakes
(where fitted) with brake fluid. Undertake a visual
check of the fluid level in the tank. It must never fall to
below the MIN mark (3) engraved into the tank. If
necessary, take off the filler cap (1) and use the
correct brake/clutch mineral oil to top up to the MAX
mark (2). When topping up, do not exceed the
maximum level.
IMPORTANT: Ensure you don't spill any brake
fluid over the tractor because it may damage
the paintwork.
WARNING: Always use the correct type of 382

mineral oil for the brakes. Mixing different
types of fluid may damage the internal
hydraulic brake elements and therefore
! restrict the braking action. Observe the
instructions provided on the brake fluid
container. For precise brake fluid
specifications see page 4 - 9.
4 - 14
OPERATION 3
DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR OF

FUEL SYSTEM
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or separating parts
of the fuel injection system, carefully clean the
working area to prevent contamination.
When the telltale on the instrument panel indicates
the presence of water in the fuel separator, drain the
fuel filter and separator immediately as follows:
1. Take sensor wire off the drain plug
2. Open the drain plug (1) on the separator tank
by loosening the control button.
3. Drain the dirty fuel until only clean fuel flows 383
out. Collect the fuel in a suitable container and
dispose of properly. Close the drain plug and
connect the sensor wire.
4 - 15
EVERY 10 OPERATING HOURS

OR DAILY
(whichever comes first)
OPERATION 4
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the recovery tank when
the engine is cold. The coolant level should be
above the bottom line on the recovery tank. If
coolant is required, remove the pressure cap
and add a 50/50 water and antifreeze mixture
as specified on page 4-9 of this manual.
WARNING: The cooling system is

pressurised and the pressure level is
regulated by the radiator cap (1). The
radiator pressure cap should not be used for
top up purposes. It is dangerous to remove
the radiator or expansion tank pressure caps
! while the engine is hot. When cool, use a
thick cloth and turn the radiator pressure cap
slowly to the first stop and allow any
pressure to escape. Avoid letting your skin
come into contact with the coolant. Observe
the safety precautions on the packaging of
the antifreeze and additive.
384
WARNING: Avoid letting your skin come into

contact with the coolant. Observe the safety
! information provided on antifreeze and inhibitor
containers.
Check the coolant level in the expansion tank when

the engine is cold. The coolant level in the expansion
tank should be above the lowest line. If the coolant
has to be topped up, take off the pressure cap and fill
with a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze (refer to
instructions in section 8 of this manual).
NOTE: If coolant cannot be seen in the expansion

tank, the coolant level in the cooler must be
checked. Check the system for leaks and repair if
necessary.
Take off the radiator filler cap (1) once the system
has cooled down. Top up with the volume required
to bring the coolant level up to just below the upper
edge of the filler neck. Refit the cap and top up the
expansion tank with coolant as described above.
385
4 - 16
OPERATION 5
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on level
ground and the engine has been off for at least 5
minutes.
1. Take out the oil dipstick, clean and slide back all
the way in.
2. Take the dipstick out again and read off the oil
level. The oil level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the dipstick.
386
3. If the oil needs topping up, take out the dipstick

and fill with new oil until a level of between the
MIN and MAX marks is reached on the dipstick.
An oil volume between the two marks
corresponds to 3.5 litres.
NOTE: Do not fill with oil above the MAX mark on
the dipstick. Overflowing oil is burnt, causes smoke
and therefore produces a false impression of oil
consumption. Do not start the engine if the oil level
is below the MIN mark.
4. Re-insert the dipstick.
For the precise oil specification and viscosity, refer to
section 8.
4 - 17
OPERATION 6
CHECK WINDSCREEN WASHING SYSTEM TANK
The tank for the windscreen washing system is
located in the rear left under the cab. The front and
rear windscreen wipers are fed from the same tanks.
Take off the cover (1) and top up with windscreen
wiper washing solution until the bend (2) in the filler
neck is reached. In cold weather, use a solution
containing antifreeze.
387
OPERATION 7
DRAIN AIR TANK (PNEUMATIC TRAILER
BRAKES WHERE FITTED)
Drain the pneumatic tank(s) every 10 hours or daily,
whichever comes first.
Apply the tractor's parking brake, lock all wheels and
switch off the engine.
All hydraulic trailer brake systems have a pneumatic
tank under the left end of the rear axle.
There is a lock on the underside of each tank. To
drain the tank, slide the lock (1) to the side (it
doesn't matter which direction) and allow the air to 388
flow out. The tank is filled next time the tractor is
started.
4 - 18

All the aforementioned checks, plus the
following work:
OPERATION 8
CLEAN THE RADIATOR, OIL COOLER AND AIR
CONDITIONING COMPENSATOR CORES
Check the cores for impurities or blockages. If nothing
of this kind is found, then undertake cleaning as
follows:
WARNING: During the cleaning process,

wear eye protection and protective clothing.
! Move bystanders out of the hazard area so
that they are not at risk from flying particles.
1. Use compressed air or a high-pressure cleaner 1

of less than 7 bar for cleaning.
SC06B289
389
2. The air conditioning system’s condenser is
mounted in front of the intercooler and is carried
on a hinge to make access easier when 2
servicing.
3. Open the quick release fastener (1) for the oil
cooler by turning anti-clockwise. Pull the oil
cooler out anti-clockwise to get access to the
engine radiator 2
4. To get access to the back of the condenser, first
open the two catches (2) on the left-hand side
of the condenser.
SC06B290
390
5. To clean the cooling packs, raise the condenser
with both hands and swivel to the right (see
figure 391).
6. Feed the air or the water through each cooling
pack from the rear one to the front one. First
clean the engine radiator, the transmission
cooler, the intercooler and then the air
conditioning condenser.
Carefully straighten any bent fins.
NOTE: If the cores are blocked by oily residue, use

a high-pressure cleaner and cleaning agent to
SC06B291
remove.
391
4 - 19
OPERATION 9
CLEAN CAB AIR FILTER
The air which flows into the cab is filtered three times
by the blower. Two filters are fitted outside the cab
and there is a recirculating air filter inside the cab.
Before undertaking maintenance work on the filter,
switch off the blower and close the roof hatch, all
windows and one door. Slam the other door shut. The
resultant pressure will remove the majority of loose
particles of dirt from the underside of the external
filters.
NOTE: In damp weather, do not switch the
blower on before starting maintenance work. It
is very difficult to remove damp particles from
the filter without washing them out.
EXTERNAL FILTERS
NOTE: The filters are made from a specially treated
material and have a rubber seal on their upper side.
Ensure that the element is not damaged when you
remove it.
Removing the filter - comfort cab
The filters are positioned on both sides of the
cab. To remove the fresh air filter, unscrew the
locking pin (2) from the front of the filter cover.
Remove the cover and pull out the filter element (1).
392
Removing the filter- low roof
The two filters are positioned on the rear of the cab.
Unscrew the retaining bracket (2) and fold the filter
cover downwards. Carefully remove the filter from the
housing and ensure that the filter element is not
damaged.
Blow the filter elements dry with compressed air of
less than 2 bar. Blow the dust off the upperside and
down through the element. Hold the nozzle at least
300 mm away from the element to ensure you don't
damage the filter material.
Clean all the filter chambers with a damp, lint-free
cloth. Re-insert the filter elements with their clean 393
sides facing up and fit the cover.
4 - 20
INTERNAL FILTER
NOTE: The filter is made from a specially treated
material and has a rubber seal on its upper side.
Ensure that the filter element is not damaged during
removal.
To remove the internal filter, unscrew all retaining
screws (1) by turning anti-clockwise and take out the
filter cover.
394
Remove the cover (1) and pull the filter (2) out of the
housing.
NOTE: The filter is made from a specially
treated material and has a rubber seal on its
upper side. Ensure that the element is not
damaged when you remove it.
Blow the filter elements dry with compressed air of
less than 2 bar. Blow the dust off the clean side and
down through the element to the dirty side. Hold the
nozzle at least 300 mm away from the element to
ensure you don't damage the filter material.
395
OPERATION 10
ALL LUBRICATION NIPPLES
Apply grease to all bearings and use a grease gun to
grease all lubrication nipples (refer to 386 Figures up
to and including 401).
For precise lubrication specifications see page 4 - 9
Right and left lift rods (with setting via lock nut)
Attach grease gun to lubrication nipples as shown.
396
External lift cylinder (where fitted)
397
4 - 21
Front axle journal

398
Rear axle journal
399
Front wheel fender (where fitted)
400
Panhardrod journal (spring-mounted all-wheel
drive axle)
401
4 - 22
Links (spring-mounted all-wheel drive axle)

402
Drive shaft universal joint
(spring-loaded axles)
403
Steering cylinders (all all-wheel drive axles)
404
Upper swivel bearing, axle housing and ends of
steering cylinder
NOTE: The left swivel bearing is shown. The
right swivel bearing has a similar lubrication
nipple.
405
4 - 23
Lower swivel bearing (all-wheel drive axles)

NOTE: The left swivel bearing is shown. The
right swivel bearing has a similar lubrication
nipple.
406
Towing hitch rear (auto-engagement type)
407
408
Towing hitch rear (with slider frame)
Attach grease gun to lubrication element as shown.
409
4 - 24
Front power lift

410
Drawbar for heavy loads
Attach grease gun to lubrication element as shown.
411
4 - 25

Undertake the following checks:
OPERATION 11
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR V-BELT
Check the entire length of the belt for debris, cracks,
holes and general wear. If in any doubt, always fit a
new belt.
412
COMPRESSOR V-BELT TENSION (pneumatic
trailer brakes – if fitted)
Check the entire length of the belt (1) for debris,
cracks, holes and general wear. If in any doubt,
always fit a new belt.
413
4 - 26

following work:
OPERATION 12
CHECK POLY V-BELT
Check the entire length of the belt for debris, cracks,
holes and general wear. If in any doubt, always fit a
new belt.
Ensure that the belt is positioned correctly on the
pulleys and check that the belt tensioner is functioning
perfectly.
OPERATION 13
STARTER BATTERY
IMPORTANT: This operation relates to tractor

414
batteries operated in a tropical climate. The battery
acid level of tractors operated in a moderate
climate only has to checked every 1200 hours or
every 12 months.
To access the battery, raise the right-hand ramp, as

previously described in this section, and use the
locking pin (1) to hold the ramp in its upper position.
Turn the locking screw (2) on the battery cover 90
degrees anticlockwise to remove the cover.
415
4 - 27
Remove the locking screw and nut (1) and swivel the
battery compartment to the front of the tractor.
Then unscrew the six vent plugs off the top of the
starter battery and remove these (tractors with high
performance batteries only).
Check whether the electrolyte fluid in all cells
covers the top of the separator plates.
If necessary, use distilled or de-mineralised
water to top up to the correct level in tractors
with high-performance batteries. Do not use
too much liquid. Never use tap water, rain
water or water from any other source to top up.
416
IMPORTANT: I If the batteries are so flat that

the terminal voltage is less than 7 volts, a
special charging procedure is required.
Consult you authorised dealer.
417
OPERATION 14
LUBRICATE FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
CYLINDER OF UPPER BEARING, ALL-WHEEL
DRIVE
418
4 - 28
OPERATION15
CHECK GEARBOX/REAR AXLE AND
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVELS
Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on level
ground, all cylinders are extended and the engine has
been off for at least 5 minutes.
Check the oil level in the sight glass (1) to the right of
the rear axle housing. Ensure that the oil level is
between the minimum and maximum mark on the
sight glass.
419
If necessary, remove the filler cap (1) and top up with
oil.
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground
and extend all hydraulic cylinders (where
fitted) before checking the oil levels. When
certain front wheel/rear wheel combinations
are fitted, the tractor has to be raised at the
front or rear so that it is perfectly level before
the oil level can be checked.
420
OPERATION 16
PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT
Lock the front wheels, jack up the rear of the tractor so
that the rear wheels just lose contact with the ground.
Unlock brake pedals.
Apply the parking brake so that it snaps into the 4th
detent. Remove or loosen the rubber bellow, unfasten
the lock nuts (2) and tighten the adjustment nuts (1)
on the cables until both wheels start to lock. Release
the parking brake and check that both wheels are
spinning freely. Apply the parking brake to ensure that
the system is functioning perfectly. Tighten the lock
nuts. 421
Undertake a road test by applying the parking brake

to stop the tractor. If the cable is set correctly, the
tractor should come to a stop straight away.
4 - 29
OPERATION 17
OIL LEVEL CHECK ON GEARBOX D OF FRONT

PTO
Unscrew the oil level check and filler plug (1) and
check that the oil covers the bottom edge of the
opening. If necessary, top up through the opening
with clean oil and replace the plug.
You will find the specification for the specified oil see
page 4 - 9.
422
4 - 30

following work:
OPERATION 18
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
IMPORTANT: Operation 23 is the normal 600-

hour interval for engine oil and filter changes.
The interval between oil changes may
however be affected by other factors:
Operation at low temperatures
If engines are operated at temperatures of less than -
12° C or under difficult circumstances, an engine oil
change should be carried out every 300 operating
hours. (The oil filter only has to be changed after the
normal maintenance interval of 600 hours.)
Tractor usage
If the tractor is used for less than 600 operating
hours a year, the engine oil and oil filter should be
changed every 12 months.
Sulphur content of the fuel
In some countries, the fuel available locally may have
a high sulphur content which means that the intervals
for changing the oil and filter should be adjusted as
follows:
● Sulphur content of between 0.5 and 1.0 %
– change engine oil every 300 hours.
● Sulphur content of between 1.0 and 1.3 %
– change engine oil every 150 hours.
If in doubt, follow the recommendations for engine oil
and filter changes which can be found on the sticker
on the underside of the engine hood.
WARNING: Avoid contact with hot engine

oil at any cost. If the engine oil is particularly
! hot, leave to cool down to a moderate
temperature before continuing.
Oil fill volumes (with filter):

MAXXUM 110, MAXXUM 120, MAXXUM 130 10 l
MAXXUM 115, MAXXUM 125, MAXXUM 140 15 l
4 - 31
To replace the oil and filter:

1. Leave the engine to warm up until it has
reached operating temperature. Switch off
the engine and unscrew the engine oil drain
plugs (1) from the rear of the oil pan on both
sides of the engine. Catch the oil in a
suitable container and dispose properly.
2. Screw the drain plugs back in once the oil
has drained off.
423
3Clean the area around the oil filter. Unscrew the
oil filter (1) and dispose of. Collect any residual
oil which may escape and dispose of properly.
4. Clean the sealing face of the new filter. Apply a
thin coat of oil to the seal of the new filter and
insert the filter. Screw in until the seal makes
contact with the assembly face, then tighten
with another 3/4 to 1 full turn. Do not turn too
far.
424
5. Remove the oil dipstick/filler plug and top up
with the correct volume of fresh oil (see below).
Ensure that oil of the correct quality and
viscosity is used.
6. Leave the engine to idle for 3 minutes and then
switch off.
7. Check the drain plugs and oil filter areas for
leaks.
8. Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to flow into the
crankcase, and then use the oil dipstick to
check the oil level. The oil level should be
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
dipstick. Fill with more oil than is required. 425
NOTE: Do not fill with oil above the MAX mark

on the oil dipstick. Overflowing oil is burnt,
causes smoke and therefore produces a false
impression of oil consumption. Do not start the
engine if the oil level is below the lower mark.
9. Re-insert the dipstick / filler plug.
For the precise oil specification see page 4 - 9.
4 - 32
OPERATION 19
CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL AND GEARBOX OIL
FILTERS
The filter type depends on the tractor specification. All
filters are located on the right under the floor.
Clean the area around the hydraulic oil filter and then
unscrew the filter and dispose of.
The main filter (3) and charge filter (1) are only fitted
in tractors with a hydraulic pump with an adjustable
displacement volume
1. Charge filter
2. Main filter retaining nuts
3. Main intake filter
426
OPERATION 20
CHANGE OUTER ELEMENT OF ENGINE AIR
FILTER
Remove the outer element (1) as described in
operation 1 and dispose of.
Clean the inside of the filter housing with a lint-free
cloth wrapped around a rod. Ensure that the inner
element is not damaged. Fit a new outer element.
427
4 - 33
OPERATION 21
CHECK CONNECTIONS OF ENGINE AIR INTAKE
Check that all connection terminals of the intake
system are secure on both sides of the engine.
On the left of the engine, check the intake
connections of the air filter at points (1) and (2). Do not
overtighten.
428
Check the connections between the turbocharger
and intercooler at points (2) and (4).
On the right of the engine, check the connections
between the intercooler and intake manifold at points
(1) and (2). Do not overtighten.
The side of the filter system where clean air enters
must be perfectly sealed at connections (1) and (3).
429
On the right of the engine, check that the exhaust
aspiration connections at points (1) and (2) are sealed
and that the clamps are secure.
430
4 - 34
OPERATION 22
CHANGE FUEL PRE-FILTER AND FUEL FILTER ELEMENTS
FUEL PRE-FILTER
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or separating parts

of the fuel injection system, carefully clean the
working area to prevent contamination.
1. Remove drain plug (1) from underside of filter.
2. Take off the sensor wire so that you can fully
rotate the drain plug.
3. Open the drain plug on the separator / filter by
loosening the control button. Let the fuel
escape. Collect the fuel in a suitable container
and dispose of properly.
4. Unscrew filter from filter head, take off and
dispose of correctly.
5. Place a new filter in the filter head.
431
6. Before fitting the new filter, apply a thin coat of
oil to the filter seal.
7. Rotate the filter until the filter seal touches the
filter head. Then turn the filter another 3/4 turn
and tighten to the correct tightening torque
(15 Nm). Do not overtighten.
8. Take off and replace fuel filter in the same way.
432
4 - 35
Bleed air from fuel system

1. Release the harness from the sensor and then
unscrew the sensor and remove.
433
2. Unscrew the manual pump control button and
pump through fuel until it comes out without any
bubbles.
3. Screw the manual pump control button back in.
4. Refit the sensor and harness.
434
4 - 36
OPERATION 23
ALL-WHEEL DRIVELUBRICATION
Front axle
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure
that the oil goes all the way up to the lower edge of
the aperture. If necessary, top up with clean oil
through the aperture and insert the screw again.
435
Front wheel hub
Move one front wheel and the oil level plug into the 3
o'clock position as shown.
Remove the combined level/filler plug and ensure that
the oil goes all the way up to the lower edge of the
aperture. If necessary, top up with clean oil through
the aperture and insert the screw again.
Repeat the process on the other front wheel.
436
4 - 37

OR 12 MONTHS
(whichever comes first) All the aforementioned
checks, plus the following work:
OPERATION 24
CHANGE CAB AIR FILTER
External filters
To remove the external filters, turn the quick-release
fastener (1) one 1/2 turn to the left and thereby
release the front part of the filter cover (2). Remove
the cover and filter element (1). Dispose of the filter
elements properly.
437
Clean both filter chambers with a damp, lint-free
cloth.
Insert new filter elements. There is an arrow stamped
onto the side of the filter to show you the direction of
flow. Fit the filter so that the arrow is pointing up. Refit
all covers.
NOTE: The filters are made from a specially
treated material and have a rubber radial seal.
Ensure that the element is not damaged when
you remove it.
438
Internal filters
Turn the self-locking screws (1) until the cover comes
loose to remove the internal filter.
439
Remove the filter cover (1) and filter element(2).
Dispose of the filter element properly.
Clean the filter chambers with a damp, lint-free cloth.
Insert the new filter element and ensure that the arrow
on the filter is pointing towards the rear of the tractor.
Refit the filter cover.
440
4 - 38
OPERATION 25
CHANGE GEARBOX/REAR AXLE/
HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTER
Before changing the oil, allow the engine to idle and
start up the hydraulic system until the oil heats up.
Park the tractor on a level piece of ground, lower the
3-point linkage and switch off the engine. Apply the
parking brake and lock the wheels on both sides with
chocks.
WARNING: Avoid contact with hot

engine oil at any cost. If the engine oil is
! particularly hot, leave to cool down to a
moderate temperature before
continuing.
To change the oil:

1. Take off the drain plug (1) and drain all the oil
into a suitable container and dispose of
properly.
2. Once the oil has been drained, screw the drain
plug back in. 441
IMPORTANT: Undertake operation 23

(replace hydraulic and gearbox filter) before
filling up with oil.
3. Unscrew the filler plug (1) and top up with new
oil.
4. Leave the engine to idle and switch on the
hydraulic system. Fully raise the three-point
linkage.
5. Switch off the engine and wait five minutes.
During this time, check the system for leaks.
442
6. Check the oil level on the sight glass (1). If
necessary, top up the oil until the oil level is
between the 'MIN' and 'MAX' marks.
NOTE: When topping up, do not exceed the

maximum level.
Oil fill quantity: 62.0 litres
443
4 - 39
OPERATION 26
CHANGE ALL-WHEEL DIFFERENTIAL OIL
Park the tractor on level ground and apply the parking
brake.
To change the oil:
1. Take off the drain plug (1) and drain all the oil
into a suitable container and dispose of
properly.
2. Screw the drain plug back in. Remove the
level/filler plug.
444
3. Top up with new oil until it reaches the lower
edge of the level / filler aperture (1). Screw
level/filler plug back in.
For the precise oil specification, see page 4 - 9.
Oil fill volumes:
All axles 9.0 l
445
4 - 40
OPERATION 27
CHANGE WHEEL HUB OIL OF EXTERNAL ALL-
WHEEL PLANETARY AXLE
Park the tractor on level ground and apply the parking
brake.
To change the oil:
1. Position the wheel so that the filler/drain/level
plug (1) is at the lowest point. Take off the plug,
drain all of the oil into a suitable container and
dispose of properly.
2. Turn the wheel until the combined level/filler
plug (1) is in the 3 o'clock position as shown.
3. Fill the wheel hub with new oil until the oil
reaches the bottom edge of the level/filler
aperture. Screw the plug back in.
4. Repeat the process on the other wheel hub.
446
For the precise oil specification, refer to section 8.

Oil fill volumes (each hub):
All types
Standard and suspended axles 1.5 l
All types
Standard and suspended axles with brakes 3.0 l
OPERATION 28
OIL CHANGE FOR FRONT PTO GEARBOX
Park on a flat surface and apply the parking brake.
1. Place a suitable container under the gearbox
housing and unscrew the oil level check plug (1) and
drain plug (2). Allow the oil to completely drain into the
container and replace the plug (2). Discard the used
oil properly.
2. Fill with fresh oil at opening on oil level check/filler
plug until the lower edge of the opening is coated.
447
An oil volume of around 400 ml is needed to fill the
gearbox housing.
4 - 41
OPERATION 29
BATTERY
IMPORTANT: This operation only relates to

tractor batteries operated in a temperate
climate. The battery acid level of tractors
which are operated in tropical climates has to
be checked every 300 hours. Refer to
operation 16.
To access the battery, raise the right-hand ramp, as
previously described in this section, and use the
locking pin (1) to hold the ramp in its upper position.
448
Turn the locking screw (2) 90 degrees anticlockwise

to remove the battery cover.
Remove the locking screw and nut (1) and swivel the
battery compartment to the front of the tractor.
Unscrew the six vent plugs fitted on the top of the
battery (tractors with high performance batteries
only).
Check whether the acid level in each cell is above the
top edge of the separator plates.
If necessary, use distilled or de-mineralised water to
top up to the correct level in tractors with high-
performance batteries. When topping up, do not
exceed the maximum level. Never use tap water or
water from a rain barrel or any other source.
449
Prevent the build-up of Verdi Gris (corrosion) by
cleaning the battery pin and applying a thin coat of
Vaseline or another similar substance.
IMPORTANT: If the batteries are so flat that the
terminal voltage is less than 7 volts, a special
charging procedure is required to start the tractor
up again. Consult you authorised dealer.
450
4 - 42

OR 2 YEARS
(whichever comes first) All the aforementioned
checks, plus the following work:
OPERATION 30
COOLING SYSTEM
During manufacture, the engine cooling system is filled
with a high quality antifreeze and water solution. The
antifreeze contains a foam and corrosion inhibitor. This
inhibitor increases and extends the protection offered by
conventional antifreezes. The inhibitor will result in:
● improved corrosion protection.
● fewer deposits.
● minimised cylinder wall erosion (pitting).
● reduced foaming of coolant.
The foam and corrosion inhibitor must be replenished
at regular intervals to maintain the optimum level of
protection. This protection is provided by draining and
flushing the system and refilling with a 50% solution of
ethylene glycol antifreeze (or, where this antifreeze is
not available, with a corresponding dosage of foam
and corrosion inhibitor) and water. For explanations,
see text below.
Coolant see page 4 - 9
Draining and filling the cooling system
WARNING: Leave the engine to cool

before draining off the coolant. The
cooling system operates under pressure
controlled by the radiator cap. It is
dangerous to unscrew the radiator cap
cover when the engine is hot. When the
system has cooled down, use a thick cloth
! and turn the cap slowly to the first stop
and allow the pressure to escape before
fully removing the cap. Avoid letting
y o u r s k i n c o m e i n t o c o n t a c t with the
coolant. Observe the safety precautions
451
o n t h e packaging of the antifreeze and
additive (if used).
IMPORTANT: An authorised pressure cap (1)

MUST be used. If the cap is mislaid or damaged,
request a replacement cap from your dealer.
4 - 43
1. Turn the heating control knob (clockwise) to

maximum heat output.
452
2. Check that the heating cut-off valve (1) is open.
The valve is at the rear right on the cylinder
head of the engine.
3. Take off the lower cooler hose and drain all the
coolant into an appropriate container and
dispose of properly.
453
4. Remove the coolant drain plug (1) from the rear
left of the engine block. Drain all of the coolant
into an appropriate container and dispose of
properly.
5. To increase the volume drained off, also take off
the caps from the cooler and expansion tank.
6. Use a standard cleaning agent for cooling
systems to wash out the system. Observe the
instructions provided with the cleaning agent.
Drain off the cleaning agent and leave the
engine to cool.
454
IMPORTANT: Never fill a hot engine with cold
coolant. The difference in temperature may cause
cracks on the engine block or cylinder head.
4 - 44
7. Refit the lower cooler hose. Use of water

8. Fill the system with clean water and leave the If you live in a country in which antifreeze is not
engine to idle for 10 minutes. Then drain off all available, use clean water enriched with 5 % chemical
the water. Leave the engine to cool. inhibitor. Consult you authorised dealer
9. Use a mixture containing antifreeze to clean the Mix three whole bottles of inhibitor with 28.5 litres of
system and fill with clean, soft water. Slowly fill clean water. This will provide you with more coolant
with coolant. Fill through the cooler filler neck solution than you need at the time. Store any excess
until the lower edge of the filler neck is reached. in an appropriately marked container and use to top
NOTE: To avoid air bubbles in the system, fill up.
the cooler as slowly as possible and thereby
allow any air pockets to disperse. Solutions containing inhibitors irritate the
The coolant used depends on what is available ! eyes and skin. They contain buffered
potassium hydroxide
locally. Refer to the following text:
Use of antifreeze
Use a solution of 50 % clean water and 50 % ● Avoid contact with eyes and avoid long or
antifreeze. The inhibitor already contained in this repeat contact with the skin.
antifreeze will be sufficient to protect your engine for
another 1200 hours or two years (whichever comes ● Wear eye protection when handling.
first).
● If the solution comes into contact with your
Cold preservative see page 4 - 9 eyes, rinse your eyes with water for 15
minutes and contact a doctor.
● After handling, wash your skin with soap and

water.
● Keep out of reach of children.
4 - 45
After filling the system – All coolant solutions

1. Check cooling system hoses and connections
for leaks.
2. Fill the coolant expansion tank up to the level
for cold conditions (1).
3. Start the engine and idle until normal operating
temperatures are reached.
NOTE: The coolant level will fall when the coolant
is being pumped through the system.
4. Switch off the engine and allow the coolant to
cool.
455
5. Take off the cooler cap (1) and fill the cooler
with coolant until the coolant level has reached
the bottom edge of the filler neck. Reinsert the
cooler cap. Top up the expansion tank with
coolant until the mark for cold conditions is
reached.
NOTE: If the vehicle will not be used
immediately after changing the coolant, leave
the engine to idle for an hour to ensure that
the antifreeze and/or chemical inhibitor is
distributed throughout the cooling system.
Leave the engine to cool down and undertake
a final check to ensure that the coolant level is
correct. 456
Coolant capacities
4-cylinder models 23 l
6-cylinder models 25 l
Specification for clean water
Total hardness 300 ppm
Chloride 100 ppm
Sulphate 100 ppm
Antifreeze specification
See page 4 - 9
4 - 46
OPERATION 31
REPLACE INTERNAL ELEMENTOF ENGINE AIR

FILTER
The air filter can be accessed from the right-hand side
of the engine.
1. Unlock the three retaining brackets (1) and take
off the air filter unit's cover.
457
2. Take the outer element (1) out of the air filter
unit by turning the end of the filter slightly in a
clockwise direction (to release the seal). Pull
the filter out of the housing in a straight line, not
at an angle, and ensure that the inner element
remains in place.
NOTE: Check the inside of the outer element. If

dust is found, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced.
458
3. Pull the inner element (1) out of the housing in a
straight line and dispose of correctly.
4. Clean the inside the air filter housing with a
damp, lint-free cloth.
5. Insert a new inner element and, if necessary,
outer element. Ensure that both elements are
fitted correctly before attaching the housing
cover.
IMPORTANT: Incorrectly fitting the internal filter

element may damage the engine. We would
therefore recommend having the element installed
by the authorised dealer.
459
4 - 47
OPERATION32
CHECK VALVE TAPPET CLEARANCE
When the engine is cold, unfasten the ventilation tube
from the valve cover after having removed the
retaining bolt. Unscrew the retaining nuts, take off the
valve cover and check the valve clearance.
The correct valve clearance for all models is:
inlet 0.25 +/- 0.05 mm
outlet 0.51 +/- 0.05 mm
460
Check the valve clearance on 6-cylinder engines as Check the valve clearance on 4-cylinder engines as
follows: follows:
Cylinder no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cylinder no. 1 2 3 4
Inlet - - * - * * Inlet * - - -
Outlet - * - * - * Outlet * * * -
Turn the crankshaft and align the valves of cylinder Turn the crankshaft and align the valves of cylinder
no. 1. Set the valves marked with a star (*) as no. 1. Set the valves marked with a star (*) as
specified in the table above: specified in the table above:
Cylinder no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cylinder no. 1 2 3 4
Inlet * * - * - - Inlet - * * *
Outlet * - * - * - Outlet - - - *
Turn the crankshaft and align the valves of cylinder Turn the crankshaft and align the valves of cylinder
no. 6. Set the valves marked with a star (*) as no. 4. Set the valves marked with a star (*) as
specified in the table above: specified in the table above:
4 - 48
OPERATION 33
REPLACEMENT OF THE AIR DRIER
CARTRIDGE OF THE PNEUMATIC BRAKE
Removing the air drier cartridge
Before removing the air drier cartridge, thoroughly
clean the area all around the air drier so that dirt
cannot enter the pneumatic brake system.
1. Depressurise the system by opening the
drainage valve of theair supply tank (or
tanks).
2. Use a filter key to loosen the cartridge and
lift it off. Dispose of the component in line
461
with national legislation.
Fitting new air drier cartridge
1. Clean sealing flange on air drier and
threaded bolt, and check bolt and sealing
face of flange for damage.
2. Apply thin coat of grease to seal ring on
cartridge and threaded bolt on air drier.
3. Screw cartridge on to air drier until seal
makes contact with contact face on flange.
Then tighten by hand (half a turn). Tighten
the component to no more than 15 Nm. Do
NOT fully tighten.
4. Pressurise the air tank and check for leaks. If the
component needs tightening, you will first have
to depressurise the system for a second time.
5. Pressurise the pneumatic brake system again
and again check for leaks.
4 - 49
EVERY 3 YEARS
Following work:
OPERATION 34
MAINTENANCE OF AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
After 3 years, the performance of the air conditioning

system may be reduced. . At this time it is
recommended that you have to filter drier (1) changed
and the complete system checked by your authorised
dealer using specialised equipment.
WARNING: The boiling point of the

! refrigerant used in the air conditioning
systems is -12 C. 462
●
Do not subject any parts of the air
conditioning system to naked flames or
excess heat since this may result in a fire or
explosion.
●
Never disconnect or disassemble any part of
the air conditioning system. Escaping
refrigerant will cause frostbite. Allowing
refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere is
also illegal in many countries.
●
If your skin comes into contact with
refrigerant, follow the procedure you would
use for frostbite. Use your hand or water of
32 - 38 °C to heat the body part in question.
Cover the area loosely with a bandage to
protect the affected area and to prevent
infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
● If refrigerant gets into your eyes, rinse your
eyes immediately with cold water for at least
5 minutes. Go straight to a doctor.
4 - 50
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
(work to be undertaken when required)
OPERATION 35
CHECK
BRAKE PEDAL LINKAGE
The hydraulically actuated brakes do not have to be
set. However, if part of the brake pedal linkage or
the master cylinder group is replaced or if the pedal
linkage does not engage correctly in the hole to the
right of the pedal shaft, adjust the pedal as follows:
463
Adjust the clevis by loosening the lock nuts. The
distance between the bulkhead and the centre of
the clevis hole should be 137 mm. Adjust both
pedals and check that the pedal linkage engages
correctly.
464
4 - 51
OPERATION 36
CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL HUBS
Use a torque wrench to check that the front and rear
wheel hubs are secure (if necessary, use a torque
multiplier).
The tightening torque required is listed in the following
table:
All-wheel drive - adjustable front wheels
Retaining nuts of front wheel disc at hub 294 Nm
Retaining nuts of front wheel disc at rim 250 Nm
Adjustable rear wheels - standard
rear axle
Retaining nuts of wheel disc at rim 250 Nm
Retaining nuts of wheel disc at rim 250 Nm 465
Rear axle with track adjustment
Clamping key -- retaining bolts 300 Nm
OPERATION 37
CHECK AIR PRESSURE AND TYRE CONDITION
Check and correct the air pressure of the front and
rear tyres. Check the tread and sides for damage.
Adapt the air pressure to the load being towed. Refer
to Tyres air pressures and permissible load bearing
capacities in section 3.
NOTE: If the tyres are filled with a calcium
chloride/water solution to act as ballast, a special
pneumatic test device should be used because the
solution will cause rusting on a standard test
device. Check the air pressure when the valve shaft
is at the bottom.
466
4 - 52
OPERATION 38
AUTOMATIC PICK-UP HITCH
WITH HOOK
Add a support load to the hitch hook, wherever
possible using a trailer or attachment. Ensure
that the hitch hook of the towing eye engages
and releases perfectly. If adjustment is
necessary, remove the load from the hitch
before adjusting the latch.
Downwards folding hitch
Loosen lock nut (3) and loosen retaining bolt
(4). Pull lifting strut off hitch and adjust its
length by turning the strut. Re-attach the lifting
strut to the hitch and temporarily screw in the
locking bolt. Repeat the process on the
opposite lifting strut and ensure that both lifting
struts are adjusted by the same extent.
Run a function check on the hitch to ensure
that both lifting struts support the hitch to the
same amount from the start of the lifting
process. Check that the hitch hook is correctly
engaging and releasing the towing eye; then 467
screw down the retaining bolts and lifting strut
locking nuts.
When the hitch is fully raised, ensure that the
pressure limit valve of the hydraulics is not
activated and that the lifting struts of the hitch
are not subject to tensile stress. Both of these
faults indicate that the lifting struts of the hitch
are too short.
If the unlocking cord of the pick-up hitch has to
be readjusted, loosen the lock nuts (2). Correct
the cord tension by turning nut (1) on the
tension cord adjustment screw. After the setting,
run a function check and then re-tighten the
lock nuts.
4 - 53
Hitch with hydraulic extension function

Loosen lock nuts (4) and turn the screw tube
(3) o n both lifting struts to the same length.
Ensure that both lifting struts provide the
same level of support to the hitch from the
start of the lifting process. Check that the
hitch hook is correctly engaging and
releasing the towing eye and retighten the
lock nuts.
When the hitch is fully raised, ensure that the
pressure limit valve of the hydraulics is not
activated and that the lifting struts of the
hitch are not subject to tensile stress. Both of 468
these faults indicate that the lifting struts of
the hitch are too short.
If the unlocking cord o f the pick-up hitch has to
be readjusted, loosen the lock nuts (2). Correct
the cord tension by turning nut (1) on the
tension cord adjustment screw. After the
setting, run a function check and then re-
tighten the lock nuts.
OPERATION 39
CHECK DRAIN BOTTLES FOR REMOTE
CONTROL VALVES
Whenever a hydraulic hose is connected up or
removed, the plug-in coupling of the remote control
valve loses a small amount of oil. Drain bottles (1) are
fitted under all remote control valves to catch any oil
which escapes.
Undertake visual inspection of oil level in the bottles. If
necessary, unfasten the bottle, open the cap and
drain the oil into a suitable container. Secure the bottle
again. Ensure that it is fitted correctly under the
control valve. 469
4 - 54
OPERATION 40
HEADLIGHT AND WORK LAMP SETTINGS
Headlight
Adjust the beam angle of the front headlight so that
oncoming drivers are not dazzled.
Both dipped headlights are set by turning the
three adjustment parts (1) by the correction
required. Turn clockwise or anticlockwise as
required. This will require the use of a small
spanner or socket as shown (see figure).
470
Work lamp
Depending on the model and equipment fitted,
adjustable work lamps are fitted on the front and
rear of the cab roof, either at the bottom of the front
of the cab or on the rear fenders. Non-adjustable
work lamps are fitted next to the headlights at the
front of the engine hood.
Headlights fitted on roof of standard cab
The work lamps fitted on the cab roof are set by
moving the overlying lever (1) back or forwards.
471
Headlights fitted on the grab rail of low roof
cab
Grip the headlight and turn up or down to adjust.
472
4 - 55
OPERATION 41
CHANGE THE BULBS
Front headlights and work lamps in engine
hood
IMPORTANT: All front headlights and work

lamps have halogen bulbs. Do not touch
halogen bulbs with your bare hands. The
moisture in your skin will cause the bulbs to 2
blow prematurely. Always grip and hold
halogen bulbs with a clean cloth or tissue.
473
The headlights and two non-adjustable work lamps

are mounted in a moulded unit attached to the front
hood assembly. All the bulbs can be accessed from
the rear of the lighting unit inside the engine hood.
To remove the bulb from the front headlights, open
the engine hood (see description in this section).
Carefully pull out the cable connection plug.
Turn mounting clip of bulb anti-clockwise by around
20 degrees and remove. The bulb may now be
withdrawn from the lamp unit.
To remove the bulb from the integrated headlight,
simply turn the bulb holder (1) approx. 20 degrees
anti-clockwise. The bulb can then be removed by
pressing in the bulb and then releasing it.
474
Adjustable work lamps

Work lamps mounted on grab rail
Unscrew the two retaining bolts to replace the bulbs
in the work lamps integrated in the grab rail. Pull the
lens housing out of the main lamp housing. Press
the ends of the retaining bracket (1) together and
remove the bulb holder from the unit. Use a clean
cloth or tissue to take out the bulb.
475
4 - 56
Work lamps fitted on the cab roof

Remove the two retaining screws (1) and lower the
lamp assembly from the roof. Rotate the bulb holder
anticlockwise and pull from the lamp housing.
Rotate the bulb anticlockwise and remove from the
bulb holder making sure to use a clean cloth or a
tissue.
476
Turn signal/side marker lights
To replace the bulbs in the rear signal and side
marker lights, unscrew the lights' retaining bolts (1)
from the underside of the rear fenders. Remove the
lamp assembly. Rotate the bulb holders anti-
clockwise. Press the bulbs in, turn to the left and
then remove from the brackets.
477
The front turn signal/side marker lights are fitted on
the grab rails. Remove the two retaining screws.
Remove the lens. To remove the turn indicator bulb
(1) or the parking light bulb (3) rotate anticlockwise.
When refitting the lens, ensure that the rubber seal
(2) sits perfectly in the headlight housing.
478
To remove, turn the bulb to the left and then pull out
of the bulb holder.
479
4 - 57
Ramp lighting
Unscrew the two retaining bolts. Take the lamp
housing unit (1) off the cab roof. Remove the cable
connector and take out the lighting unit. To remove
the bulb housing (3), turn the cable connector to the
left. Turn the bulb (2) to the left to remove it.
480
OPERATION 42
FUSES AND RELAYS
The fuse box is behind a panel to the right of the
instrument console.
To check or remove the fuses, take off the panel from
the right-hand trim panel in front of the C pillar. Take off
the fuse box cover to gain access to the fuses and
relay. The fuses and relay are shown diagrammatically
in figures 474 and 475. In addition to the main fuses,
there are maxi fuses which are used to protect the
main fuses and the electric circuits.
481
The system is designed for 60 fuses, even if they
are not all used in your tractor. Certain options may
also not have been fitted in your tractor. The fuses
for these options are however fitted and can
therefore be used as spare parts.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace a blown fuse with a
fuse with lower ampere rating.
482
The fuses are marked using colours and numbers.
Their locations and ampere ratings are listed in the
table on the next page.
Other relays are fitted at the front on the right-hand
instrument console.
In addition to the fuses in the fuse box in the cab,
there are also fuses on the battery carrier: A 250 A
main fuse (1) which protects the main power circuit
and two 30 A fuses (2) which protect the electrical
front power lift system and the power supply to the
electronics.
483
4 - 58
FUSES AND RELAYS

Fuse box, relays and maxi fuses
484
4 - 59
Mini fuses
No. Amps Circuit
1 10 Interior lights and ramp lighting + parking brake telltale
2 25 Cigar lighter + connection bushes
3 10 Air conditioning coupling
4 10 Additional sockets
5 30 Blower motor
6 10 Radio KAM + headlights ECU
7 20 Main light + hazard indicator switch
8 20 Ignition switch
9 25 Loader
10 - Not assigned
11 10 Front windscreen wiper
12 10 Rear windscreen wiper
13 10 Brake lights
14 15 Main light switch + indicator unit
15 20 Brake light switch + pedal lock
16 15 Trailer brake
17 25 Auxiliary socket
18 15 Blower motor + driver’s seat
19 7,5 Heated mirrors
20 10 Radar connection + gearbox diagnosis connection + additional diagnosis connection + ADIC keypad +
radar + reserve alarm
21 10 Starting aid equipment + water in fuel sensor + switch for brake fluid level
22 15 Side lights, right
23 15 Side lights, left
24 10 Lighting
25 15 Dipped beam head lamps
26 15 Main beam
27 15 Front work lamp (engine hood)
28 15 ECU work lamp
29 30 ECU work lamp
30 15 Rear work lamp
31 15 ECU work lamp
32 30 Indicator unit
33 25 Diagnosis connection + Fast Steer
34 10 Instrument cluster B
35 10 DC memory + SCM + ACM
36 10 Ignition instrument cluster
37 15 Gearbox ignition
38 10 Rear PTO switch + rear PTO warning light + HPL + SCM + PTO road speed + gear display
39 10 HPL + driver's seat + armrest + EDC + EDC lever
40 10 Radio
41 15 Front wheel suspension and PTO + EDC lever
42 10 Front wheel suspension
43 10 Ignition switch (operating position)
44 25 Socket for front attached equipment
45 25 8A mobile socket
46 -
47 -
48 -
49 7,5 Electronic front power lift control (EFH)
51 5 Fast Steer
52 15 Engine electronics
60 3 Main battery switch
4 - 60
Relay
15 Work lamps at front (engine hood)

16 Rear work lamps
17 Electrical supply
18 Main battery switch
19 Air conditioning system
20 Switchover relay for dipped beam on engine hood/roof
Maxi fuses
No. Amps Fused components
MF1 80 Engine, ignition relay
MF2 30 Lighting, ignition switch, main light switch, radio, ECU work lamp
MF3 40 B + KAM ADIC, engine ECU, gearbox ECU
MF4 40 Rear additional socket
MF5 80 Lighting
MF6 80 Cab accessories
Main fuses
All models
Fuse no. Amps Power supply protection
PF1 30 Electronic supply E
PF2 250 Main power supply + B
PF3 30 Power supply B + socket for front mounted equipment
4 - 61
Relay
485
Relay Function Relay Function
1 Front and rear windscreen wiper module 8 Brake lights
3 Ignition relay 9 Main beam
4 Side / rear lights and lighting 10 Pneumatic supply for trailer brake
5 Starter 11 Hydraulic supply for trailer brake
6 Blower motor 12 Supply for brake lights switch and pneumatic brakes
7 Dipped beam head lamps 13 Engine electronics
4 - 62
OPERATION 43
Cleaning the inside of the cab
The cab should be cleaned when the cab's interior
surfaces become dirty. Soak a cloth in warm water
and cleaning agent and wring out as well as possible.
From the rubber lining on the cab floor, the water may
run out through the open doors. Clean the trim
thoroughly and leave to dry naturally. Ensure that no
water goes under the floor mat.
NOTE: If working with chemical sprays, the
inside of the cab should be cleaned more
frequently so that chemical residue cannot
build up there.
486
Cleaning the seat and seat belt
The safety belt can be cleaned with clear soapy The paintwork is normally maintained by washing at
water. Do not use solvents, bleach or dyeing agents intervals which depend on the operating conditions
because these attack the material. and environment. In areas with high levels of
atmospheric pollution and in coastal regions, the
Replace the seat belt once it shows signs of fraying or
tractor should be washed more frequently. When
damage or general wear and tear.
working in the presence of organic or chemical
Do not use solvents to clean the seat. Only use warm materials, the tractor should be washed straight after
water with a little detergent or standard cleaning use. Use a gentle jet of water for washing and wash
agents for vehicle upholstery. Do not dampen the seat off the dirt with a sponge and a solution or car
any more than necessary. shampoo and water. Rinse the lather off frequently.
Rinse off the tractor thoroughly and leave to dry.
Cleaning the tractor from outside.
If the tractor is warm or is standing in the sun, avoid
If chafing points or deep scratches are found in the washing it. The paintwork will retain its sheen longer
paintwork and these expose the metal below, the as a result.
corresponding area must be touched up straight away
and treated with the genuine products listed given The paintwork should be protected by polishing it at
below: regular intervals with a special product (silicon wax).
This can be obtained from authorised dealers. Should
– Use fine emery paper to rub down the area the paintwork start to appear dull, use a wax polish
around the point of damage. because this has a slightly abrasive effect.
– Apply primer. NOTE: When carrying out work with materials
– Leave to dry and then rub down again with fine or plants which may swirl up into the air, the
emery better for better adhesion. tractor should be checked frequently for the
accumulation of dirt around the radiator,
– Apply paint. The best results will be obtained from engine and exhaust system to prevent
applying several thin coats of paint rather than
overheating or the possibility of such
one thick coat. Paint and primer are available
materials catching fire.
from authorised dealers.
– Once totally dry, apply a high quality polish and
polish smooth.
4 - 63
PROTECTION FOR ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WHEN

CHARGING THE BATTERY OR DURING WELDING WORK
Precautions
To avoid damaging the electronic/electrical system,
always note the following information:
1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit
connections, including battery connections,
when the engine is running.
2. Never connect charging components to
earth/ground.
3. Do not use external batteries with a nominal
voltage of more than 12 V.
4. Ensure that you always use the correct polarity
when fitting the battery or starter aids for
engines with an external battery. When using
jump leads to start the tractor, follow the
information in the user manual provided.
Connect positive to positive and negative to
negative.
5. Always disconnect the battery ground cable
before undertaking arch welding work on the
tractor or an implement attached to the tractor.
6. Route the ground cable of the welding device
as close as possible to the welding area.
7. If welding work has to be carried out near
computer modules, the modules should be
removed from the tractor. We recommend
having this kind of work undertaken by an
authorised dealer.
8. During welding work, never route welding
cables on, near or over power lines or
electronic components.
9. Always disconnect the battery's negative cable
whenever the battery is being charged with a
battery charging device.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulphuric

acid. If this comes into contact with skin,
rinse the affected area in water for five
! minutes. Contact a doctor right away. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes and clothes. Wear
eye protection when working near batteries.
IMPORTANT: If the two ground cable connections

on the battery are not separated before a charging
process or before welding work on the tractor or
attached equipment, the electronic and electrical
system will be damaged.
4 - 64
SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
The following information is intended to serve as a
guide when troubleshooting and addressing possible
malfunctions and breakdowns on the tractor.
Information is provided on the following topics:
● ERROR CODES
● ERROR RECTIFICATION
ERROR CODES
The electronic systems in your tractor monitor and
regulate the main components of the drive and
hydraulic systems. In the unlikely event of an error
occurring in one of these areas, this will be indicated
by a symbol (1) and a 4-digit error code in the dot
matrix display on the instrument panel. The first digit
of each number indicates the general error location
and the following digits describe the exact type of
error.
First digit Error area
0 ......................................................... General error
1 ................................... Electronic power lift control
2 ................................................................ Gearbox
3 ................................................................... Engine 487
4 ............................ Electro hydraulic remote valves
5 .............................................................. Rear PTO
6 ....................................................... All-wheel drive
7 ......................................................Differential lock
8 ..............................................................Front PTO
9 .......................................................Front power lift
10 ............... All-wheel drive – front axle suspension
14 ...........................................................Dashboard
15 ............................................. Steering assistance
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the
error type, e.g. interrupt, short circuit etc. For each
error code, the corresponding symbol appears above
the number. In this case, the tractor must be serviced
by your authorised Case dealer.
Should an error arise which renders the tractor
inoperable, an error code will appear on the
instrument panel. If this happens and you are unable
to remedy the error by yourself, please contact your
authorised dealer, quoting the error code.
ERROR RECTIFICATION
The following table shows potential problems, their
causes and how to remedy them. The various
systems are listed as follows:
5-1
SECTION 5 – TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY

Engine will not start Wrong starting procedure. Check starting procedure.
or there is difficulty
Low or no fuel. Check fuel level.
starting it
Air in fuel line. Bleed air from fuel system.
Low ambient temperature. Use cold start system.
Contaminated fuel system. Clean fuel system
and bleed.
Fuel pump out of order. Check fuse. If this is satisfactory,
change pump.
Clogged fuel filter. Replace fuel filter elements.
Malfunction of fuel injectors. Contact your authorised dealer.
Malfunction of fuel solenoid or solenoid Contact your authorised dealer.
relay.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity. Use oil with correct viscosity.
Incorrect fuel for operating temperature. Use correct fuel for temperature
conditions.
Low starter speed. Refer to 'Low starter speed' under
'Electrical systems'
Engine is not Clogged fuel filter. Replace fuel filter elements.
running smoothly
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
and/or stalls
Fuel solenoid incorrectly adjusted. Consult you authorised dealer.
Fuel cap vent blocked. Clean fuel cap in clean fuel.
Engine knocks Fuel pump control unit Contact your authorised dealer.
Low engine oil level. Fill as required.
Low engine oil pressure. Contact your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating temperature. Check thermostats.
Engine overheats. Refer to 'Engine overheating'.
5-2
Low engine Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
horsepower ballast.
Air filter blocked. Service air filter.
Low engine operating temperature. Check thermostats.
Engine overheats. Refer to 'Engine overheating'.
Clogged fuel filter. Replace fuel filter elements.
Incorrect fuel. Use correct fuel.
Valve clearance set wrongly. Check and adjust.
Fuel injection pump malfunction. Contact your authorised dealer.
Maximum 'no draft load' speed set too low. Contact your authorised dealer.
Air intake or exhaust gas manifold leaking. Check and address problem or contact
authorised dealer.
Malfunction of turbocharger. Contact your authorised dealer.
Attached equipment set wrongly. Refer to operating manual for attached
equipment.
Engine overheats Low engine oil level. Fill as required.

Low coolant level. Fill coolant expansion tank. Check
cooling system for leaks.
Defective thermostat(s). Check thermostat(s).
Cooler radiator dirty/blocked. Clean.
Engine overload too high. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
ballast.
Cooling system blocked. Rinse out cooling system.
Fan belt loose or worn. Check automatic tensioner, replace V-
belts.
Hose or hose connection leaking. Tighten hose connection and/or replace
hose.
Temperature display or sensor malfunction. Contact your authorised dealer.
Malfunction of viscous fan. Contact your authorised dealer.
Low engine Malfunctioning thermostats. Replace thermostat(s).

operating
temperature Viscous fan blocked. Contact your authorised dealer.
Low engine oil Low engine oil level. Fill as required.

pressure
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain off and top up with oil of correct
specification.
5-3
Excessive engine oil Engine oil level too high. Drain off oil as required.
consumption
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain off and top up with oil of correct
specification.
Filter of valve cover vent blocked. Replace vent filter.
External oil leakage. Seal leaks.

Worn valve guides/seals. Contact your authorised dealer.
Above-average fuel Low engine operating temperature. See 'Low engine operating temperature'.
consumption
Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
ballast.
Air filter blocked. Service air filter.
Incorrect fuel. Use correct fuel.
Valve clearance set wrongly. Check and adjust.
Fuel injection pump malfunction. Contact your authorised dealer.
Air intake or exhaust gas manifold leaking. Check and address problem or contact
authorised dealer.
Attached equipment set wrongly. Refer to operating manual for attached

equipment.
5-4
GEARBOX
Tractor not moving - Error code will indicate Contact your authorised dealer.
regardless of the gear source of malfunction.
selected
Unclean modulation using Time for compressed air to Contact your authorised dealer.
clutch pedal flow to gearbox clutch fill
time incorrectly set.
Jerky gearshifting Gearbox clutch needs to be Calibrate gearbox clutch or contact

calibrated. authorised dealer.
Jumps out of gear or sticks in Coupling/synchroniser rings Contact your authorised dealer.
gear worn.
Gear linkage out of
adjustment.
High gearbox operating Low gearbox oil level. Fill as required.

temperature
Incorrect gearbox oil Drain off and top up with oil of correct
grade/viscosity. specification.
Dirty or blocked gearbox oil Clean.

cooler.
Low gearbox oil operating Low gearbox oil level. Fill as required.
pressure
Gearbox oil filter blocked. Replace filters.
Noisy gearbox Low gearbox oil level. Fill as required.

Worn bearings or defective Contact your authorised dealer.

parts.
Poor gear shift quality Incorrect linkage adjustment Adjust linkage, replace worn parts or
or worn linkage. contact your authorised dealer.
Shift forks/selector lever Contact your authorised dealer.
worn.
Worn bearings. Contact your authorised dealer.
Clutch squeals/whines Leaking clutch or worn Contact your authorised dealer.

when inching pressure plate.
Powershift is jerky Gearbox needs to be Contact your authorised dealer.

or tractor stops calibrated.
5-5
HYDRAULICS
Hydraulic system not Error code will indicate source Contact your authorised dealer.
working of malfunction.
Hydraulic oil level very low. Fill as required.

Hydraulic oil filter blocked. Replace oil filter.
Hydraulic oil overheating Low hydraulic oil level Correct oil level as required.
or too high.
Hydraulic oil cooler restricted. Clean.

Hydraulic oil filter blocked. Replace oil filter
Flow regulator set wrongly. Allow to cool, adjust flow regulator

before starting up again.
Hydraulic load not adapted to Contact your authorised dealer.

tractor.
Locking device for remote Release pressure set too low. Adjust release pressure or contact your
control valve disengages authorised dealer.
prematurely
External cylinder operating Flow regulator incorrectly Adjust flow regulator.

too quickly or too slowly adjusted.
Remote control valve not Pressure hoses not correctly Connect pressure hoses correctly.
ready connected.
Load exceeds maximum Reduce load or use correct cylinder

system load. size (contact your authorised dealer).
Movement of remote control Adjust linkage or contact your

valve lever restricted. authorised dealer.
5-6
3-POINT POWER LIFT LINKAGE

3-point power lift linkage does Error code will indicate source of Contact your authorised dealer.
not move when transport malfunction.
button on multi-controller is
pressed Power lift not synchronous with Make control lever synchronous
control lever. with lower links.
Rapid lifting button in external Move button to correct position.

control position.
Lifting limitation set wrongly. Adjust lifting limitation.
External power lift operation Rapid lifting button not in external Centre button
not working control position. (external control position).
3-point power lift linkage does Lifting limitation set wrongly. Adjust lifting limitation.
not raise fully
3-point power lift linkage Drop speed controller set wrongly. Adjust drop speed controller.
lowers slowly
3-point power lift linkage Position/draft controller set Adjust position/draft controller.
reacts slowly to draft loads wrongly.
Drop rate too slow. Adjust drop speed controller.
Attached equipment not Refer to operating manual for

functioning properly. attached equipment.
3-point power lift linkage Position/draft controller set Adjust position/draft controller.
reacts too quickly to draft wrongly.
loads
Status light for 3-point power Position/draft controller set Adjust position/draft controller.
lift linkage flashes constantly wrongly.
5-7
BRAKES
Pedal feels spongy Air in the brake system. Bleed system. Consult you
authorised dealer.
Excessive brake pedal travel Defective brake piston seal. Contact your authorised dealer.
Brake system vent valve leaking. Contact your authorised dealer.
Brake valve(s) leaking. Contact your authorised dealer.
Brake discs worn. Contact your authorised dealer.
5-8
CAB
Dust entering cab Seal around filter element(s) faulty. Check seal integrity.
Blocked filter. Clean or replace filter.
Filter defective. Replace filters.
Seals around doors/windows or Replace seal(s).

roof hatch damaged.
Weak flow of air from excess Blocked filter. Clean or replace filter.
pressure blower
Heater or evaporator blocked. Contact your authorised dealer.
Air conditioning does not Heating controller activated. Turn temperature controller anti-
generate cool air clockwise as far as it will go.
Condenser blocked. Clean cooler radiator, condenser

and oil cooler.
Drive belt is slipping, worn or Check automatic tensioner and V-
damaged. belts.
Low coolant level. Contact your authorised dealer.
5-9
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical systems completely Battery connections loose or Clean and tighten loose
inoperative corroded. connections.
Sulphated batteries. Check that battery open circuit

voltage is at least 12.6 V. Check
level and density of electrolyte.
Low starter speed – Engine Battery connections loose or Clean and tighten loose
running slowly corroded. connections.
Low battery power. Check that battery open circuit

Incorrect engine oil viscosity. Use oil with correct viscosity for
ambient temperature.
Starter inoperative Loose or corroded battery or starter Clean and tighten loose
connections. connections.
Dead batteries. Recharge or replace batteries.
Starter safety switch activated. Place all gear shift levers in neutral
and fully depress clutch pedal.
Alternator light stays on when Low engine idle speed. Increase engine idle speed.
engine is running
Drive belt torn/loose. Check V-belt and automatic tension
device.
Battery malfunction. Check that battery open circuit

Alternator malfunction. Have alternator checked by

authorised dealer.
Batteries cannot be recharged Alternator malfunction. Have alternator checked by

authorised dealer.
Connections loose or corroded. Clean and tighten loose

connections.
Drive belt loose or worn. Check V-belt and automatic tension
device.
Replace V-belt if necessary.
Battery malfunction. Check that battery open circuit

5 - 10
SECTION 6
VEHICLE STORAGE
The following text is for information and guidance. For
further information on the long-term storage of your
tractor, please contact your authorised dealer.
TRACTOR STORAGE
Before putting the tractor into storage for an extended
period, please take the following precautionary
measures.
● Clean the tractor.
● Drain oil from the engine and gearbox/ rear

axle and fill up with clean oil.
● Empty the fuel tank(s) and fill the tank with

approx. 9 l of special storage fuel. Allow the
engine to idle for at least 10 minutes to allow
the special storage fuel to be evenly
distributed throughout the fuel injection
system. Observe the following point before
starting the engine.
● Check the coolant level. If a change of

coolant will be required within the next 200
operating hours: empty the cooling system,
rinse and refill. Refer to: step 32 in section 4.
Allow the engine to idle for 1 hour to
distribute the coolant through the system.
● Lubricate all lubrication nipples.
● Set the tractor hydraulics to position control;

raise the power lift linkage and support the
lifting arms in the raised position.
● Apply a thin coat of Vaseline to all exposed

hydraulic piston rods (e.g. the power-assisted
steering cylinder, power lift cylinder, control
slide valve).
● Remove the batteries and store in a warm,

dry place. Recharge regularly.
● Jack up the tractor and support the axles to

relieve the strain on the tyres.
● Cover the exhaust pipe.
6-1
SECTION 6 – VEHICLE STORAGE
PREPARATION FOR USE AFTER STORAGE

After extended periods of storage, prepare the tractor
for use again as follows:
● Ensure that tyres are at the correct tyre

pressure and lower the tractor to the ground.
● Refill the fuel tank(s).
● Check the coolant level.
● Check all oil levels.
● Install fully charged batteries.
● Remove cover from exhaust pipe.
● Start the engine and check that all

instruments and controls are functioning
correctly. With the tractor hydraulic system in
position control, fully raise the power lift
linkage and remove the supports.
● Check the operation of heating and air

conditioning systems (where fitted).
● Drive the tractor without any load to ensure

that it is operating satisfactorily.
6-2
SECTION 7
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
This section of the manual describes the function and
operation of all additional equipment which is
available as accessories from your authorised dealer.
Unless otherwise stated, these accessories can also
be fitted in the factory.
You will find the maintenance instructions for these
accessories in section 4 – Lubrication and
maintenance.
A comprehensive index can be found at the end of the
manual.
ROTATING BEACON
The switch for the rotating beacon is located on the
operating panel (1) in the roof console. Press the
button featuring the rotating beacon symbol to
activate the power supply to the light.
The rotating beacon kit consists of a rotating beacon,
a mounting rack and attachment parts for mounting
on the roof.
488
A socket connected to the tractor's power supply (1)
is located on each side of the cab at the rear of the
tractor. If a socket is not being used, make sure the
protective cover is closed to prevent water from
entering the socket.
489
7-1
SECTION 7 – ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
COOLANT PREHEATER GEARBOX OIL PREHEATER

This accessory consists of a heating element which is This special accessory fitted by your dealer consists of a
installed in one of the drain journals on the right-hand heating element for a 115 volt AC that is used in the
side of the engine block. The heating rod is only gearbox housing. The connection cable for the heating
available in a 115 V AC version. This accessory element is pre-fitted on the left-hand side of the PTO
makes the starting process easier at temperatures of housing. This accessory allows the gearbox and
down to -29°C. hydraulic oil to be heated up quickly when using the
tractor in cold areas.
WARNING: To avoid electric shocks or
other injuries, never use an unearthed or WARNING: If using extension cables
defective extension cable. Always use an which are not earthed or are
! earthed three-core extension cable designed
to carry at least 15 A together with a
insufficiently earthed, there is a risk of
electric shock or other injuries. Always
differential circuit breaker or residual current
circuit breaker.
! use a grounded, three core extension
cord, which is rated for at least a 15 amp
load, in conjunction with a residual
To operate the heating element, connect the cable current circuit breaker or ground
plug (1) to a suitable 115 V socket (or 230 V with leakage trip device.
transformer) for up to four hours before performing the
starting process in cold weather conditions. In order to activate, use the free end of the connection
NOTE: The heating element may remain cable (1) to connect the heating element to a suitable
connected for longer than four hours without 115 volt socket (or, if necessary, a corresponding
causing any damage. However, no significant mains supply). Leave the device switched on for up to
increase in heating output will be achieved after four hours before starting the engine.
this time has elapsed. NOTE: The heating element may remain
connected for longer than four hours without
causing any damage. However, no significant
increase in heating output will be achieved after
this time has elapsed.
7-2
ADDITIONAL FRONT HEADLIGHTS

A set of additional dipping headlights are available for
use with front mounted equipment. Located on the
upper right and left-hand grab rails, the headlight
beams pass over front mounted equipment to
illuminate the road ahead.
To turn on the auxiliary headlights, depress the switch on
the lower left side of the dashboard. Once switched on,
you can raise and dip the additional headlights using the
multi-function switch to the left of the steering column.
490
7-3
FRONT LOADER ATTACHMENT CONSOLE AND CONTROL VALVE (JOYSTICK)

Operation
A. If your tractor is equipped with an optional
front loader, the valves are controlled using a
joystick on the armrest. By moving the joystick
in a diagonal action, two operations can be
undertaken at the same time.
Move the selector lever (2) in a longitudinal direction
for remote control valve (green) where there is a lock 1
in the float position and in the RAISE position.
Activate the selector lever (2) from side to side for
remote valve (yellow).
The remote control valve is shifted into its float
2
position by pressing the shift key on multi-controller
II and at the same time fully articulating to lower. Exit
the float position by pressing the RAISE or LOWER
selector lever (2) from Neutral.
There are 2 buttons (1) on the selector lever for
additional front loader operations.
491
Joystick operation
Push the joystick backwards to raise the loader. The
lifting motion can be accelerated if required by pushing
the joystick back fully against the spring.
By pushing the joystick forwards to the lowering
position, the loader will be lowered in a controlled
manner to the ground.
By pushing the joystick further forwards into the float
position, the lifting arms can be freely extended and
retracted. Selecting the float position by pushing the
joystick fully forwards against the spring will slow
down the lowering motion.
Moving the joystick to the left allows the bucket to
rotate upwards, whilst moving it to the right will make
the bucket move into the tilt position.
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the joystick in the raise
or lower position when the loader or bucket cylinder
is fully extended. This will cause the pressure relief
valve to vent, which over a period of time may
cause the oil to overheat.
7-4
Fitting the front loader to the attachment

console
WARNING: Before connecting or

disconnecting the loader hydraulic circuit,
SWITCH OFF the tractor's engine and
! relieve the pressure from the hydraulic hoses
by adjusting both float positions. Move the
joystick into Neutral.
There are different procedures for mounting or

removing the front loader lifting arms depending on
the country. Follow the assembly instructions in the
operating manual for your loader.
IMPORTANT: Before connecting the hydraulic

hoses, switch off the engine and clean the
connectors thoroughly to prevent the oil from
becoming contaminated. The loader cylinders are
operated with oil from the tractor's hydraulic
system. For this reason, the hydraulic system oil
level must always be checked and refilled after
connecting and operating the loader cylinders.
Operating the tractor with a low oil level can lead to
damage to the rear axle and the gearbox parts.
7-5
Connecting the front loader hydraulics

IMPORTANT: To ensure that the hydraulic couplings
between the tractor and front loader are sealed
perfectly, before connecting up, you must ensure that
the sealing faces of both coupling elements are
perfectly clean.
Ensure that the front loader is fitted to the tractor's attachment
console in a stable manner. Fold up the protective cover (2)
of the tractor's multi-coupling until it snaps into a vertical
position.
Pull out the lock button (1), and lift the handle (4) of the clamp
arm upwards until sufficient clearance is obtained to
manoeuvre the loader manifold into position. Ensure the two
centring pins on the front loader manifold align with the holes
(3) in the tractor manifold.
Pull down the clamp handle until the lock button engages in
the manifold block.
IMPORTANT: When the front loader is removed, the
cover of the tractor's multi-coupling must be closed
perfectly so that no dust or dirt can get in. 492
Connection of additional functions
The additional functions are controlled electrically by a
cable which is connected to the socket (1) on the front
loader attachment console. When the loader is removed
from the tractor ensure the cover on the electrical socket
is closed to protect the internal components.
Once the front loader has been reattached, start the
engine and use the front loader joystick to move
through all the movements. Switch the engine off
again and check the hydraulic couplings for leaks.
493
7-6
SECTION 8
TRACTOR SPECIFICATION
General information
The technical data in this section is for your
information and guidance. For further information on
your tractor and its equipment, please contact your
authorised Case dealer.
CNH is constantly redeveloping its products and
reserves the right to modify prices, technical data and
equipment parts at any time and without notice.
All the data provided in these operating instructions
are subject to change. Dimensions and weights are
approximations only. The illustrations do not depict a
standard version of the tractor and do not indicate that
these functions are available in all countries. For
detailed information on individual models, please
contact your authorised Case dealer.
8-1
SECTION 8 – TRACTOR SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DIMENSIONS MAXXUM 110, MAXXUM 120, MAXXUM 130
NOTE: The following dimensions relate to standard tractors with tyre sizes as listed below. For
larger or smaller tyres, make the appropriate allowances.
The following dimensions relate to tractors with the tyre sizes listed: Front 14.9 R24
Rear 16.9 R38
A. Width over fender
Standard fender mm 2170
Removable fender mm 2550
B. Ground clearance below front axle mm 422
C. Front axle tracking setting mm 1407 - 2108
D. Rear axle tracking setting mm 1426 - 2026
E. Height to exhaust pipe mm 2876
F. Height to:
– Standard cab roof mm 2856
– Roof height of spring-mounted cab mm 2921
G. Ground clearance below drawbar mm 426

H. Overhang of front power lift mm 725
J. Wheelbase mm 2412
8-2
K. Overall length to end of lower links mm 4182

Minimum turning circle
(with steering brake) mm 3540
(without steering brake) mm 4940
NOTE: If your tractor is fitted with tyres of a different size, the dimensions specified above will vary
due to the differing rolling radius and nominal width of the tyres fitted.
8-3
GENERAL DIMENSIONS MAXXUM 115, MAXXUM 125, MAXXUM 140
NOTE: The following dimensions relate to standard tractors with tyre sizes as listed below. For
larger or smaller tyres, make the appropriate allowances.
The following dimensions relate to tractors with the tyre sizes Front 14.9 R28
listed: Rear 18.4 R38
A. Width over fender

Standard fender mm 2170
Removable fender mm 2550
B. Ground clearance below front axle mm 480
C. Front axle tracking setting mm 1407 - 2108
D. Rear axle tracking setting mm 1426 - 2026
E. Height to exhaust pipe mm 2920
F. Height to:
– Standard cab roof mm 2900
– Roof height of spring-mounted cab mm 2965
G. Ground clearance below drawbar mm 470
H. Overhang of front power lift mm 675
J. Wheelbase mm 2661
8-4
K. Overall length to end of lower links mm 4481

Minimum turning circle
(with steering brake) mm 3720
(without steering brake) mm 5360
NOTE: If your tractor is fitted with tyres of a different size, the dimensions specified above will vary
due to the differing rolling radius and nominal width of the tyres fitted.
8-5
VEHICLE WEIGHTS MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM

110 120 130 115 125 140
4WD standard axle
Front axle kg 1976 1976 1976 2056 2056 2060
Rear axle kg 2964 2964 2964 3084 3084 3090
Total weight kg 4940 4940 4940 5140 5140 5150
4WD – spring-mounted axle
Front axle kg 2040 2040 2040 2128 2128 2132
Rear axle kg 3060 3060 3060 3192 3192 3198
Total weight kg 5100 5100 5100 5320 5320 5360
NOTE: The weight specifications given above relate to standard models with a full fuel tank but do
not include driver, ballast or additional equipment.
CAPACITIES MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM
110 120 130 115 125 140
Fuel tank Litres 180 180 180 254 254 254
Cooling system Litres 23 23 23 25 25 25
Engine (with filter) Litres 10 10 10 15 15 15
Gearbox/rear axle
with 16x16 gearbox Litres 62
4WD front wheel hub
Litres 1.25
(Filling capacity for one hub only)
4WD front wheel hub
(with brakes) Litres 3.0
(Filling capacity for one hub only)
4WD front axle differential 9.0
Litres
(All axles)
NOTE: Operation of the remote control valves will influence the oil level of the rear axle. When
filling up the rear axle to cover the oil requirements of the remote control valves, do not add more
than 20 litres to bring the oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick.
NOTE: Alternatively, remote valves with a total oil capacity of up to 18 litres may be connected to the tractor's
hydraulic system without adding oil, provided the tractor is being operated on level ground.
8-6
ENGINE MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM

110 120 130 115 125 140
Specified engine output (at nominal
engine speed, kW 82 89.5 97 86 93 104
ISO TR 14396)
HP 112 121 132 117 126 141
with charging kW 97 104 104 104 112 123
HP 132 141 141 141 152 167
Number of cylinders 4 4 4 6 6 6
Valves per cylinder 4 4 4 4 4 4
Intake Turbocharger and charged air cooler
Hole mm 104
Stroke mm 132
Cubic capacity cm3 4485 6728
Compression ratio 16.5:1 17.5:1

Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-5-3-6-2-4
Nominal engine speed rpm 2200
Idling speed rpm 800-850
Maximum idling speed rpm 2375
Valve tappet clearance (cold)
Inlet mm 0.25
Outlet mm 0.51
FUEL SYSTEM
System High pressure common rail
Fuel injection pump Bosch CR-CP3 SL
COOLING SYSTEM
Type Overpressure system, with main current bypass and expansion tank
Viscous fan,
Number of fins 5
– Diameter mm 510
Thermostat
– opens at °C 81
– fully open at °C 96
Radiator cap bar 1.0
8-7
GEARBOX MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM

110 120 130 115 125 140
16x16 40 km/h
17x16 ECO 40 km/h
17x16 50 km/h
Clutch type
Pressure plate immersed in oil, number of 4+4
discs
Creeper gear operation Switch
BRAKES
Service brake Automatically resetting, wet disc brake on axle shafts on
differential gearbox
Number of brake discs on each side 1 friction disc and 1 steel disc
Parking brake Wet disc brake on bevel pinion shaft
Number of brake discs 3
REAR PTO
Speed and type
– Two speeds 540/1000, shiftable, single drive
– Two speeds 540/1000 non-shiftable, single drive
– Three speeds 540/540E/1000, shiftable, single drive
– Basic speeds 540/540E/1000, shiftable, single drive
Engine speed at PTO speed
– 540 1969
– 540E 1546
– 1000 2120
(shiftable and non-shiftable)
Road speed,
revolutions of PTO
per wheel revolution
– 540 9.93 : 1
– 540E 12.65 : 1
– 1000 17.08 : 1
Fender mounted PTO controls optional
8-8
FRONT PTO MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM

110 120 130 115 125 140
Type – one-speed, full single drive
– Shaft 6-spline 39.4 mm
– Drive electro-hydraulic
– Direction of rotation anticlockwise
Engine speed at PTO speed
– 1000 rpm only 2120
STEERING
Type Hydrostatic, with tilting/removable steering wheel
Rotations from stop to stop

– without Quick Turn 3.9
– with Quick Turn 10° to the right or left
Negative toe-in of front wheels mm 0 +/-3
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE

Front end up 35°
Rear end up 35°
Right side up 30°
Left side up 30°
HYDRAULICS SYSTEM
Hydraulics system Electronic power lift control
Hydraulic pump adjustable
Flow rate at nominal engine speed litres/ 113
min
Maximum working pressure at nominal 210 +/- 5
bar
engine speed
3-POINT POWER LIFT

Three-point linkage
– with EDC Version II /III w/with quick hitches

– with EDC (option) Version II/III w with removable lower link ends
– with EDC (option) Version II w with removable lower link ends
8-9
LIFTING POWER MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM

110 120 130 115 125 140
Manufacturer's information in accordance with OECD criteria – maximum lifting power, 610 mm
behind linkage ends through total lifting range at 90 % of maximum hydraulic pressure:
with 2 x 80 mm power lift cylinders
- with removable lower link ends kg 3742
- with quick hitches kg 3783
– with removable lower link ends kg 4741
Manufacturer's information in accordance with OECD criteria
maximum lifting power at linkage ends at maximum hydraulic pressure:
Manufacturer's information in accordance with SAE J283/ASAE criteria – maximum lifting power, 610
mm behind linkage ends through total lifting range at 90 % of maximum hydraulic pressure:
Manufacturers' figures to SAE J283/ASAE criteria -
maximum lifting power at linkage ends at maximum hydraulic pressure:
NOTE: All lifting power values are theoretical.
8 - 10
REMOTE CONTROL MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM

110 120 130 115 125 140
VALVES
Standard Two
Optional Four
Maximum pressure at nominal engine 210 +/-5
bar
speed
Maximum flow rate through one valve Litres/ 100 +/-5
at nominal engine speed min
HYDRAULIC FRONT POWER LIFT (HPL)

Three-point linkage Category II
Lifting force over entire lifting range at
610 mm distance from connection kg 2750
points
FRONT REMOTE CONTROL VALVES (with HPL only)

Electronic joystick controls Optional – two
Maximum flow rate through one valve Litres/ 100 +/-5
at nominal engine speed min
8 - 11
ELECTRICAL MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM MAXXUM

110 120 130 115 125 140
EQUIPMENT
Alternator 12 V, 120 A
Battery
– Standard Minimum capacity 12 V, 107 AH, 800 cca

– heavy loads Minimum capacity 12 V, 132 Ah, 960 cca
Starter motor Positive engagement, with solenoid
3.0 kw – gearbox reduction
Cold start system Inlet manifold pre-heating

Bulbs with rating
– Headlight 60/55W - H4
– Parking light (front) 5W - R5W
– Parking light (rear) 5W - P21/5W
– Work lamp (roof) 55W - H3
– Extra work lamp 50W - GE866
– Direction of travel indicator (front) 21W - PY21W
– Direction of travel indicator (rear) 21W - R21W
– Brake lights 21W - P21/5W
– Number plate light 5W - R5W
8 - 12
MINIMUM TIGHTENING TORQUE OF SCREW CONNECTIONS

IN FOOT-POUNDS (NEWTON METER) FOR NORMAL
ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS OF
INCH SCREWS AND NUTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKING
NUTS
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C
SIZE or with ZnCr or with ZnCr or with ZnCr with GR5 with GR8
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8)
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20)
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35)
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57)
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88)
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125)
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172)
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (305)
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494)
1.0 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739)
NOTE: Tightening torques marked with a * are given in inch x pound.
IDENTIFICATION OF CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE SAE SAE

QUALITY QUALITY QUALITY
GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8 STANDARD SAE QUALITY SAE QUALITY
NUTS GRADE 5 GRADE 8
HEX NUT NUTS
LOCK NUTS
STRENGTH CLASS DESIGNATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCH GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE B THREE NOTCHES
GRADE C SIX NOTCHES
NOTCHES MAY NOT NECESSARILY
BE LOCATED AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARKS
CLASS B LETTER B
CLASS C LETTER C
8 - 13
MINIMUM TIGHTENING TORQUES OF SCREW CONNECTIONS

IN FOOT-POUNDS (NEWTON METER) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS WITH METRIC
SCREWS AND NUTS
CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCK NUT

CL.8
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED with CL 8.8

SIZES with ZnCr with ZnCr with ZnCr BOLT
M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)
NOTE: Tightening torques marked with * in inch-pounds.
ASSIGNMENT OF
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
STRENGTH CLASSES OF 5.6 AND HIGHER
MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION
STRENGTH CLASS
HEXAGON NUTS and LOCK NUTS

STRENGTH CLASS 05 AND HIGHER
MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION
STRENGTH CLASS CLOCKWISE
8 - 14
SECTION 9
-------- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CHECKLIST FOR 50-HOUR INITIAL INSPECTION

CHECK AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED
CHECKS WITH ENGINE SWITCHED OFF: SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:

1. Check tyre pressures and condition 1. Tightening torque of cab and safety frame
of tyres ❒ mounting (as required) ❒
2. Clean radiator, oil cooler and 2. Neutral start switch operative ❒
air conditioning condenser core 3. Operating manual available ❒
(where fitted) ❒
3. Check radiator coolant level and FUNCTIONAL CHECKS WITH
ENGINE RUNNING:
specific weight (1071 to 1083 at 16°) ❒
4. Change the fuel filter, drain the For the function check, the tractor must be heated
water and ventilate the system ❒ to operating temperature.
5. Inspect the poly V-belt ❒ 1. Check that all lights/instruments
are functioning correctly ❒
6. Check engine oil level ❒
2. Check that windscreen wiper/washer
7. Replace hydraulic and gearbox system is functioning ❒
oil filter ❒
3. Leaking fluids/oil ❒
8. Check gearbox/rear axle/hydraulic
oil levels ❒ 4. Maximum idle speed adjustment / idle
speed and fuel shut-off ❒
9. Check front axle differential oil level
(all-wheel drive) ❒ 5. PTO operation ❒
10. Check front axle hub oil level 6. Hydraulic system: ❒

(all-wheel drive) ❒ Operation with position and draft
11. Check brake/clutch master cylinder control ❒
oil level ❒ Operation with oil flow control ❒
12. Check clearance of clutch pedal ❒ Operation with levers for remote
13. Check brake pedal adjustment and control valves ❒
pedal equalisation ❒ PERFORMANCE CHECKS:
14. Hand brake cable setting ❒ 1. Engine operation, including function of
15. Check tightening torque of nuts accelerator and speed governor ❒
on exhaust manifold ❒ 2. Gearbox, including clutch ❒
16. Check that wheel rim clamp bolts 3. Steering system ❒
and lock nuts are tight ❒
4. Differential lock: Switching ON
17. Check that wells to hub nuts are tight ❒ and OFF ❒
18. Check that front end weight clamp 5. Braking effectiveness ❒
bolts are tight ❒
6. All additional equipment and
19. Lubricate front wheel bearings accessories ❒
(2-wheel drive) ❒
20. Lubricate all lubrication nipples ❒
21. Clean cab air filter (where fitted) ❒
22. Clean the air filter element and check
the hose connections ❒
MAINTENANCE CARRIED OUT

TRACTOR MODEL NO. ......................................... TRACTOR SERIAL NO. ..................................................
OWNER'S SIGNATURE......................................................................................DATE...................................................
DEALER'S SIGNATURE.....................................................................................DATE...................................................
9-1
SECTION 9 – CHECKLIST FOR 50-HOUR INITIAL INSPECTION
9-2
CHECK AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED
CHECKS WITH ENGINE SWITCHED OFF: CHECKING THE SAFETY ELEMENTS:

1. Check tyre pressures and 1. Tightening torque of cab and safety frame
condition of tyres ❒ mounting (as required) ❒
2. Clean radiator, oil cooler and air conditioning 2. Neutral start switch operative ❒
condenser core (where fitted) ❒ 3. Operating manual available ❒
3. Check radiator coolant level and specific
MAINTENANCE WHILE IN SERVICE:
weight (1071 to 1083 at 16 °) ❒
4. Change the fuel filter, drain the water and All in-service maintenance should be carried out
ventilate the system ❒ while tractor is at normal operating temperature.
5. Inspect the poly V-belt ❒ 1. Check that all lights/instruments are

functioning correctly ❒
6. Check engine oil level ❒
2. Check that windscreen wiper/washer
7. Replace hydraulic and gearbox oil filter ❒ system is functioning ❒
8. Check gearbox/rear axle/hydraulic oil levels❒ 3. Leaking fluids/oil ❒
9. Check front axle differential oil level 4. Maximum idle speed adjustment / idle
(all-wheel drive) ❒ speed and fuel shut-off ❒
10. Check front axle hub oil level 5. PTO operation ❒
(all-wheel drive) ❒
6. Hydraulic system: ❒
11. Check brake/clutch master
cylinder oil level ❒ Operation with position and draft
control ❒
12. Check clearance of clutch pedal ❒
Operation with oil flow control ❒
13. Check brake pedal adjustment
and pedal equalisation ❒ Operation with levers for remote
control valves ❒
14. Hand brake cable setting ❒
PERFORMANCE CHECKS:
15. Check tightening torque of nuts
on exhaust manifold ❒ 1. Engine operation, including throttle and
governor operation ❒
16. Check that wheel rim clamp bolts
and lock nuts are tight ❒ 2. Gearbox, including clutch ❒
17. Check that wells to hub nuts are tight ❒ 3. Steering system ❒
18. Checkthatfrontendweightclampboltsaretight❒ 4. Differential lock – engagement and
disengagement ❒
19. Lubricate front wheel bearings
(2-wheel drive) ❒ 5. Brake function ❒
20. Lubricate all lubrication nipples ❒ 6. All optional features and accessories ❒
21. Clean cab air filter (where fitted) ❒

22. Clean the air filter element and check
the hose connections ❒
MAINTENANCE CARRIED OUT

TRACTOR MODEL NO. .......................................... TRACTOR SERIAL NO. .................................................
OWNER'S SIGNATURE .....................................................................................DATE.................................................

DEALER'S SIGNATURE.....................................................................................DATE.................................................
9-3
9-4
SECTION 10
INDEX
A Conversion table for road speed ..................... 2-60
Accelerator pedal ............................................ 2-28 D
Additional equipment Diagnosis plug ................................................. 2-23
Engine coolant heating rod .........................7-2 Differential lock ................................................ 2-78
Front loader attachment console and Dimensions ........................................................ 8-2
joystick ...........................................7-4 Dot matrix display ............................................ 2-40
Gearbox oil heating element .......................7-2 Dot matrix symbols .......................................... 2-43
Additional monitor ........................................... 2-24 Drawbars and towing equipment
Additional power connections .......................... 2-22 Swivel-mounted drawbars ........................ 3-92
Alarm functions ............................................... 2-42 Driver presence switch .................................... 2-27
All-wheel drive ................................................. 2-80 E
Analogue display units .................................... 2-34 Electric mirror adjustment ................................ 2-18
Analogue/digital instruments ........................... 2-33 Electronic power lift control
Area accumulator ............................................ 2-52 Control console ........................................ 3-53
Area per hour .................................................. 2-52 Control panel ............................................ 3-56
Automatic engine shutdown ............................ 3-11 Draft control ............................................. 3-59
Auxiliary start system ........................................ 3-8 Error warning light .................................... 3-57
B Operation with armrest ............................. 3-52
Ball and socket joint ...................................... 3-102 Panel operation for position control ......... 3-61
Ballast ........................................................... 3-128 Position control ........................................ 3-61
Beep ................................................................ 2-57 Power lift position display ......................... 3-57
Brightness control ........................................... 2-39 Ride control .............................................. 3-63
C Settings .................................................... 3-58
Cab Telltales .................................................... 3-56
360 degree viewing roof with hatch ............2-6 Transport lock .......................................... 3-62
A/C switch .................................................2-13 Electronically controllable front power lift ........ 3-47
Blower controller .........................................2-9 Calibrating ................................................ 3-49
Cab air filter ..............................................2-10 Control ..................................................... 3-49
Cab door handle .........................................2-4 Error diagnosis ......................................... 3-51
Cab pressure ............................................2-11 Mobile application .................................... 3-50
Console light ...............................................2-8 Ride control .............................................. 3-49
Door handle ................................................2-4 STOP function .......................................... 3-51
Entering and exiting ....................................2-5 Engine coolant temperature display ................ 2-34
Hatch ..........................................................2-7 Engine number .................................................. 1-4
Heater temperature controller .....................2-9 Engine power management ............................. 3-12
Interior lighting ............................................2-8 Engine speed gauge ........................................2-34
Introduction .................................................2-4 Explanation of symbols .................................... 2-42
Low-roof ......................................................2-4 F
Opening the windscreen .............................2-6 Field end management
Outlet nozzles ...........................................2-12 Symbols ................................................... 3-19
Pressure display .......................................2-11 Foot brakes ...................................................... 2-29
Safety precautions ....................................2-10 Front axle suspension ................................... 3-121
Standard .....................................................2-4 Front power lift ................................................. 3-43
Storage containers ....................................2-21 Coupling the equipment to the tractor ...... 3-45
Sun visor .....................................................2-8 Decoupling the equipment from the
Ventilation system .....................................2-10 tractor ......................................... 3-46
Cab identification ............................................... 1-5 Operation ................................................. 3-43
Calibrating the road speed display .................. 2-46 Transport position .................................... 3-44
Calibration of rear wheel slip ........................... 2-56 Front PTO ........................................................ 3-42
Capacities ......................................................... 8-6 Front wheel fender ......................................... 3-122
Cigar lighter ..................................................... 2-17 Front wheel track setting ...............................3-120
Cleaning the tractor .................................. 1-1, 4-63 Fuel gauge ....................................................... 2-34
Clock ............................................................... 2-38 Fuse box cover .................................................. 4-7
Clutch pedal ........................................... 2-28, 2-65 Fuse box, relays ..............................................4-59
10 - 1
SECTION 10 – INDEX
Fuses .............................................................. 4-60 Windscreen washing system ....................4-18

G M
Gearbox .......................................................... 2-61 Main battery switch ........................................... 3-7
Auto shift during field operations .............. 2-69 Manual throttle ................................................ 2-29
Auto shift during road travel ...................... 2-71 Mobile phone ................................................... 2-24
Automatic function .................................... 2-68 Multi-function lever .......................................... 2-31
Calibration ................................................ 2-74 O
Changing the automatic range ................. 2-70 Odometer ........................................................ 2-51
Changing the shift point ............................ 2-72 P
Creeper gear ............................................ 2-75 Parking brake .................................................. 2-28
Digital gear shift display ............................ 2-65 Passenger seat ............................................... 2-21
Driving the tractor ..................................... 2-66 Power lift position ............................................ 2-40
Error codes ............................................... 2-74 Programming keys .......................................... 2-54
Range lever .............................................. 2-62 Programming the maintenance indicator ........ 2-58
Setting off automatically ........................... 2-73 PTO drive shaft ............................................... 3-37
Shuttle lever .............................................. 2-63 PTO operation ................................................. 3-12
Shuttle mode ............................................ 2-64 PTO speed ...................................................... 2-40
Speed matching ........................................ 2-68
R
Gearbox identification ....................................... 1-4
Radio/cassette/CD player ............................... 2-17
General information .......................................... 1-1
Rear PTO
H 3 speeds ...................................................3-33
Hazard warning switch .................................... 2-31 Auto PTO function ....................................3-38
Headland management control Change .....................................................3-40
Functions .................................................. 3-17 Description ................................................3-27
Heated mirrors ................................................ 2-18 External operation .....................................3-40
Hydraulic remote control valves ...................... 3-66 Fitting equipment ......................................3-28
I Operation ..................................................3-32
Instrument console .......................................... 2-30 Precautions for PTO operations ...............3-30
K PTO system ..............................................3-31
Keypad ............................................................ 2-50 Rear wheel rolling circumference .................... 2-49
L Rear wheel slip ................................................ 2-39
Label ............................................................... 1-14 Rear window ..................................................... 2-5
LCD ................................................................. 2-39 Relay ...................................................... 4-61, 4-62
Liquid ballast ................................................. 3-133 Relay box cover ................................................ 4-7
Liquid crystal displays (LCDs) ......................... 2-38 Remote control valves
Lower link and lift rod setting .......................... 3-83 Additional oil supply ..................................3-80
Lubrication and maintenance Control levers ............................................3-72
Air conditioning condenser ....................... 4-19 Crossgate lever .........................................3-75
Batteries ................................................... 4-27 Defining priority .........................................3-74
Change fuel pre-filter ................................ 4-35 Hydraulic master .......................................3-72
Change hydraulic oil and gear oil filters .... 4-33 maximum flow volume ..............................3-76
Check oil level .......................................... 4-29 Operation with sequence for automatic field end
Checking oil level, front PTO .................... 4-30 actions .........................................3-79
Coolant ....................................................... 4-8 Selector lever ............................................3-75
Diesel fuel ................................................... 4-4 Time setting ..............................................3-73
every 1200 operating hours or 12 months 4-38 Visual indicators ........................................3-76
every 1200 operating hours or 2 years ..... 4-43 Road speed display ......................................... 2-46
every 3 years ............................................ 4-50 Road speeds .......................................... 2-60, 2-76
every 600 operating hours ........................ 4-31 Rotating beacon ................................................ 7-1
First 50 operating hours .............................. 4-1 Rotating beacon power socket ........................ 2-20
Front axle .................................................. 4-37 Running in tractor .............................................. 3-1
general maintenance ................................ 4-51 S
Guards ........................................................ 4-6 Safety belt ....................................................... 2-27
Lubricants ................................................... 4-8 Seat with air suspension ................................. 2-25
Lubrication and maintenance table ............. 4-3 Setting the slip alarm point .............................. 2-56
Parking brake ........................................... 4-29 Setting the working width of attached
10 - 2
SECTION 10 – INDEX
equipment ....................................................... 2-55

Seven-pole socket ........................................... 2-23
Stabilisers, automatic ...................................... 3-89
Starter cable ...................................................... 3-5
Starter switch ........................................... 2-30, 3-8
Starting during cold spells ................................. 3-9
Steering column adjustment ............................ 2-30
Steering stops ............................................... 3-120
T
Telltales and warning lights ............................. 2-35
Three-pole additional socket ........................... 2-23
Time potentiometer ......................................... 3-73
Top link ............................................................ 3-84
Tractor controls ................................................. 2-3
Tractor identification .......................................... 1-3
Tyre care ....................................................... 3-136
V
Vehicle identification ......................................... 1-3
Vehicle identification plate ................................. 1-3
Vehicle storage ................................................. 6-1
Vehicle weights ................................................. 8-6
W
Wheel slip limitation ......................................... 3-61
Wiper/washer system ...................................... 2-32
Work lamps and rotating beacon switch .......... 2-19
NOTE: CNH Österreich GmbH reserves the right to

modify technical data from that specified in this text and
to make design modifications that differ from the
photographs and illustrations in this manual without
thereby being obliged to refit machines previously sold.
All the information in this manual is based upon technical

data that was accurate at the time of going to press.
This manual may not be reprinted or translated without

the written permission of CNH Österreich GmbH.
10 - 3

Case IH Tractor MAXXUM 110-140 Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Case IH Tractor MAXXUM 110-140 Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Case IH Tractor MAXXUM 110-140 Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CASE

MAXXUM 110 Multi-controller

MAXXUM 115 Multi-controller

END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS

Identification of the cab

ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

6. For tractors with all-wheel drive, the drive to the

8. When travelling downhill, keep the tractor in the

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

4. Avoid unintentional contact with the gearshift

OPERATING THE PTO

13. If the tractor rises at the front when heavy

TRACTOR MAINTENANCE Unqualified persons must not be allowed to remove or

● Do not try to feel for leaks with your hand.

● Shut off the engine and discharge the system

1. The cooling system works under pressure

DIESEL FUEL 9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.

● The cab structural frame MUST be replaced.

● The cab structural frame or suspension,

WHENEVER YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL IT MEANS:

ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE

● The cab structural frame MUST be replaced.

● The cab structural frame or suspension,

● Any damaged parts MUST be replaced.

Part number 82030522

Part number 81871702

Part number 87802167

Heater flange Warning!

Battery charging Continuous

Fuel level Turn signal Gearbox in neutral Socket

Windscreen Raise power lift

Engine oil Rear window Lower power lift

Air conditioner Gearbox oil

Headlight Air filter All-wheel drive Hydraulic and

Headlight All-wheel drive

Work Brake fluid

AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION

Noise level for operator Noise level for bystanders

Closed (1) Open (2)

Model Gearbox Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**

MAXXUM 110 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 120 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 130 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 115 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 78.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 125 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 78.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

* Test results are in accordance with EU directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at operator’s ear

** Test results in accordance with EU Directive 74/151/EEC, Annex IV.

Noise level for operator Noise level for bystanders

Closed (1) Open (2)

Model Gearbox Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**

MAXXUM 110 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 81.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 120 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 81.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 130 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 81.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 115 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

MAXXUM 125 Semi-powershift 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

* Test results are in accordance with EU directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at operator’s ear

** Test results in accordance with EU Directive 74/151/EEC, Annex IV.